i
 
 
 BRARY j 
 
 VERSITY OF 
 M-IKORNIA 
 
 IN DIEGO
 
 is antj iHtorgan's ILattu Series 
 
 EDITED FOR USE Iff SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 
 UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 
 
 EDWARD P. MORRIS, L.H.D., 
 
 PROFESSOR OF LATIN IN YALE UNIVERSITY 
 
 AND 
 MORRIS H. MORGAN, PH.D., 
 
 PROFESSOR OF CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY
 
 VOLUMES OF THE SERIES 
 
 Essentials of Latin for Beginners. Henry C. Pearson, Teachers 
 College, New York. 90 cents. 
 
 A School Latin Grammar. Morris H. Morgan, Harvard University. 
 #1.00. 
 
 A First Latin Writer. M. A. Abbott, Groton School. 60 cents. 
 
 Connected Passages for Latin Prose Writing. Maurice W. 
 Mather, formerly or" Harvard University, and Arthur L. Wheeler, Bryn 
 Mawr College. $1.00. 
 
 Caesar. Episodes from the Gallic and Civil Wars. Maurice 
 W. Mather, formerly of Harvard University. $1.25. 
 
 Cicero. Ten Orations and Selected Letters. J. Remsen Bishop, 
 
 Eastern High School, Detroit, Frederick A. King, Hughes High School, 
 
 Cincinnati, and Nathan W. Helm, Evanston Academy of Northwestern 
 
 University. $1.25. 
 
 Six Orations. $1.00. 
 Selections from Latin Prose Authors for Sight Reading. Susan 
 
 Braley Franklin and Ella Catherine Greene, Miss Baldwin's School, Bryn 
 
 Mawr. 40 cents. 
 
 Cicero. Cato Maior. Frank G. Moore, Columbia University. 80 cents. 
 Cicero. Laelius de Amicitia. Clifton Price, University of California. 
 
 75 cents. 
 
 Selections from Livy. Harry E. Burton, Dartmouth College. $1.50. 
 Horace. Odes and Epodes. Clifford H. Moore, Harvard University. 
 
 >1.50. 
 Horace. Satires. Edward P. Morris, Yale University. $1.00. 
 
 Horace. Satires and Epistles. Edward P Morris, Yale University. 
 
 #1.25. 
 Horace. Odes, Epodes, and Carmen Saeculare, Moore. Satires 
 
 and Epistles, Morris. In one volume. $2.00. 
 Pliny's Letters. Albert A. Howard, Harvard University. 
 Tibullus. Kirby F. Smith, Johns Hopkins University. 
 Lucretius. William A. Merrill, University of California. $2.25. 
 Latin Literature of the Empire. Alfred Gudeman, University of 
 
 Pennsylvania. 
 
 Vol. I. Prose: Velleius to Boethius |i-8o 
 
 Vol. II. Poetry: Pseudo-Vergiliana to Claudianus $1.80 
 
 Selections from the Public and Private Law of the Romans. 
 
 James J. Robinson, Hotchkiss School. $1.25. 
 
 Others to be announced later.
 
 CONNECTED PASSAGES 
 
 FOR 
 
 LATIN PROSE WRITING 
 
 WITH 
 
 FULL INTRODUCTORY NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 BY 
 MAURICE W.j MATHER, PH.D. 
 
 FORMERLY INSTRUCTOR IN CXTW IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY 
 AND 
 
 ARTHUR. L. WHEELER, PH.D. 
 
 PROFESSOR OF LATIN IN BRYN MAWR COLLEGE 
 
 NEW YORK .: CINCINNATI . CHICAGO 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
 
 Copyright, 1899, by HARPER & BROTHERS. 
 
 All rights reserved. 
 W. P. 8
 
 PREFACE 
 
 IN planning the present book it has been the aim of the authors 
 to present within two covers all the essential apparatus for the writ- 
 ing of average passages in Latin prose. By including in the Notes 
 on Idiom the requisite body of syntax, stated from the point of view 
 of the student who is to write Latin, they have dispensed with the 
 ordinary system of reference to three or four Latin grammars. 
 They believe that in this way not only much time will be saved, 
 but that the added convenience will produce more accurate result^. 
 since both student and teacher may refer instantly to the state- 
 ment of any of the ordinary principles involved. The addition of 
 the Latin text tends to the same end, and it is hoped that for the 
 exercises contained in this volume the student will rarely find 
 it necessary to refer to anything not included in the volume 
 itself. 
 
 The book is not intended to teach how to write isolated sentences 
 illustrative of given constructions, but it assumes that the pupil, 
 after a year or more of such practice (the time varying in differ- 
 ent schools), is ready to learn the art of writing connected narra- 
 tive in Latin. Recognizing that, in order to attain perfection in 
 writing any language, good models must be studied, the authors 
 have based their exercises on Caesar, Nepos, and Cicero, such 
 selections from these writers being taken as are usually read in 
 schools. About a page of Latin text serves as a model for each 
 exercise. 
 
 As the book is not for beginners, the individual exercises have 
 not been made vehicles for teaching any one or two constructions, 
 such as the ablative absolute, purpose, etc.; but the authors have 
 felt at liberty to introduce at any time even the more difficult con-
 
 vi I'kKFAClC 
 
 structions. Indirect discourse, for instance, is taken up at the very 
 beginning. But this will not be found to occasion too much diffi- 
 culty, for constant reference is made to the notes on Latin idiom 
 (pp. 1-69), where the construction needed is briefly explained from 
 the point of view of a writer, not a reader or translator, of Latin. 
 At the same time, the principle of gradation has been followed to 
 some extent, especially in the exercises based on the third book of 
 the Gallic War, the Alcibiades, and the Manilian Law. While, in 
 general, the vocabulary and the constructions for any exercise will 
 be supplied in the Latin text on which the given exercise is based, 
 yet enough variation from the language of the model is required to 
 give the pupil abundant practice in handling forms and construc- 
 tions. Where the vocabulary of the model is not sufficient, occa- 
 sionally the Latin word is given in a footnote; more frequently, 
 however, a synonym or hint is given in English, or, when possible, 
 the pupil is referred to a preceding section in the Latin text where 
 the word is found or at least suggested. By this means the pupil's 
 power of observation is increased, his interest is quickened by the 
 pleasure of discovery, and he will remember the word much better 
 than if he found it ready at hand in a dictionary. It will be seen, 
 therefore, that for work of this grade an English-Latin dictionary is 
 quite unnecessary. Indeed, the use of such a book would mean the 
 loss of no inconsiderable part of the training which is supplied by 
 the study of Latin writing. 
 
 In the Notes on Idiom no constructions have been explained ex- 
 cept such as are common in prose. The illustrative examples are 
 almost all, with the exception of the very simplest, taken from the 
 authors who serve as models for the exercises. It did not seem 
 worth while to cite the references, as doubtless the larger number 
 of the examples will be familiar to most teachers. 
 
 A number of recent examination papers from various colleges 
 have been inserted, in the belief that they will be found useful for 
 sight tests and occasional examinations. The notes accompanying 
 some of the papers belong to the original examinations. For the 
 text of the Latin models the small Teubner series has been fol- 
 lowed. The punctuation has been changed, however, to conform
 
 PREFACE vii 
 
 to the custom in English, and one i has been written in the genitive 
 of nouns in -ins and -iitm. 
 
 In conclusion, the authors wish to express their hearty thanks to 
 the teachers who have kindly furnished them with the examination 
 papers used in the book. Especial gratitude is due the editors of 
 this series, Professors Morris and Morgan, whose many kind criti- 
 cisms and helpful suggestions have been invaluable. The authors 
 will be glad to receive from teachers who use the book any correc 
 tions or suggestions whereby its usefulness may be increased. 
 
 M. W. M. 
 A. L. W. 
 
 Cambridge and New Haven, March, 1899
 
 SUGGESTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE BOOK 
 
 BEFORE attempting to write out an exercise the pupil should read 
 carefully, aloud if possible, the Latin text which serves as a model 
 for the exercise. Noting in every sentence the way the Latin writer 
 states his thought, let him consider how in English the same idea 
 would be expressed idiomatically and naturally. The use of so- 
 called "translation English" is to be avoided. The teacher may 
 point out, in assigning each lesson, certain sentences in the Latin 
 model in which the Latin and the English idioms are peculiarly 
 unlike. 1 The ablative absolute, for instance, can only rarely be 
 translated literally (see the examples in 125 f. of the Notes on 
 Idiom). Frequently a relative pronoun is employed in Latin where 
 a demonstrative or a personal pronoun is demanded in English (see 
 288). Again, two or three English sentences may become a sin- 
 gle sentence in Latin (see 296), etc. When a thorough familiarity 
 has thus been acquired with the given passage of Latin, the pupil 
 should drop the model entirely for the time being, and read over 
 the English exercise from beginning to end. Then before he writes 
 a single word, let him rapidly translate the exercise mentally and 
 without any assistance, even from the footnotes. If a word or a 
 phrase cannot be recalled, it may be disregarded for the moment. 
 After running through the exercise in this way, the pupil may get 
 such help as he can from the notes, the Latin text, or a Latin-Eng- 
 lish (iiot English-Latin) dictionary. 
 
 1 Sometimes a chapter of the Latin text will be found to epitomize 
 very well a group of constructions, e. g., Alcibiades 4 illustrates several 
 different constructions of place. Attention is occasionally called to 
 this in the notes to the exercises (see Exercise 35), and the teacher is 
 advised to do all he can in this direction. By use of the indexes the 
 teacher can easily supplement the grammatical references of any lesson.
 
 x SUGGESTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE BOOK 
 
 At last, when he has gained all the information possible about 
 the exercise, he is ready to write out his Latin version. He should 
 never forget that he is to produce one continuous piece of Latin, 
 not merely disconnected sentences. Let him observe with great 
 care, therefore, the ways in which his Latin model begins each new 
 sentence so as to make the thought follow on naturally and easily 
 from the preceding sentence. Let him also remember that the im- 
 portant word of each phrase, clause, or sentence, should stand at, 
 or near, the beginning; and that, furthermore, the sentence should 
 be so arranged that, when read aloud, it presents a pleasing succes- 
 sion of sounds to the ear. At the same time, due attention should 
 be given to the periodic structure of sentences, an arrangement 
 much more characteristic of Latin than of English. Especial em- 
 phasis is to be laid on the mastery of 284-297, in which the 
 arrangement of the Latin sentence is treated.
 
 PART I 
 
 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 i. Adjectives 
 
 1. AGREEMENT. An attributive adjective belonging to 
 two or more nouns regularly agrees with the nearest. Non 
 eadem alacritate et studio, not with the same energy and 
 seal. 
 
 2. A predicate adjective is regularly plural if it modifies two or 
 mo 'e singular subjects, and masculine if the subjects are living beings 
 of different genders; neuter if the subjects are things. Pater sororque 
 occisi sunt, father and sister were killed. Ira et avaritia imperio poten- 
 tiora erant, wrath and greed were more powerful than authority. 
 
 NOTE. If the nouns represent both things and living beings, there is no fixed 
 usage. 
 
 Predicate adjectives often agree with the natural gender of the subject. Ho- 
 minum millia sex perterriti, six thousand men badly frightened. 
 
 3. ADJECTIVES AS SUBSTANTIVES. To denote a class, adjectives 
 may be used in the masculine plural: omnes, all men, everybody; ma- 
 iores, ancestors ; minores, descendants; divites, the rich; pauperes, the 
 poor ; boni, the good ; docti, the learned, etc. In the singular a substan- 
 tive is usually expressed : docti, the learned, but vir doctus, the learned 
 man. 
 
 4. The use of neuter plural adjectives as substantives is common 
 only in the nominative and accusative. In the other cases the form is 
 ambiguous i. e., omnibus may be masculine, feminine, or neuter. In 
 such cases it is better to use the proper form of res : omnium rerum, 
 not omnium, as genitive of omnia. These neuter plurals often repre- 
 sent English abstract singulars : vera, truth ; falsa, falsehood, etc.
 
 2 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 5. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. Such phrases as 
 too severe, rather too talkative, etc., may be rendered by the 
 simple comparative : gravior, loquacior, etc. 
 
 6. If two qualities belonging to the same object are compared, Latin 
 generally expresses both by the comparative. Fortior est quam pru- 
 dentior, he is more brave than prudent. 
 
 7. The most common way of strengthening the compara- 
 tive is by multo. With the superlative, longe is a common 
 word. Multo nobilior, much nobler, but longe nobilissimus 
 fuit Orgetorix, Orgetorix was by far the noblest, 
 
 8. Phrases like as great as possible, as many as possible, etc., 
 are rendered by quam (with or without a form of possum) 
 and a superlative. Quam plurimi, as many as possible. Quam 
 maxima or quam maxime potest, as greatly as possible. 
 
 9. The English very is rendered by the simple superlative or the 
 superlative with vel. Virtus summa, or vel summa, very great valor. 
 
 10. Some Latin adjectives are used in direct agreement with a noun 
 to denote part of an object, where the English employs a noun with of. 
 Summus mons, the top of the mountain. Per mediam urbem, through 
 the midst of the city. So mult us, much (of); extremus, end (of) ; nullus, 
 none (of); totus, itnus, infimus, intimus, postremus, ultimus, reliquus, 
 primus. 
 
 2. Pronouns 
 
 11. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. These are not expressed ex- 
 cept for emphasis or to avoid ambiguity. Lego, legimus, / 
 read, we read, but ego tibi ignoccam? am I to pardon you? 
 
 12. The genitive forms mei, tui, sui, (plural) vestri, nostri, are chiefly 
 used as objective genitives. Habetis ducem memorem vestri, you havr 
 a Jeader mindful of you. But the genitive plural forms in -um (nostrum 
 and vestrum) are generally used as partitive genitives. Designat oculis 
 ad caedem unum quemque nostrum, he marks each one of us for slaughter.
 
 PRONOUNS 3 
 
 13. The genitive of pronouns of the first and second persons does not 
 express possession (12). For this purpose possessives are used. Amor 
 mei, love for me (objective), but meus amor, my love (for some one else). 
 
 NOTE. Latin has no personal pronoun of the third person except se (used 
 only as a reflexive). Where necessary, this want is supplied by a demonstrative or 
 relative pronoun (22). 
 
 14. Where several persons are represented by pronouns in Latin the 
 pronoun of the first person stands first, reversing the English order. 
 Ego et tu et tuus frater, you, your brother, and I. 
 
 15. DEMONSTRATIVES. Hie, this, refers to what is near the 
 speaker, and is called the demonstrative of the first person. 
 It often refers to the present as contrasted with the past. 
 Haec tempera, modern times, the present times. Ad hanc 
 aetatem, to the present time. 
 
 Closely allied is the use of ille . . . hie, the former (more 
 distant) . . . the latter (nearer). Curio dicebat hos tur- 
 pissimae fugae rationem habere, illos etiam iniquo loco 
 dimicandum putare, Curio said that the latter (hos) were 
 planning a most disgraceful flight, the former (illos) thought 
 they ought to give battle even in an unfavorable position. 
 
 16. Hie often refers to what follows, the following. Eius 
 belli haec fuit causa, the cause of the war was as follows. 
 
 Hie may also refer to what precedes, the above, the preced- 
 ing. Huic legioni Caesar indulserat praecipue, Caesar had 
 favored this (the before-mentioned) legion especially. 
 
 17. Iste, that (of yours), generally refers to that which con- 
 cerns the second person, and is called the demonstrative of 
 the second person. Extra istam coniurationem, outside that 
 conspiracy of yours. 
 
 18. Iste often has a contemptuous or sneering tone. Iste 
 Manlius, that (fellow) Manlius of yours. This tone is apt to 
 remain where iste refers to the third person. Istae copiae, 
 
 those forces of Ids. Compare the English "such."
 
 4 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 19. Ille, that, represents what is at a distance from the 
 speaker. It is called the demonstrative of the third person, 
 that of his, hers, theirs. Dux mei reditus, illius hostis, a 
 leader in effecting my return, an enemy of that man. 
 
 20. Ille often refers to that which is well known or has been 
 mentioned. Ille Romulus, the well-known Romulus. Aquila 
 ilia argentea, that notorious silver eagle. 
 
 21. The corresponding adverbs hie, illic, istic, hue, illinc, etc., often 
 maintain the same personal relations. Hue, to this place (where 7 am). 
 Illinc, from that place (where he is). Istic, there (where you are), etc. 
 
 22. Is, that, not so strong as hie or ille, is used as a pronoun of the 
 third person where one needs to be expressed (13 N.) and as an antece- 
 dent of the relative qui : is qui, he who, etc. 
 
 23. Is has often the force of talis, such. Est enim nobis is animus, 
 Quirites, ut, etc., we have such spirit that, etc. This use is frequent 
 when a relative or ut follows. 
 
 24. " That of" is not to be expressed by is and a genitive, but by a 
 genitive alone or by repeating the noun to which "that" refers. Con- 
 sidius, qui et in exercitu L. Sullae et postea in M. Crassi fuerat, Con- 
 sidius, who had been in the army of Lucius Sulla and later in that of (not 
 in eo) Marcus Crassus. 
 
 25. REFLEXIVES. The reflexives of the first and second 
 persons are the ordinary personal pronouns. Me consoler, / 
 comfort myself. Vobis persuadetis, you convince yourselves. 
 But for the third person is (22) is not used reflexively. In- 
 stead there is a special reflexive, sui, sibi, se, self, together 
 with its corresponding possessive suus, his, hers, theirs, its. 
 
 26. When the reflexive se refers to the subject of its own 
 clause, its use is simple. Patria vobis se commendat, your 
 country commends herself to you. 
 
 27. The reflexive may stand in a subordinate clause and 
 refer to the subject of the principal clause (indirect reflexive).
 
 PRONOUNS 5 
 
 Ariovistus respondit neminem secum sine sua pernicie 
 contendisse, Ariovistus answered that no one kad fought wit It 
 him (Ariovistus, secum) without his own (sua refers to nemi- 
 nem) destruction. Here secum is indirect reflexive referring 
 back to the subject of the main clause, Ariovistus, while sua 
 is direct reflexive, referring to the subject of its own clause, 
 neminem. 
 
 The indirect reflexive can be used only in subordinate 
 clauses representing the words or thought of the subject of the 
 main clause; e. g., the infinitive clause above represents the 
 words of Ariovistus r Nemo mecum contendit, no one has 
 fought with me, etc. 
 
 28. RECIPROCALS. Latin has no exclusively reciprocal 
 pronoun like the Greek a\\rj\wv, of one another. The re- 
 ciprocal relation is expressed most commonly by inter nos, 
 inter vos, inter se. Hi omnes inter se differunt, all these 
 differ from one another. Nos amamus inter nos, we love one 
 another. Note that no object is expressed with these phrases. 
 (For alius . . . alius, and alter . . . alter, see 45). 
 
 29. Ipse, self, separates with emphasis the substantive to 
 which it belongs from all others. But ipse often emphasizes 
 the reflexive, standing in the nominative rather than in agree- 
 ment with the reflexive. Neque abest suspicio quin ipse 
 sibi mortem consciverit, and the suspicion is not lacking that 
 he contrived his oivn death. So ipse me laudo, / praise my- 
 self (not me ipsum). 
 
 30. Ipse may represent various English idioms. Ipse aderat, he was 
 present in person. Ipso tempore, at the very time. Ipsa audacia, by 
 mere audacity. Valvae se ipsae aperuerunt, the doors opened of their own 
 accord. 
 
 31. Idem, same, often renders the English at the same time ; like- 
 wisf. ulso ; however, nevertheless, etc. Quidquid honestum est, idem est 
 utile, -whatever is honorable is at the same time advantageous. Inventi
 
 6 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 miiHi sunt qui vitam profundere pro patria parati esseut, iidem gloriac 
 iacturam ne minimam quidem facere vellent, there have been found many 
 who were prepared to give their lives for their country, who nevertheless 
 (iidem) were unwilling to suffer even the least loss of renown. 
 
 32. English the same as is rendered by idem qui, ac (or atque, cf. 266), 
 ut, or cum. De his eandem fere quam reliquae gentes habent opinionem, 
 in regard to these they have about the same belief as other peoples. 
 
 33. POSSESSIVES. These are to be omitted unless they are 
 necessary for clearness. Pater filiam amat, a father loves his 
 daughter (suam unnecessary). Fratrem vidi, / saw (my) 
 brother, but tuum fratrem vidi, I saw your brother. 
 
 34. Possessives are regularly used instead of a subjective genitive of 
 a personal pronoun. The love I feel, my love, is meus amor, not amor mei, 
 which means love for me (objective genitive, cf. 12). 
 
 35. Suus, the only possessive of the third person, is always used re- 
 flexively. The genitive of a demonstrative, therefore, is necessary to 
 render his, her, their, its, where these are not reflexive. Suam matrem 
 vidit, he saw his own mother (reflexive), but matrem eius (or huius, etc.) 
 vidi, I saw his mother. The English his, etc., has both uses. 
 
 36. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. The more common indefinites are; 
 aliquis (aliqui, 37), someone, any one quidam, a, a certain 
 
 quis (qui, 37), any one quivis, any one you please 
 
 quisquam, any one quilibet, any one you please 
 
 quispiam, some one, any one quisque, each 
 
 37. Of the two forms aliquis, aliqui, and quis, qui, that in -s is gener- 
 ally used as a substantive ; that in -i adjectively. Aliquis eorum, some 
 one of them, but deus aliqui, some god. So of the two neuter forms, 
 aliquid and quid are substantive, aliquod and quod adjective. 
 
 38. General differences between quis and aliquis: 
 
 a. Quis is less definite than aliquis (cf. English any and some). 
 
 b. Quis is used, with few exceptions, only after si, nisi, ne, num, and 
 in relative sentences; while aliquis is not often so used. Uti aliquem 
 locum colloquio deligeret, (they asked him) to select some place for a con- 
 ference, lure iurando ne quis enuntiaret inter se sanxerunt, they bound 
 each other by an oath that no one should divulge it.
 
 PRONOUNS 7 
 
 39. Quisquam and its adjective ullus are used chiefly in 
 negative sentences or sentences implying a negative. Ne eo 
 quidem tempore quisquam loco cessit, not even then did any 
 one leave his place. Et quisquam dubitabit ? and will any- 
 body doubt ? (This implies, no one will doubt.] Sine ullo 
 maleficio, ivithout any injury. 
 
 40. Quidam, one, a certain ; ( plural) certain, some, is the 
 most definite of the indefinites. Sese habere quasdam res 
 quas ab eo petere vellent, (they said) they had certain things 
 which they wished to ask of him. Quidam ex militibus, one 
 of the soldiers (cf. 71). 
 
 41. Quisque means each as contrasted with omnis, every. 
 It is not often used in the plural. Quisque regularly follows 
 the word to which it belongs. 
 
 NOTE. Quisque, each of several, and uterque, each of two only, are not to 
 be confused. 
 
 42. Quisque is often used after a reflexive. Suum quemque scelus 
 agitat, each man's own crime troubles him (his own crime troubles each). 
 
 43. Quisque is common with ordinals. Quinto quoque anno, every 
 five years. Cognoscit non decimum quemque esse reliquum militem sine 
 vulnere, he learns that not one man in ten (each tenth man) is unbounded. 
 
 44. Quisque is often^used with the superlative. Optimus quisque, every 
 food man, or all the best men. But with the positive write omnes boni. 
 
 45. Alius, other (of more than two), and alter, other (of two only), 
 represent various English phrases. Alter amat, alter odit, one (of the 
 two) loves, the other hates. Alter alterum odit, one hates the other (two 
 only). Quorum alius alia causa inlata petebat, of whom one alleging one 
 pretext, another another, etc. (more than two). Alios alii excipiebant, 
 they relieved each other (one another). Cf. 28.
 
 8 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 3. Nouns 
 
 46. APPOSITION. A noun in apposition agrees with the 
 noun described in case, and (so far as possible) in gender and 
 number. Caesari imperatori, to Caesar the general. Volup- 
 tates, blandissimae dominae, pleasures, most alluring mis- 
 tresses (agreement in gender). 
 
 47. An appositive to two or more nouns is in the plural. M. 
 Antonius, Q. Cassius, tribuni plebis, Marcus Antonius and Quintus Cas- 
 sius, tribunes of the people. 
 
 48. An appositive to a possessive pronoun is in the genitive, because 
 the possessive implies a genitive. Moleste fero me tuum studium adules- 
 centis perspexisse, / am sorry that I have tested your zeal as a youth, 
 i. e., the zeal of you a youth (cf. 34). 
 
 49. The Latin often employs an appositive where the English pre- 
 fers a clause of time, cause, etc. This usage is common with puer, vir, 
 adulescens, senex, dux, and official titles, consul, praetor, etc. Ego 
 Q. Maximum senem adulescens ita dilexi, etc., when a youth I so loved 
 Quintus Maximus, -who was then an old man, etc. 
 
 50. With nomen est and the like the name is often attracted into a 
 sort of apposition to the person. Ei nomen erat Marco, his name was 
 Marcus. The simple predicate nominative is, however, not uncommon. 
 Ei nomen erat Marcus. (For the appositive to a locative, cf. 140.) 
 
 51. PREDICATE NOUNS. A predicate noun is one con- 
 nected with the subject by means of a copulative verb. The 
 most common copulative verb is sum. 1 A predicate noun 
 agrees with the subject in case and, where possible, in gender. 
 Caesar est imperator, Caesar is general. Galli perfugae vide- 
 bantur, the Gauls seemed deserters. Cicero consul creatus 
 est, Cicero was elected consul. 
 
 1 Others are : no, become ; maneo, remain ; videor, seem. Also some 
 passives : appellor, be called ; habeor, be held, regarded ; creor, be elected, 
 etc.
 
 NOUNS: ACCUSATIVE 9 
 
 52. VOCATIVE. A vocative generally follows one or more 
 words of the address in which it stands. Quo usque tandem 
 abutere, Catilina, patientia nostra? how long, pray, Catiline, 
 will you abuse our patience ? In solemn appeals or in excla- 
 mations the interjection O may precede. O di immortales ! 
 
 Accusative 
 
 53\ Neuter pronouns or adjectives are frequently used in 
 the accusative with verbs which would take a different con- 
 struction of a substantive. Idte moneo, I give you this zvarn- 
 ing ; but de officio te moneo, / ivarn yon of 'your duty (cf. 78). 
 
 54. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. Two accusatives referring to 
 the same person or thing are frequently used with verbs of 
 naming, making, showing, and the like. Eum consulem 
 creare, to elect him consul. One of the accusatives may be an 
 adjective. Se fortem praebere, to show himself a brave man. 
 In the passive both accusatives become nominative. Is con- 
 sul creatur, he is elected consul. 
 
 Common words admitting this construction are : 
 appello, call, name facio, make 
 
 dico, call, appoint reddo, 1 make, render 
 
 nomino, name, nominate praebeo, show, present 
 
 crco, elect, create 
 
 55. Doceo, teach; rogo, ask ; posco, request ; oro, beg; 
 celo, conceal, often take an accusative of the person and 
 another of the thing. Docet te litteras Latinas, he teaches 
 you Latin. Te rogo librum, / ask you for a book. 
 
 56. Peto, ask, and postulo, demand, take the ablative of the person 
 with ab, quaero the ablative with ab, ex, or de. Auxilium a Caesare 
 petere, to ask aid from Caesar. 
 
 57. To ask about a thing is rogare or interrogate de aliqua re. 
 
 1 For the passive of reddo use fio. Castra tuta reddere, to make the 
 camp safe, but castra tuta fiunt, the camp is being made safe.
 
 IO NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 58. EXCLAMATIONS. An exclamation, if limited by an 
 adjective or genitive, may be expressed by the accusative. 
 Me miserum, dear, dear me ! 
 
 Genitive 
 
 59. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS. The dependence of one noun 
 upon another is ordinarily expressed by the genitive. This 
 dependence is often, but not always, expressed in English by 
 of. Eorum dierum consuetudine itineris nostri exercitus 
 perspecta, having noticed our army's way of marching in those 
 days. 
 
 60. If a noun denoting an action or feeling is limited by 
 another noun, we may put the dependent noun in the geni- 
 tive, whether it be subject or object of the action or feeling. 
 Mother s love (subjective) or love for mother (objective) may 
 both be rendered by amor matris. 
 
 61. The objective idea may be clearly expressed by means of a prep- 
 ositional phrase with in or erga. Noster in te amor, our love for you. 
 
 62. Such expressions as city of Rome, island of Paros, etc., are usu- 
 ally rendered by an appositive : urbs Roma, Parus insula. With flumen 
 the Latin construction is like the English. Garumna flumen, the Garonne 
 river. Flumen Rhenus, the river Rhine. 
 
 63. Names of wars are expressed by an adjective, as in English. 
 Bellum Punicum, the Punic war. Names of battles by an adjective or 
 a prepositional phrase. Pugna Marathonia, the battle of Marathon. 
 Proelium apud Salamina factum, the battle of Salamis. 
 
 64. Phrases like Cato of Rome cannot be expressed by a genitive 
 in Latin ; an adjective is required, Cato Romanus. Lysander Lace- 
 
 daemonius, Lysander of Sparta. 
 
 65. GENITIVE OF QUALITY. The genitive is frequently 
 used to express character or measure. C. Volusenus, vir et 
 consili magni et virtutis, Gains Voluscnus, a man of great
 
 NOUNS: GENITIVE II 
 
 discretion and merit. Fossa pedum viginti, a trench of 
 twenty feet (in width). Tridui via, three days march, 
 
 This genitive of quality or description may be used only when it is 
 modified by an adjective. Hence, a man. of discretion is not to be ren- 
 dered vir consili, but vir prudens. Tridui via is allowable because tridui 
 is a compound word, equivalent to trium dierum. 
 
 NOTE. Quality may often be expressed by either the genitive or the ablative 
 (cf. 117) ; but measure is to be expressed by the genitive, while bodily character- 
 istics generally require the ablative. Tridui via, three days' march, but capillo 
 sunt promisso, they are long-haired. 
 
 66. The genitive of measure may not be used in dependence upon an 
 adjective expressing high, broad, etc.; an accusative of extent (135) is 
 required. Fossa xv pedes lata, a ditch fifteen feet broad. 
 
 67. The genitive of quality does not often limit a proper name, but 
 depends upon a common noun in apposition with the name. Volusenus, 
 vir magni consili, Volusenus, a man of great prudence, is better than 
 Volusenus magni consili (cf. 118). 
 
 68. Note that Volusenus, a prudent man = Volusenus prudens or Volu- 
 senus, vir prudens ; Volusenus, a man of great prudence = Volusenus, vir 
 magni consili or vir prudentissimus ; the prudent Volusenus = Volusenus 
 tile prudens (cf. 20). 
 
 69. PREDICATE GENITIVE. The possessive genitive is 
 often used in the predicate. It is common with esse and 
 facere. Eiusdem civitatis fuit, he belonged to the same state, 
 Omnem oram Romanae dicionis fecit, he brought the whole 
 coast under Roman rule, 
 
 70. PARTITIVE GENITIVE. Any whole of which a part is 
 taken is expressed by the genitive. This partitive genitive 
 occurs frequently in dependence upon neuter adjectives and 
 pronouns, but only when they are in the nominative or accu- 
 sative singular. Minus dubitationis, less hesitat ion. Tantum 
 periculi, so much danger. With adverbs. Satis praesidi, de- 
 fence enough
 
 12 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 Common words followed by this construction are : 
 
 multutn, muck satis, enough 
 
 plus, more parum. not enough 
 
 plurimum, most nihil, nothing 
 
 tantum, so much hoc, this 
 
 quantum, how much id, illud, istud, that 
 
 paulum, little quod, quid, which, what 
 
 minus, less aliquid, something 
 minimum, least 
 
 71. More common than the partitive genitive with numerals and 
 quidam is the ablative with ex or de. Unum se esse ex omni civitate, 
 (he says) he is the only man of the whole state. Pauci de nostris cadunt, a 
 few of our men fall. Quidam ex his, some of them. 
 
 72. If not a part merely, but the whole of a thing, be taken, there is 
 evidently no occasion for a partitive genitive. Hi omnes, all of these 
 men. 
 
 73. Mille, a thousand, is an indeclinable adjective, but the plural 
 millia is a neuter substantive requiring the genitive. Mille homines, a 
 thousand men. Duo millia hominum, two thousand men. 
 
 74. GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. Adjectives of desire, 
 knoivledge, memory, fulness, power, sharing, and their oppo 
 sites, take the genitive of the complement. Cupidus rerum 
 novarum, eager for revolution. Rei militaris peritissimus, 
 expert in the science of warfare. Plenus spei bonae, full of 
 good hope. Praemiorum participes, sharers in the prizes. 
 
 Common adjectives of this class are : 
 
 f avidus, desirous, eager insuetus, unaccustomed, inexperi- 
 cupidus, desirous, eager enced 
 
 conscius, conscious, aware plenus,/W/ 
 
 peritus, experienced, skilled inops, destitute 
 
 imperitus, inexperienced, unskilled potens, ruling, controlling 
 
 prudens, knowing, skilful impotens, unable to control 
 
 imprudens, unsuspecting, ignorant particeps, sharing 
 
 memor, mindful, remembering expers, having no part , free from 
 
 immemor, unmindful, forgetful similis, like, similar
 
 NOUNS: GENITIVE 13 
 
 75. GENITIVE WITH VERBS. Usually with memini, re- 
 member, and reminiscor, recollect, always with obliviscor, 
 forget, the object, if it denotes persons, is expressed by the 
 genitive. Vivorum memini, I remember the living. Epicuri 
 oblivisci, to forget Epicurus. 
 
 76. Memini, reminiscor, obliviscor, take either genitive or 
 accusative of things, but with neuter pronouns the accusative 
 is regularly used (cf. 53). Veteris contumeliae oblivisci, to 
 forget the old affront. Si id memineritis quod oblivisci non 
 potestis, if you bear in mind that fact wliich you cannot forget. 
 
 77. Recorder, recall, takes de and the ablative of persons, the accusa- 
 tive (rarely genitive) of things. Velim scire ecquid de te recordere, / 
 should like to know if you recollect your own case at all. Pueritiae memo- 
 riam recordari, to recall the memory of childhood. 
 
 78. Of verbs meaning to remind, moneo takes the ablative 
 with de, while admoneo, commoneo, commonefacio take 
 either the ablative with de or the genitive ; neuter pronouns, 
 however, are always in the accusative (cf. 53). Monent de dis- 
 cordia, they warn us in regard to strife. Nemo est quin tui 
 sceleris commonefiat, there is nobody who is not reminded of 
 your guilt. Eos hoc moneo, I give them this warning. 
 
 79. Misereor, pity? takes the genitive. Misereri mei, to 
 
 pity me. 
 
 80. With the following impersonal expressions the object 
 of the feeling is in the genitive: me miseret, I pity ; me 
 paenitet, / repent of ; me piget, / am disgusted with ; me 
 pudet, I am ashamed of ; me taedet, J am tired of. Eorum 
 nos miseret, we pity them. Quorum eos paenitere necesse 
 est, of which they are obliged to repent. 
 
 81. Miseror and commiseror, lament, bewail, take the accusative. 
 Commiserari fortunam Graeciae, to lament the fortune of Greece. 
 
 Miseresco is poetical.
 
 14 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 82. Verbs meaning to accuse, condemn, convict, or acquit, 
 may take the genitive of the charge or penalty. Accusatus 
 proditionis, accused of treason. Capitis damnare or con- 
 demnare, to condemn to death. Levitatis convincere, to con- 
 vict of inconstancy. Capitis absolutus, released from the pen- 
 alty of death. 
 
 83. Interest, it is for the interest of, it makes a difference 
 to, takes the genitive of the person concerned ; but in the case 
 of the personal pronouns the ablative singular feminine of the 
 possessive is required. Magis rei publicae interest quam 
 mea, it concerns the public ^welfare more than mt\ 
 
 The object of concern, if an action, is most frequently expressed by 
 an infinitive or an accusative and infinitive ; if a thing, by the accusa- 
 tive with ad. Magni interesse etiam ad opinionem Galliae existimans 
 tantas videri Italiae facultates ut, etc., thinking that it was of great im- 
 portance, too, for preserving the respect of Gaul (the opinion which Gaul 
 had of Rome) that the resources of Italy should appear so great that, etc. 
 
 NOTE. Remember that sua can be used only as a reflexive. 
 
 NOTE. Refert, it is of advantage, it concerns, should as a rule be used only 
 when an indirect question follows. Quid refert qua me ratione cogatis ? what 
 matters it how you compel me? 
 
 84. Indefinite value is expressed by the genitive of certain 
 adjectives of quantity and of a few nouns ; as, magni, pluris, 
 plurimi or maximi, parvi, minoris, minimi, tanti, quanti, 
 nihili, flocci, and a few others. Magni opera eiusexistimata 
 est, liis services were highly valued. Frumentum tanti fuit 
 quanti iste aestimavit, corn was as high as that fellow rated 
 it. Non flocci facio, / 'don't care a straiv. Cf. 120. 
 
 Dative 
 
 85. INDIRECT OBJECT. The dative is the case of the in- 
 direct object represented in English by to, less commonly by 
 for or from. The indirect object may be used with transitive
 
 NOUNS: DATIVE 15 
 
 verbs having a direct object. His Caesar libertatem con- 
 cessit, Caesar granted them permission. 
 
 In the passive the dative is retained, the accusative be- 
 coming the subject. His libertas conceditur, permission is 
 granted to them. 
 
 86. Some verbs take either the accusative of the person and abla- 
 tive of the thing, or dative of the person and accusative of the thing. 
 Praeda milites donat, lie presents the soldiers with booty, or praedam 
 militibus donat, he gives booty to the soldiers. So also circumdo, surround, 
 and some other verbs. 
 
 87. The dative of indirect object is also used with many in- 
 transitive verbs meaning favor, help, please, trust (and their 
 opposites), believe, persuade, command, obey, serve, resist, envy, 
 threaten, pardon, indulge, spare, etc. The commoner are: 
 
 accidit, it happens libet, // pleases 
 
 adversor, oppose licet, /'/ is permitted 
 
 cedo, concede, yield minor, threaten 
 
 confido, trust noceo, harm 
 
 consulo, consult for obtempero, submit to 
 
 credo, believe, trust parco, spare 
 
 diffido, distrust pareo, obey 
 
 faveo, favor persuadeo, persuade 
 
 gratulor, congratulate placeo, please 
 
 ignosco, pardon provideo, provide for 
 
 impero, order resisto, resist 
 
 invideo, envy servio, serve 
 
 irascor, be angry with studeo, be zealous for 
 
 Huic imperat, he orders him. Huic legioni Caesar et indulserat 
 praecipue et propter virtutem confidebat maxime, Caesar had especially 
 favored this legion and because of its bravery had the greatest confidence 
 in it. 
 
 Many kindred phrases take a dative e.g., fidem habere, trust ; 
 gratias agere, thank; gratiam habere, feel ffrafrful ; iniuriam facere, 
 wrong, etc.
 
 16 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 88. Some verbs of apparently the same meaning as those in 87 take 
 an accusative. So adiuvo, aid; delecto, delight, please ; iubeo, order, 
 laedo, injure ; veto, forbid, etc. 
 
 89. If the verbs of 87 are used in the passive, the dative is retained 
 and the verbs are impersonal. Mihi persuadeo, / persuade myself, but 
 raihi persuadetur, I am persuaded. 
 
 90. Some verbs take both accusative and dative, generally with a 
 different meaning: consulere aliquem, to consult some one, but consulere 
 alicui, to consult for some one's interest ; cavere aliquid, to beware of 
 something, but cavere alicui, to look out for some one ; moderari aliquid, 
 to control something, but moderari alicui rei, to moderate, ailay, etc. 
 
 91. The dative is used after many verbs compounded with the prep- 
 ositions ad, ante, con-, in, inter, ob, prae, sub, and super. If transitive, 
 such verbs may take an accusative besides. Successit tibi L. Metellus, 
 Lucius Metellus succeeded you. Vos sequor, vobis obtempero, vobis as- 
 sentior, you I follow, to you I yield, with you I agree. Brutum classi prae- 
 fecit, he put Brutus in command of the fleet (ace. and dat.). 
 
 92. DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. Many adjectives of friend- 
 liness, likeness, nearness, fitness, acquaintance, and their oppo- 
 site* take the dative. Castris idoneum locum delegit, he 
 chose a place suitable for a camp. Helvetiis erat amicus, he 
 was friendly to the Helvetians. Collis nascebatur adversus 
 huic et contrarius, a hill rose facing this and opposite to it. 
 
 The more common adjectives are : 
 
 Friendliness, etc. : Nearness : 
 
 z.mic\is, friendly proximus, next to 
 
 adversus, opposed, opposite finitimus, neighboring to 
 
 contrarius, opposed, opposite Service, etc. : 
 
 cams, dear to utilis, useful to 
 
 farailiaris, friendly to perniciosus, destructive to 
 
 infestus, liostile to Fitness 
 
 gn.tus t grate/u/, agreeable to aptuS) su i ta blefor 
 
 Likeness, etc. : idoneus, suitablefor 
 
 similis (dissimilis), like (unlike) Acquaintance, etc. : 
 
 par, equal to notus (ignotus), known to (un- 
 
 aequus, equal to known) 
 
 iniquus, not equal to communis, common to
 
 NOUiNS: DATIVE 17 
 
 NOTE. Many of these adjectives take also other constructions- ; thus, those ol 
 likeness, together with their adverbs, take also atque (or ac, el. 266) ; those of 
 service usually take ad with the accusative to denote purpose ; those of fitness 
 have often ad with the accusative. 
 
 93. Many of the adjectives of 92 are used as substantives also, and as 
 such may take a genitive. Amicus ei, friendly to him, buteius amicus, 
 his friend. So similis (cf. 74), par, etc. 
 
 94. DATIVE OF POSSESSOR. The dative is used with esse 
 to denote possession where in English we employ have. Mini 
 autem cum Murena amicitia est, / have a friendship witli 
 Murena. 
 
 95. DATIVE OF AGENT. The dative is used regularly with 
 the gerundive to denote the person on whom the obligation 
 rests. Caesar statuit sibi Rhenum esse transeundum, 
 Caesar thought he ought to cross the Rhine. 
 
 96. To denote agent with all other forms of the passive, a (or ab, cf. 
 264) with the ablative is regularly used (cf. 108). Se a Themistocle con- 
 servatum iudicavit, he considered that he had been saved by Themistocles. 
 This construction must sometimes be employed even with the gerundive 
 (cf. 95), when necessary to avoid ambiguity. Quibus est a vobis consulen- 
 dum,for whom you must look out (the omission of a would cause ambi- 
 guity between quibus and vobis). 
 
 97. DATIVE OF INTEREST. The dative is used to denote 
 the person interested in the action of the verb. It corresponds 
 to various English expressions which may be roughly repre- 
 sented by for. Praeterita se fratri condonare dicit, lie says 
 that he pardons the past (put of regard ) for his brother. Ut 
 aliqua in vita formido improbis esset posita, that some 
 dread might be placed before the eyes of tlic wicked during their 
 lifetime. 
 
 98. The dative of interest may express advantage or dis- 
 advantage. Non solum nobis divites esse volumus, sed
 
 1 8 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 liberis, tue desire to be rick not only for ourselves, but for our 
 children. 
 
 99. DATIVE OF PURPOSE OR END. The dative may de- 
 note the purpose, use, or result of a thing, and is often ac- 
 companied by another dative of the person for whom. Dies 
 colloquio dictus est, a day was set for the conference. Amici- 
 tiam populi Roman! sibi ornamento et praesidio, non 
 detrimento esse oportere, (Ariovistus said that) the friend- 
 ship of the Roman people ought to be an honor and protection to 
 him, not a source of harm. 
 
 NOTE. The verbs most common with this dative are esse, venire, ducere, 
 and habere (consider). Laudi ducitur adulescentulis, it is considered praise- 
 worthy in the voung men. This double dative, in which that of the person is a 
 dative of advantage or disadvantage, occurs most frequently with esse. 
 
 The//wn// of nouns is not used in this construction. A modifying adjective is 
 rare. 
 
 100. The dative of purpose may often be replaced by a simple predi- 
 cate nominative. Maximo laudi est, // isa(sourceof)glorytoMaximits, 
 but also Maximi laus est, it is Maximuss glory. 
 
 Ablative 1 
 
 101. ABLATIVE OF SEPARATION. The ablative of separa- 
 tion is used with verbs meaning to separate, abstain, remove, 
 deprive, etc., and with kindred adjectives. Agriculture pro- 
 hibebantur, they were prevented from tilling the soil. Proelio 
 abstinebat, he refrained from battle. A preposition may also 
 be used with nearly all the verbs of this class, and should be 
 used where there is a clear idea of motion. Ex castris ex- 
 ercitum educit, he lends his army from the camp, but castris 
 egressi, leaving their camp. Thus no definite rule can be 
 laid clown, but a preposition must, of course, be used with 
 persons. Sua ab Helvetiis defendere, to protect their posses- 
 sions from the Helvetians. 
 
 1 For the ablative in constructions of time and place, see 128 ff.
 
 NOUNS: ABLATIVE 19 
 
 The ablative of separation occurs most frequently with : 
 
 abstineo, hold from moveo, move from 
 
 desisto, desist prohibeo, prevent from 
 
 egredior, depart solvo (absolve), release from 
 
 excedo, go out Adjectives : 
 
 exclude, exclude orbus, bereft of 
 
 expello, drive out liber, free from 
 
 intercludo, shut off vacuus, empty of 
 libero. free from 
 
 102. ABLATIVE OF ORIGIN OR SOURCE. The participle 
 natus, born of, takes the ablative, sometimes with de or ex. 
 Amplissimo genere natus, born of an influential family. 
 When the ancestry is remote, ab is sometimes used. Ab Ulixe 
 deaque Circa oriundus, descended from Ulysses and the goddess 
 Circe. 
 
 103. ABLATIVE OF MATERIAL. This requires ex in clas- 
 sical prose. Aquila ex argento, a silver eagle. An adjective 
 is often substituted : Aquila argentea. 
 
 104. ABLATIVE WITH A COMPARATIVE. The ablative may 
 be used with the comparative of adjectives and adverbs in- 
 stead of quam, than, and a nominative or accusative. This 
 ablative is allowable only when the first member of the com- 
 parison is nominative or accusative. With other cases quam 
 must be used to avoid ambiguity. Constat nihil illo fuisse 
 excellentius, it is well established (hat nothing has been more 
 remarkable than he. This might also have been, nihil quam 
 ilium. 
 
 NOTE. When the second member of comparison is a relative, the ablative is 
 regular. Quo nihil peius erat, than which nothing was worse. In all other 
 cases quam may be used. 
 
 105. Quam is often omitted with plus, minus, amplius, longius, in ex- 
 pressions of number or measure, without affecting the construction. 
 Cum ipsi non amplius octingentos equites haberent, although they them- 
 selves had not more than eight hundred cavalry.
 
 20 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 106. ABLATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. The ablative is used 
 with nouns, verbs, and adjectives to show in what respect they 
 are applied. It answers the questions : wherein ? in what n~- 
 spect? Hortensius excellens ingenio, nobilitate, existi- 
 matione, Hortensius, superior in ability, noble birth, reputation. 
 Creverat cum fama turn opibus, he had grown not only in 
 reputation but also in resources. 
 
 107. ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT. To denote accom- 
 paniment, the ablative is used with cum. Cum omni equita- 
 tu antecesserant, they had gone ahead with all the cavalry. 
 
 The ablative without cum is common in military expressions where 
 an adjective is used ; but cum should be used where no adjective oc- 
 curs, or if there is a numeral. Omnibus copiis provolaverunt, they hast- 
 ened forward with all their forces, but cum legionibus profectus est, he 
 started with his legions. So cum legionibus tribus. 
 
 108. ABLATIVE OF MEANS. The ablative is very often 
 used to denote the means or instrument by or with which. 
 Neque multum frumento, sed lacte atque pecore vivunt, 
 and they do not subsist much on grain, but upon milk and the 
 flesh of their flocks. The means by which and the 'agent by 
 whom must be clearly distinguished. The agent by whom re- 
 quires the ablative with a or ab (264). Gladio occisus, slain 
 by the sword (means), but a milite occisus, slain by a soldier 
 (agent). 
 
 109. The person through whom may be expressed by per and the ac- 
 cusative. Per exploratores certiores facti, informed through the agency 
 of scouts. 
 
 no. With some Latin verbs the ablative of means is quite at vari- 
 ance with the English idiom. Lapidibus pluere, to rain stones, and so 
 other verbs of the acts of nature. A pueris nullo officio aut disciplina 
 adsuefacti,y>w;z boyhood accustomed to no duty or training. Maioribus 
 hostiis sacrificare, to sacrifice larger victims, and so other verbs of sacri- 
 ficing, except immolo, which usually takes the accusative.
 
 NOUNS: ADLATIVrc 21 
 
 111. The adjectives fretus, relying on; contentus, contented with. 
 dignus, indignus, worthy, unworthy of, take the ablative. Qua fortuna 
 Alcibiades non erat contentus, with this good fortune Atcibiades was not 
 satisfied. Fretus numero copiarum, relying on the number of his troops. 
 
 112. Verbs of plenty and want take the ablative : abundo, abound in , 
 careo, lack ; egeo, be in need of ; compleo, impleo, expleo, fill ; redundo, 
 overflow, etc. Omnis hie locus acervis corporum et civium sanguine redun- 
 davit, every corner of this place was filled with heaps of corpses and blood 
 of citizens. Diem iam quintum cibo earner at, for five days now he had 
 lacked food. 
 
 113. The adjectives onustus, laden with, refertus, crowded with, take 
 the ablative. Navis onusta praeda, a ship laden with booty. But 
 plenus, y>/// of, and inops, destitute, usually take a genitive cf. (74). So 
 refertus when used of persons. 
 
 114. Opus est, there is need of , takes the ablative of the thing wanted 
 and the dative of the person wanting. Quid mihi aut vita aut civitate 
 opus est ? what need have I either of life or country ? The thing wanted 
 may be the subject and opus the predicate. Quaecumque opus sunt, 
 noctu comparantur, whatever things are needed are prepared by night. 
 This latter usage is chiefly with pronouns. 
 
 NOTE. Usus est, thtre is need, is extremely rare in ^ood prose. 
 
 115. ABLATIVE WITH DEPONENTS. Utor, use ; fruor, en- 
 joy ; fungor, perform ; ^Q\.\QV ^ gain possession of ; vescor,eat; 
 and their compounds, take the ablative. lumentis German! 
 importatis non utuntur, the Germans do not use imported 
 horses. Illo munere fungebatur, he performed that task. 
 
 NOTE. Potior has a genitive in the phrase rerum potiri, to become master. 
 
 116. ABLATIVE OF DEGREE OF DIFFERENCE. Compara- 
 tives and words implying comparison may take an ablative of 
 the degree or measure of difference. Especially common are 
 multo, much ; paulo, little ; hoc, quo, tanto, quanto, nihilo. 
 Hos Suevi multo humiliores redegerunt, the Suevi rendered 
 them much more humble. Supra pontem mediocri spatio, a 
 little way above the bridge. (Supra implies comparison.) 
 
 NOTE. With superlatives use longe, not multo (7).
 
 22 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 117. ABLATIVE OF QUALITY. The ablative, always ac- 
 companied by an adjective or a genitive, is used to denote qual- 
 ity or to describe an object. The ablative may depend di- 
 rectly on a noun or be used in the predicate. Silva ingenti 
 magnitudine, a forest of great extent, or silva est ingenti 
 magnitudine, the forest is of great extent. Examples with a 
 genitive are comparatively rare. Clavi digiti pollicis cras- 
 situdine, nails of the thickness of your thumb. 
 
 NOTE. For the difference between the ablative and genitive of quality, cf. 
 65 N. 
 
 118. It is better not to attach the ablative directly to a proper noun. 
 Caesar, vir magna virtute, is more usual than the ablative without vir 
 (cf. 67). 
 
 119. ABLATIVE OF PRICE. The definite price of a thing 
 must be put in the ablative. Agrum conductum habebat 
 sestertiis sex millibus, lie had an estate hired for six thousand 
 sesterces. 
 
 120. The ablative often expresses indefinite, value also, but of tantus, 
 quantus, plus, and minus, the genitive is necessary (cf. 84). Conduxit 
 in Palatio non magno domum, he hired a house on the Palatine for no 
 large sum, but signa aut non minoris aut etiam pluris emit, he paid either 
 not less or even more for the statues. 
 
 121. ABLATIVE OF MANNER. This ablative answers the ques- 
 tion How ? When the noun is accompanied by an adjective 
 or genitive, the mere ablative is generally used ; when the 
 noun is unmodified, it is generally introduced by cum. Non 
 eadem alacritate et studio nitebantur, they did not fight 
 with the same spirit and zeal, but cum studio nitebantur. 
 
 122. Some nouns expressing manner are generally used in the abla- 
 tive without cum (contrary to 121). So casu, by chance ; consuetudine, 
 more, according to custom ; consilio, by design ; iure, rightly ; iniuria, 
 wrongly ; ordine, in order ; silentio, in silence ; vi, by force, etc. Gena- 
 benses silentio ex oppido progress!, the Genabenses silently moving out 
 from the town.
 
 NOUNS: ABLATIVE 23 
 
 123. ABLATIVE <>F CAUSE. The ablative may denote 
 cause. Qua spe adducti, led on by this Iwpe. Seu ira seu 
 pdio seu superbia nullam vocem emisit, because of anger, 
 Jiatred, or pride, Jie did not utter a ivord. 
 
 This ablative is especially frequent with the past participles of verbs 
 of feeling: commotus, stirred up ; incitatus, roitsed ; perterritus, dis- 
 mayed; incensus, fired, etc. 
 
 124. Cause may also be expressed by de or ex with the ablative, ob or 
 propter with the accusative. His de causis, for these rea sons. Propter 
 latitudinem fluminis, because of the breadth of the river. 
 
 NOTE. If a person is the cause, then a or ab with the ablative must be used 
 (cf. 108). 
 
 125. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. A noun or pronoun in the 
 ablative with a participle may be used to modify the predicate 
 of a sentence. The combination may express time, cause, 
 manner, concession, attendant circumstances, etc. Thus the 
 ablative absolute is often equivalent to a subordinate clause, 
 and many English subordinate clauses may be rendered by 
 this construction. 
 
 Quibus rebus cognitis (time), principes Britanniae optimum factu esse 
 duxerunt, rebellione facta (means), frumento nostros prohibere quod his 
 superatis aut reditu interclusis (condition) neminem postea in Britanniam 
 transiturum confidebant, after learning (or when they had learned) these 
 things, the leading men of Britain considered that their best course was to 
 renew hostilities and to keep our men from getting grain, becattse, if this 
 t'nemy should be conquered or cut off from returning, they believed that no 
 one thereafter would cross into Britain. 
 
 126. The place of the participle may be supplied by a substantive 
 denoting office, age, etc., or by an adjective. Cn. Pompeio, M. Crasso 
 consulibus, in the consulship of Pompcy and Crassus. Duce Bruto Ro- 
 mam profecti, under the leadership of Brutus they set out for Rome. Exi- 
 gua parte aestatis reliqua, only a small part of the summer remaining. 
 
 Nouns commonly used in this way are: adiutor, assistant; auctor, 
 author, adviser, etc. ; testis, witness ; dux, iudex, consul, praetor, puer, 
 senex, etc.
 
 24 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 127. Use the ablative absolute only when its substantive denotes a per 
 son or thing not mentioned in the main clause. Do not write : Caesar, 
 Germanis victis, eos in castra duxit, where Germanis represents the 
 same persons as eos, but write : Caesar Germanos victos in castra duxit. 
 
 Time and Place 
 
 128. CONSTRUCTIONS OF TIME. Expressions of time take 
 the ablative to denote when or within what period, the accu- 
 sative to express how long (duration). Tertia hora venit, he 
 came at nine (cf. 134). Viginti annos natus est, he ts twenty 
 years old. 
 
 129. English ago is rendered by abhinc. Abhinc annos decem mor- 
 tuus est, he died ten years ago. 
 
 130. Some expressions which seem to us locative (137, 138) are tem- 
 poral in Latin. Pugna Marathonia, in the battle of Marathon. Bello 
 Punico, in the Punic War. Ludis Romanis, at the Roman games. 
 
 131. Towards, with words of time, is expressed by ad or sub. Ad 
 hiemem, towards winter. Ad or sub vesperum, towards evening. Sub 
 noctem,/ztt/ at nightfall. 
 
 For is expressed by in with the accusative. In diem certam indicere, 
 to appoint for a definite day. 
 
 Before and after, used adverbially in English and accompanied by a 
 temporal phrase denoting how long before or after, are expressed by 
 ante and post either with the accusative or with an ablative of the 
 degree of difference (116). Ante quinque annos, or quinque ante 1 annis, 
 profectus erat, he had gone away five years before. Neuter adjectives 
 denoting an indefinite time are regularly in the ablative. Paulo post, a 
 little later. Non ita multo post, not long afterwards. 
 
 But when before and after are prepositions in English, ante and post 
 take the accusative in Latin, and the time how long before or after is 
 expressed by the ablative. Una hora ante solis ortum, one hour before 
 sunrise. The accusative, unam horam ante solis ortum, would mean dur- 
 ing the hour before sunrise. 
 
 1 Or quinque annis ante, but with the ablative ante and post should 
 not be placed first.
 
 NOUNS: TIME AND PLACE 25 
 
 132. The year is expressed by the names of the consuls in the abla- 
 tive absolute. Annus fuit Cn. Pompeio M. Crasso consulibus, it -was the 
 year of the consulship of Pompey and Crassus. It may also be reckoned 
 from the assumed date of the founding of Rome (753 B.C.). Anno urbis 
 conditae (a. u. c.) sescentesimo quinquagesimo quarto 1 (754 100), too B.C. 
 Anno urbis conditae septingentesimo septuagesimo tertio (753 -f- 20), 20 
 A D. Years of the Christian era may be expressed thus: anno millesimo 
 nongentesimo (or OODCCCC) post Christum natum, /poo A.D. 
 
 133. Days of the month were reckoned backward from the Nones, Ides, 
 and Calends, the day of departure being included in the count. Conse- 
 quently the second day before would be, by Roman reckoning, the third 
 day before. Ante diem tertium Kalendas Octobris (often abbreviated 
 a. d. III. Kal. Oct.) or III. Kal. Oct. (i. e., tertio die ante Kalendas), Sep- 
 tember 2<) (September 28 before Caesar's reform 2 ). The name of the month 
 is an adjective limiting Kalendas. One day before is expressed by pridie 
 with the accusative. Pridie Idus lanuarias, January 12. If a date 
 falls upon the Nones, Ides, or Calends, the construction is ablative of 
 time (128). Idibus Martiis, March /j. Kalendis luniis, June i, etc. 
 
 NOTE. To turn an English, date into Latin, you must know : first, the number 
 of days in the Roman months, and on what days the Nones and Ides fall 3 (the Cal- 
 ends are always the first) ; secondly, the rule for reckoning (see above). Given 
 March 10, first look ahead to the nearest reckoning point. It is the Ides, which in 
 March fallen the 15th. Counting the I5th as the first day, we find the loth to be 
 the sixth day before the Ides. Expressed by the usual formula, this is a.d. VI. 
 Idus Martias. Evidently the simplest method of finding this result is by add- 
 ing one to the reckoning point and subtracting the given date i. e., 15 + 1 = 16 
 10=6. If the yiven date be March 4, the method is the same, except that the 
 reckoning point is the Nones. 7 + 1 = 84=4 ; .'. a.d. IV. Nonas Martias- 
 March 4. If the reckoning point is the Calends, the method is also the same, 
 
 1 Notice that the ordinal, not the cardinal, is used. To find the re- 
 quired ordinal, if the given date is B.C., subtract from 754; if it is A.D., 
 add to 753. 
 
 '-' Julius Caesar, in 46 B.C., reformed the calendar, giving each month the num- 
 ber of days which it has at present. Previously, March, May, Q'uintilis (July), 
 and October had 31 days, February 28, the others 29. 
 '"In March, July, October, May, 
 The Ides are on the fifteenth day, 
 The Nones the seventh ; but all besides 
 Have two days less for Nones and Ides."
 
 26 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 except that in adding one to the Calends we are really adding two to the number 
 of days in the month preceding. Given June 26; 30 (the number of days in June) 
 + 2=32 26=6; .'. a.d. VI. Kalendas Iulias=June 26. 
 
 134. The day was divided into twelve hours from sunrise to sunset, 
 the night into four watches (vigiliae). Consequently, the hours were 
 longer in summer than in winter, while the watches were shorter. Ap- 
 proximately, we may express six o'clock and time between six and seven 
 in the morning by prima hora, eleven o'clock and time between eleven 
 and twelve by sexta hora, etc. In the night the statement of time is 
 still less exact. Time between six and nine in the evening is expressed 
 by prima vigilia, between three and six in the morning by quarta vigilia, 
 etc. 
 
 135. CONSTRUCTIONS OF PLACE. Extent is expressed by 
 the accusative. Tridui viam prccedere, to advance a three 
 days' journey. Aggerem altum pedes octoginta exstruxerunt 
 (cf. 66), they raised an embankment eighty feet high. 
 
 136. Distance from a place is expressed by the accusative 
 of extent or by the ablative of measure of difference (cf. 116). 
 Murus a planitie septingentos passus aberat, the wall was 
 seven hundred paces distant from t lie plain. Hie locus aequo 
 fere spatio a castris utriusque aberat, this place was about 
 equidistant from the camp of each general. 
 
 137. Place in which is expressed by the ablative with in, 
 place to which by the accusative with ad or in, place from 
 which by the ablative with ab, de, or ex. In Italia esse, to be 
 in Italy. In Italiam ire, to go to Italy, but ad Italiam ire, to 
 go to the border of Italy (without entering the country). Ad 
 Caesarem ire, to go to Caesar. Ex Italia, from Italy, but ab 
 Italia, from the border of Italy. 
 
 138. With the names of towns and small islands, also with 
 domus and rus, no preposition is used, but place in which is 
 expressed by the locative, place to which by the accusative, 
 and place from which by the ablative. Romae, at Rome. 
 Delum, to Delos. Rure, from the country.
 
 NOUNS: TIME AND PLACE 27 
 
 139. Observe, however, that towns and small islands require a prepo 
 sition to express the idea of neighborhood. Ad Romam, near, to the. 
 vicinity of, towards Rome. A Roma, from the neighborhood of Rome. 
 Apud Tenedum, near Tenedos. 
 
 140. If a common noun, as urbs, oppidum, or insula, accompanies the 
 name of a town or small island, it usually takes a preposition. In in- 
 sulis Melitae et Sami, in the islands of Malta and Samos. Ad oppidum 
 Gergoviam, to the t(nvn of Gergovia. 
 
 141. If a verb of motion is accompanied by several nouns of place to 
 which or from which, each noun must have its own construction. Ad 
 Caesarem in castra Genavam in Galliam nuntium mittere, to send a mes- 
 sage to Caesar in camp at Geneva in Gaul. 
 
 NOTE. Observe that in the last example the English in camp at Geneva in 
 Gaul implies place in which, even though following a verb of motion. It is 
 equivalent to a relative clause, who is in camp, etc. Latin is more exact in its 
 use of the preposition in, and with a verb of motion requires the construction of 
 place to which (in = z' 
 
 142. Verbs signifying to come together, call together, as convenio, con- 
 voco, cogo, take the construction of place to which. Copias in unuin 
 locum coactas vidit, he saw that the troops had been assembled in one 
 place. 
 
 143. Verbs of placing take the ablative with in. Omnem spem in vir- 
 tute ponere, to put all hope in bravery. So with loco, colloco, put, sta- 
 tion ; statuo, constituo, set, place ; consido, settle ; imprimo, press upon, 
 stamp ; inscribe, write upon ; and some others. But impono takes 
 either the accusative with in or the dative. Legionibus in naves im- 
 positis, having put the legions on board. 
 
 144. The following words often express place in which by the abla- 
 tive without in : loco, locis, parte, partibus ; dextra (sc. parte), on the 
 right ; laeva, sinistra, on the left ; terra manque, by land and sea ; and 
 many other words when limited by an adjective (regularly with totus). 
 Alieno loco, in an unfavorable place. Miles dextra ac sinistra muro 
 tectus, the soldiers, protected by a wall on right and left. Totis castris, 
 in the whole camp.
 
 28 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 4. The Verb 
 
 145. AGREEMENT. The verb agrees with its subject in per- 
 son, number, and (so far as possible) in gender. The last is 
 possible only in compound tenses. Mulieres progressae 
 sunt, the women went forward. 
 
 146. With two or more singular subjects the verb may be : 
 
 (a) Plural. Titus et Arruns profecti sunt. Titus and Arruns set out. 
 
 (b) Singular, agreeing with the nearest subject. Conclamat vir pater- 
 que, her husband and her father cry out. 
 
 147. When the subjects differ in person the verb agrees with the first 
 person rather than the second; the second rather than the third. Ego 
 et vos adsumus, you and I are here (cf. 14). Tu et meus frater adestis, 
 you and my brother are present. 
 
 148. If several singular subjects are connected by et . . . et, aut . . . 
 aut, vel. . . vel, etc., the verb is regularly singular. Si qui aut privatus 
 aut populus eorum decreto non stetit, if any individual or people does 
 not heed their decree. 
 
 149. A collective noun usually takes a singular verb ; but the plural 
 maybe used if individuals are thought of. Cumtanta multitude lapides 
 ac tela conicerent, since so large a crowd were hurling stones and javelins. 
 
 150. VOICE. Intransitive verbs must be used impersonally 
 in the passive. Curritur, there is running. The logical sub- 
 ject (if any) may be expressed by ab (or a) with the ablative. 
 A nostris pugnatur, our men are fighting. 
 
 151. The passive often has a middle or reflexive sense. Purgor, / 
 clear myself (am cleared) ; lavor, / wash myself (am washed} \ delector, 
 I enjoy myself (am delighted}, etc. 
 
 152. When coepi, begin, and desino, cease, are used with passive in- 
 finitives, the whole phrase is usually in the passive. Vasa conici coepta 
 sunt, the jars began to be hurled. (For the passive use of verbs of say- 
 ing, thinking, etc., cf. 228.)
 
 THE VERB: TENSES 
 
 2 9 
 
 153. TENSES. Table of ordinary uses. 
 
 PERIOD OF TIME 
 
 
 
 Perfect Indefinite 
 
 Present 
 
 Future 
 
 
 INDEF1NITK 
 
 amavit, he loved 
 
 amat, he loves 
 
 amabit, he will 
 
 ACTION 
 
 
 
 
 love 
 
 PROGRESSING 
 
 Imperfect 
 amabat, he was 
 
 Present 
 amat; lie is loving 
 
 Future 
 amabit, he will be 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 /: 
 
 5 
 
 
 loving 
 
 
 loving 
 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Perfect Definite 
 
 Future Perfect 
 
 
 COMPLETED 
 
 amaverat, he had 
 
 amavit, he has 
 
 amaverit, he will 
 
 
 
 loved 
 
 loved 
 
 have loved 
 
 
 
 (Complete in past) 
 
 (Complete in present) 
 
 (Complete in future) 
 
 Note that the present and future have a double use, representing 
 action both as indefinite and as progressing. So, too, the perfect, which 
 represents action as completed in the present or as undefined in the 
 past.i 
 
 154. PRESENT. In addition to the ordinary uses indicated in 
 the table, the present is very often employed to represent past 
 acts as taking place in the present. This is called the historical 
 present, and is employed for the sake of liveliness or variety. 
 Volusenum praemittit. Huic mandat ut ad se quam pri- 
 mum revertatur. Ipse cum omnibus copiis in Morinos 
 proficiscitur, etc. He sends Volusenus on ahead. He orders 
 him to return as soon as possible. He himself sets out, etc. 
 
 155. The use of a present for a future, so common in English, is very 
 rare in good Latin prose, and should be avoided. I am going to-mor- 
 row is eras proficiscar, not proficiscor. 
 
 156. With iam, now ; iam diu, now for a long lime ; iam pridem, now 
 long since, and other expressions of duration, the present is used of an 
 
 'The former is often called the perfect definite or present perfect, the 
 latter the perfect indefinite or historical perfect.
 
 30 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 action beginning in the past and continuing in the present. This trans- 
 lates the English have long been, etc. (cf. 159). lam diu in his periculis 
 versamur,/0r a long time now we have been in the midst of these dangers, 
 
 157. IMPERFECT. The imperfect is used to denote custom- 
 ary past action. Ex quo quinquagena talenta vectigalis 
 capiebat, from which he was accustomed to get fifty talents of 
 revenue. 
 
 158. The imperfect may denote attempted action (conative imper- 
 fect). Ab tribunis militum legatisque retinebantur, the tribunes of the sol- 
 diers and the chief officers attempted to hold them back. 
 
 But Conor, try, with an infinitive, may always be used, and should be 
 used to avoid ambiguity. Partem suarum copiarum traducere conati 
 sunt, they attempted to bring part of their forces across. 
 
 159. With iam, iam diu, iam pridem, and other expressions of dura- 
 tion, the imperfect corresponds with the English had long been, had long 
 since, etc. (cf. 156). Iam diu lecto tenebatur, he had long been bedridden. 
 
 160. By reason of its ordinary use to denote action as progressing, 
 going on (see table, 153), the imperfect is a favorite tense in descriptive 
 passages, where it chronicles the subordinate details and particulars, 
 while the historical perfect states the events and results. In omnibus 
 collibus hostium copias conspexit. Cuius loci haec erat natura atque ita 
 montibus mare continebatur uti ex locis superioribus in litus telum adigi 
 posset, on all the hills he beheld the forces of the enemy. The character 
 of the place was such and the sea was so hemmed in by the hills that a 
 javelin could be hurled from the places above upon the shore. The im- 
 perfects erat and continebatur fill in details of the picture. 
 
 161. FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. The Latin is much 
 more exact in its use of these tenses than is the English. This 
 is especially true in subordinate clauses e. g., in conditions, 
 and with volo, licet, libet, placet, possum, etc. Veniam si 
 potero, / shall come if I can (shall be able). In urbe si licebit 
 manebo, / shall remain in the city if I may (it shall be allowed ). 
 Future perfect. Si mihi bona re publica frui non licuerit, at
 
 THE VERB: TENSES 31 
 
 carebo mala, if it is not alloived me (shall not have been al- 
 lowed] to enjoy an upright state, at least I shall be free from a 
 base one. 
 
 162. PERFECT. The historical perfect (perfect indefinite, 
 cf. 153) is the great narrative tense in Latin. For its relation 
 to the imperfect, cf. 160. It is like the Greek aorist. 
 
 163. The perfect definite of verbs of inceptive meaning is virtually a 
 present. Novi, know (have become acquainted with}, from nosco, learn 
 (get acquainted with} ; consuevi, am wont (have become accustomed} ; so 
 odi, hate ; memini, remember, etc. The pluperfect of these verbs repre- 
 sents an English imperfect. Noveram, knew (had become acquainted 
 ivitJf), etc. 
 
 164. PLUPERFECT. The pluperfect (153) represents an ac- 
 tion in the past as completed before another is begun. Me- 
 napios oppresserunt, qui in suos vices remigraverant, 
 they crushed the Menapii, who had (previously) returned to 
 their villages. 
 
 165. PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. Such English expressions as 
 / am about to, was about to, etc., may be rendered by the tenses 
 of the first periphrastic conjugation. Iturus sum, I am about 
 to go ; iturus eram, I was to go. 
 
 166. The second periphrastic conjugation expresses obligation or 
 necessity. Amandus sura, / ought to be, or must be, loved. Intransitive 
 verbs can only be used impersonally (cf. 150). Currendum est mihi, / 
 ought to, or must, run. 
 
 167. TKNSES IN LETTERS. In letters the Romans often 
 used tenses from the standpoint of the receiver of the letter, 
 instead of, as is usual in English, from the standpoint of the 
 writer. It is as though the writer imagined himself in the place 
 of the receiver and viewed his own present actions as past. 
 Quae ad te pertinere arbitrabar, quod in Ciliciam proficis- 
 cebar, existimavi me ad te oportere scribere, what I think
 
 32 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 concerns you I regard it my duty to write to you, because I am 
 departing for Cilicia ; i. e., when you receive this letter, it 
 will be true that / thought I ought to write what concerned 
 you, because I was departing for Cilicia. Here the English 
 present, / regard, has become existimavi, and the other pres- 
 ents have become imperfects. In the same way a perfect (/ 
 wrote, have written} may become a pluperfect (scripseram), 
 and a future (/ shall write} may become a periphrastic imper- 
 fect (scripturus eram). 
 
 NOTE. This custom was most common at the beginning or end of letters, and 
 with expressions of writing or sending a letter, scribo, do, etc. The Romans 
 were not rigidly consistent in the matter e. g. , 2 general statement always re- 
 quires the regular tense. 
 
 168. SEQUENCE OF TENSES. In subordinate clauses the 
 tenses of the subjunctive follow certain fairly well-fixed rules 
 of sequence. With reference to these rules all tenses are di- 
 vided into two classes : 
 
 1. Principal tenses (all expressing present or future time). 
 
 Present, future, future perfect indicative. 
 Present and perfect subjunctive. 
 Present and future imperative. 
 
 2. Historical tenses (all expressing past time). 
 
 Imperfect, perfect, pluperfect indicative. 
 Imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. 
 Historical present (cf. 170). 
 
 General rule: Principal tenses in the main clause are fol- 
 lowed by principal tenses in the subordinate clause; historical 
 tenses by historical tenses. 
 
 PRINCIPAL TENSES 
 
 f quid legas, iv hat you are reading 
 Rogo, I ask 
 
 _ . T , (incomplete) 
 
 Rogabo, / shall ask ' . , , 
 
 quid legens, what you have read 
 Rogavero, I shall have askeu 
 
 (completed)
 
 THE VERB: TENSES 33 
 
 HISTORICAL TENSES 
 
 I miiri Ifo-prpc ink/it v/w/ iiiovf v. 
 
 Rogabam, I was asking 
 
 HISTORICAL TENSES 
 
 f quid legeres, what you were read- 
 ing (incomplete) 
 
 Rogavi, / asked, have asked 
 
 , , quid legisses, what you had read 
 
 Rogaveram, / had asked 
 
 [ (completed) 
 
 NOTE. The above are the common tenses. The student can easily apply the 
 rule to the others. 
 
 169. The perfect definite (cf. 153) is usually treated as a historical 
 tense ; but when the present time is clear, the principal sequence is oc- 
 casionally found. Id ius iurandum ita conservavi ut nemini dubium esse 
 debeat, that oath I have kept in such a way that it should be doubtful to 
 nobody. 
 
 170. The historical present (154) is usually treated, according to 
 its meaning, as a historical tense especially when the subordinate 
 clause precedes the main verb. But when the subordinate clause fol- 
 lows the principal sequence often occurs. Simul servis suis Rubrius ut 
 ianuam clauderent imperat, at the same time Rubrius ordered his slaves 
 to shut the door (historical sequence); but dant negotium ut eum inter- 
 ficiant, they laid plans to imirder him (principal sequence). 
 
 171. If a subjunctive clause depends upon an infinitive, participle, 
 gerund, or supine, the sequence is determined by the main finite verb; 
 but with the perfect infinitive the sequence is usually historical. Dico 
 me scire quid legas, / say that I know what you are reading, but dicitur 
 eum rogavisse cur veniret, he is said to have asked him why he came. 
 
 172. FUTURE TIME IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE. The missing future and 
 future perfect of the subjunctive are usually supplied, where futurity is 
 implied in the context, by the simple tenses of the subjunctive follow- 
 ing the ordinary rules of sequence e. g., the future idea is represented 
 by the present subjunctive (after a principal tense) or by the imperfect 
 (after a historical tense) ; the future perfect by a perfect (after a principal 
 tense) or by a pluperfect (after a historical tense). lam, mox, statim, 
 often aid the future meaning. Faciam hoc novum ut testibus utar 
 statim, / shall do this unusual thing (namely), employ witnesses at once. 
 If it is desired to emphasize the future idea, where it is not implied 
 clearly in the context, the periphrastic tenses may be used. Et quisquam 
 dubitabit quid virtute perfecturus sit ? and will anybody doiibt what he 
 will accomplish by valor ?
 
 34 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 Modes in Independent Clauses 
 
 173. The indicative is the mode of direct statements and 
 questions. Some English phrases of possibility, propriety, 
 duty, necessity, and the like, apparently requiring a subjunc- 
 tive, are expressed by the indicative in Latin. Dicere pos- 
 sum, / might say. Longurn est omnia enumerare proelia, 
 it would be a long story to recount all tlic battles. Aequum 
 est, it would be fair ; so par, satis, satius, melius, optimum, 
 facile, necesse est; debeo, oportet, convenit, decet, licet, 
 etc., render by their meaning the apparently modal idea in 
 English. 
 
 174. HORTATORY SUBJUNCTIVE. Mild commands and 
 exhortations may be expressed by the subjunctive. This use 
 is most common in the third persons singular and plural and 
 the first person plural of the present subjunctive. The nega- 
 tive is ne. Cras veniat, let him come to-morrow. Sed satis 
 de hoc; reliquos ordiamur, but enough of him ; let us pass on 
 to the others. Ne eras veniat, let hi,,i not come to-morrow. 
 
 175. PROHIBITION. Negative command or prohibition is 
 usually expressed by noli, be unwilling, with an infinitive. 
 Noli rogare, do not ask (be unwilling to ask). Noli existi- 
 mare, Pompei, hunc esse exercitum, etc., do not think, Pom- 
 pey, that this is the army, etc. 
 
 NOTE. Other methods of expressing prohibition are less common e. g. , ne, 
 with the second person perfect subjunctive ; cave, cave ne, take cart not, or 
 fac ne, see that not, with the second person present or perfect subjunctive. 
 
 176. SUBJUNCTIVE IN WISHES. Wishes, prayers, assev- 
 erations, etc., are expressed by the subjunctive, usually intro- 
 duced by utinam. The regular negative is ne. The present 
 tense (rarely the perfect) represents a wish as possible ; the 
 imperfect as unaccomplished in present time ; the pluperfect 
 as unaccomplished in past time. Utinam veniat, may he 
 come ! (possible). Utinam veniret, would that he were com-
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES 35 
 
 ing! (unaccomplished in present). Utinam venisset, would 
 that he had come! (unaccomplished in past). Utinam ille 
 omnis secum suas copias eduxisset, would that lie had led 
 all his forces out with him ! Utinam P. Clodius dictator es- 
 set, would that Clodius were dictator ! 
 
 177. DELIBERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. Questions implying 
 doubt, indignation, or impossibility, take the subjunctive. 
 They are most frequent in the first person. Quid agam, iu- 
 dices ? quo me vertam? what am I to do, judges? whither am 
 I to turn ? 
 
 178. RHETORICAL QUESTION. This is simply a statement made in 
 the form of a question to which the answer is implied. It may take 
 either indicative or subjunctive as the English indicates. Quern enim 
 Romanorum pudet uxorem ducere in convivium ? who among the Romans 
 is ashamed to take his -wife to a dinner ? Quid ego te invitem ? why should 
 I invite you ? 
 
 179. " POTENTIAL " SUBJUNCTIVE. Under this head are 
 grouped several uses in which the subjunctive expresses a 
 possibility, polite statement, an opinion, or the like, represent- 
 ing the English should, may, might, etc. The negative is non. 
 
 a. The present (rarely the perfect) is used of present or fu- 
 ture time. Roges me quid sit deus,^w may ask me what god 
 is. Velim, / should like (more polite than volo, / wisJi). 
 
 b. The imperfect is used of the past. Tuncdiceres: '-' Cae- 
 sar, cave credas," then you would have said : " Caesar, do not 
 believe" So commonly puto, credo, video, cerno, audio. 
 
 Modes in Dependent Clauses 
 
 180. RELATIVE CLAUSES. Relative clauses are exceeding- 
 ly common in Latin. The student should, therefore, note 
 their various uses carefully. Their simplest use is to state a 
 fact about the antecedent (181). They may also express a 
 characteristic applicable to the antecedent not as an individ-
 
 36 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 ual, but as a member of a class (182). They also denote cause 
 (185), concession ^218), purpose *88), and result (196). 
 
 181. Clauses introduced by relative words, as qui, quod, 
 quisquis, quicumque, ubi, unde, etc., and stating definite 
 facts about the antecedent, take the indicative. Patria, quae 
 mihi vita mea multo est carior, my country, which is far 
 dearer to me than my Life. Quam [i. e., virtus] qui adeptus 
 erit, ubicumque erit gentium, a nobis diligetur, the man 
 who shall succeed in getting this, wherever he may be, will be 
 beloved by us. Quisquis est, whoever he may be. 
 
 NOTE. Observe that English may be after an indefinite relative is equivalent 
 to is or shall be. Latin with characteristic directness uses the present or future 
 indicative. 
 
 182. CHARACTERISTIC CLAUSES. The subjunctive is used 
 if the relative clause states a characteristic applicable to any 
 object in the same class. This occurs often when the antece- 
 dent is not a definite object. Quamquam nonnulli sunt in 
 hoc ordine, qui aut ea quae imminent non videant, aut 
 ea quae vident dissimulent, and yet there are some in this 
 body, who (i. e., a class of men who] either do not see the dan- 
 gers which threaten, or hide what they do see. So after phrases 
 like sunt qui, there are some who, multi sunt qui, quis est 
 qui, nemo est qui, nihil est quod, there is no reason for, etc. 
 Sunt qui earn arma petisse dicant, there are persons who say 
 that she asked for arms. Neque res ulla quae ad placandos 
 deos pertineret praetermissa est, and nothing which zvas 
 suitable for propitiating the gods was left undone. Si umquam 
 fuit quod dis gratias ageretis, if there was ever reason for 
 you to give thanks to the gods. 
 
 183. Even after an indefinite antecedent, if facts and not character- 
 istics are stated, the indicative is sometimes used. Sunt qui piscibus 
 vivere existimantur, some are thought to live on fish.
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES 37 
 
 184. If the antecedent is limited by dignus, indignus, 
 idoneus, unus, or solus, etc., a relative clause of character- 
 istic commonly follows. line indigni erant qui impetra- 
 rent ? were they unworthy to obtain their request / N on erit 
 idoneus qui ad bellum mittatur, he will not be fit to be scut 
 to the war. Causa est haec inventa sola, in qua ornnes sen- 
 tirent unum atque idem, this is the only case ever met with 
 in regard to which all men had one and the same feeling. 
 
 185. CAUSAL CLAUSES. When clauses expressing a reason 
 or cause are introduced by quod, quia, because, or quoniam, 
 since, seeing that, the indicative is used to give the speaker's 
 or writer's own reason ; if the reason rests, however, on the 
 authority of another person, the subjunctive should be used, 
 on the principle of a quoted dependent clause. Quod metu 
 cessisse credebant hostem, id morari victoriam rati, quor 1 
 interesset amnis, because tJiey believed that the enemy haa 
 withdrawn in fear, they thought the only thing which retard- 
 ed their victory was tlie fact that the river was between them. 
 Livy states the quod credebant on his own authority, but 
 the quod interesset is quoted from the thought of the Span- 
 iards. Vos, Quirites, quoniam iam nox est, in vestra tecta 
 discedite, do you, fellow-citizens, since it is now night, disperse 
 to your homes. 
 
 186. Causal clauses introduced by cum, since, as, take the 
 subjunctive. Cum se suaque defendere non possent, legates 
 ad Caesarem mittunt, as they were unable to defend tliemsclvcs 
 and their property, they sent ambassadors to Caesar. Quae 
 cum ita sint, this being the case. 
 
 187. When an English causal clause is introduced by since or for, fol- 
 lowed by a personal pronoun or a demonstrative word, introduce the 
 Latin clause by a relative pronoun or adverb, not by cum ; qui=cum ego, 
 cuui tu, cum nos, cum is, etc. ; ubi=cum ibi, etc. The verb is in the sub- 
 junctive (cf. 186), and the relative may be preceded by ut or quippe, as,
 
 38 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 Domum suam istum non fere quisquam vocabat ; nee inirum, 
 qui neque in urbe viveret neque revocaturus esset, almost nobody used to 
 invite him to his home ; and no wonder, for he neither lived in town nor "was 
 likely to return the invitation. Medio alveo haudquaquam pari certamine 
 concursum, quippe ubi pedes instabilis vel abinermi equite pervert! posset, 
 in the middle of the channel they came together in a conflict which was 
 not at all equally matched ; naturally, where an infantryman without 
 sure footing could be toppled over even by an unarmed horseman. 
 
 188. PURPOSE CLAUSES. Purpose or design is expressed 
 by the subjunctive introduced by ut (uti), that, in order to, to ; 
 ne, that no}, lest, not to ; qui ( = ut ego, ut is, etc.); ubi (=ut 
 ibi, etc.) ; or other relative words. The tense is present or im- 
 perfect (tenses of incomplete action, cf. 153), for an act which 
 is only designed is obviously not yet complete. Reliquas 
 copias Helvetiorum ut consequi posset, pontem in Arare 
 faciendum curat, that he might be able to pursue the rest of 
 tlie Helvetian forces, he had a bridge built over the Saone. 
 P. Crassum in Aquitaniam proficisci iubet, ne auxilia in 
 Galliam mittantur, Publius Crassus is ordered to go to Aqui- 
 tania, that aid may not be sent into Gaul. Interim ad prae- 
 fectos mittit qui nuntiarent, meanwhile lie sends men to the 
 officers to bear word. 
 
 NOTE. For sequence of tenses, see 168 ff. 
 
 189. A clause of purpose which contains a comparative is introduced 
 by quo (degree of difference, 116). Quod quo facilius perspicere possitis, 
 diligenter attendite, that you may be able to see through ' 'tis the more 
 easily, give careful attention. 
 
 190. A clause introduced by ut or ne is used as the object 
 of verbs signifying to request, urge, advise, persuade, permit, en- 
 deavor, determine, order, decree. 
 
 Homines allegat qui peterent ne ad Sullam adirent, he deputes men to 
 ask them not to go to Sulla. Numquam a dfe immortalibus optabo ut Ca- 
 tilinam ducere exercitum hostium audiatis, never shall I pray the im- 
 mortal gods that you may hear of Catiline at tht head of an army of the
 
 PURPOSE CLAUSES 39 
 
 fnemy. Cui iam persuaserat ut in Italiam proficisceretur, whom he had 
 already persuaded to set out for Italy. Huic permisit uti in his locis 
 iegionem conlocaret, he gave him permission to quarter a legion in this 
 locality. Suis imperavit ne quod omnino telum in hostes reicerent, he 
 ordered his men not to throw back at the enemy any weapon at all. 
 
 Among verbs taking this construction are : 
 
 rogo, ask persuadeo, persuade 
 
 oro, beg concede, permitto, allow 
 
 peto, quaero, request, entreat operam do, take pains 
 
 postulo, demand impero, niando, order 
 
 hortor, urge praecipio, direct, bid 
 
 suadeo, urge, recommend negotium do, charge 
 
 moneo, advise edico, proclaim, ordain 
 
 censeo, propose, move decerno, resolve, decree 
 
 A useful little rule is expressed by the old rhyme : 
 
 " With ask, command, advise, and strive, 
 By ut translate th 1 infinitive; 
 But not so after iubeo nor 
 Veto, nor deponent Conor." 
 
 191. When verbs meaning to request, urge, etc., are used in the pas- 
 sive, their subject may be a clause with ut or ne. His persuaded ut diu- 
 tius morarentur non poterat, these could not be persuaded to remain longer. 
 
 192. Substantives which are kindred in meaning to the verbs of 190 
 may be accompanied by a clause in apposition. Nonnullae huius modi 
 sententiae dicebantur, ut impedimentis relictis ad salutem contenderent, 
 some opinions were expressed to the effect that they should abandon their 
 baggage and hasten to a place of safety. Decretum fit, ut decem primi 
 proficiscantur ad Sullam, a resolution is passed that the ten leading men 
 shall go to Sulla. 
 
 Such substantives are : 
 
 animus, purpose (especially in the phrases eo, hoc animo). 
 consilium, purpose (especially in the phrases consilium capio,y<?r;# a pur- 
 pose, eo, hoc consilio). 
 
 condicio, lex, condition, terms (especially ea, hac condicione, lege). 
 negotium, business (especially negotium do, employ one for something'). 
 sententia, opinion. 
 decretum, decree.
 
 40 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 193. The object of the following verbs is more commonly 
 expressed by an infinitive than by a subjunctive clause : volo, 
 nolo, malo, cupio, studeo, patior, sino, cogo, conor, consti- 
 tuo, statuo, iubeo, veto. With licet an infinitive is used as 
 subject (235). Si veteris contumeliae oblivisci vellet, if lie 
 Tivvr ivilling to forget the old wrong. Bellum gerere conan- 
 tur, they try to wage ^<.var. Portas claudi iussit, lie ordered 
 t lie gates to be closed. Neque remanere uno in loco licet, and 
 remaining in one place is not allowed. 
 
 194. VERBS OF HINDERING. Verbs of hindering and refitsing, if 
 affirmative, take a subjunctive clause introduced by ne or quominus. But 
 with prohibeo and impediothe infinitive is much more common. Deter- 
 rere ne maior multitude Germanorum Rhenum traducatur, to prevent a 
 greater horde of Germans from being led across the Rhine. Quae (naves) 
 vento tenebantur quominus in eundem portum venire possent, the ships 
 were kept by the wind from the possibility of coming into the same har- 
 bor. Germanos transire prohibebant, they kept the Germans from crossing. 
 
 NOTK. For verbs of hindering and refusing negatived, see 200. 
 
 195. VKRBS OF FEARING. Verbs of fearing may take a subjunc- 
 tive clause as object. I fear (or do not fear) /^a/or//=metuo, timeo, 
 vereor (or non metuo, etc.) ne ; I fear that <^=r vereor (metuo or timeo 
 rarely) ut ; / do not fear that <?/=:non vereor ne non. Metuebat ne coge- 
 rentur confiteri, he was afraid that they might be forced to confess. Ve- 
 reri ut habeam satis, to fear that I shall not have enough. Non vereor 
 ne hoc non probera, / have no fear that I shall not prove this. 
 
 NOTK. Purpose is often expressed by ad and the gerundive (257), and, if the 
 inn in verb denotes motion, by the supine in -um (261). 
 
 196. RESULT CLAUSES. Clauses denoting a result of the 
 main action take the subjunctive. The particles are ut, that, 
 so that, so as to; ut non, 1 that not, without ; qui ( = ut ego, 
 ut is, etc.), ubi (=ut ibi), or other relative words. Frequently 
 
 1 Notice the difference in negative of result and of purpose (188). 
 Similarly, that nobody='a.\. nemo (result), but ne quis (purpose) ; that not 
 evtr=ut numquam (result), ne umquam (purpose), etc.
 
 RESULT CLAUSES 41 
 
 in Latin, as in English, demonstrative words in the main clause 
 may give warning that a result clause is to follow. Such are 
 ita, sic, tarn, is, talis, tantus, adeo, eo, etc. Mons altis- 
 simus impendebat, ut perpauci prohibere possent, a high 
 mountain towered above, so that a very few men could prevent 
 a passage. Erat ea sagacitate ut decipi non posset, he was 
 (a man) of such shrewdness that he could not be deceived. Quis 
 potest esse tam mente captus qui neget haec omnia deo- 
 rum potestate administrari ? who can be so foolish as to say 
 that all these things are not controlled by the power of the gods ? 
 NOTE. For the sequence of tenses, see 168 if. 
 
 197. A clause introduced by ut or ut non is used as the 
 object of verbs denoting to make, effect, accomplish, etc. Ob- 
 sides uti inter sese dent, perficit, he effects an exchange of 
 hostages (brings about that they give hostages to each other). 
 Fecerunt ut consimilis fugae profectio videretur, they made 
 the departure seem very much like a flight (made that it seemed). 
 
 The most common verbs admitting this construction are : facio, effi- 
 cio, conficio, perficio, and impetro, all meaning to bring about, accomplish. 
 
 198. A clause with ut or ut non is used as the subject of verbs of 
 making, effecting, etc., when they are passive ; and of impersonal verbs 
 denoting // happens, it follows, it remains, it is added, etc. Perficiendum 
 est ut homines te audiant, men must be made to listen to yoit (it must be 
 brought about that they listen). Accidit ut esset luna plena, it happened 
 that the moon was full. Accedebat ut tempestatem ferrent facilius, besides 
 (it was added that) they weathered a storm more easily. 
 
 Such verbs are : fit, efficitur, conficitur, perficitur, it is accomplished ; 
 accidit, contingit, -evenit, it happens ; sequitur, it follows ; restat, it re- 
 mains ; accedit, // is added. 
 
 199. A clause with ut or ut non may be in apposition to a noun or 
 pronoun. Si illud fecisset, ut trucidaret inimicum, if he had accomplished 
 that act of murdering an enemy. 
 
 200. VKRBS OF HINDERING. Verbs of hindering and refusing, if 
 negative or interrogati-ve, take a subjunctive clause introduced by
 
 42 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 quin, that not, but that, or, less commonly, quominus, that less. Retineri 
 non potuerant quin tela coicerent, they could not be restrained from hurl- 
 ing (but that they hurled} their shears. Non recusamus quin Rosci vita 
 dedatur, we make no objection to Roscius's life being yielded up. Quid 
 obstat quominus sit beatus ? what hinders his being happy ? 
 
 NOTE. For the construction with these verbs when affirmative, see 194. 
 
 201. VERBS OF DOUBTING. Verbs and other expressions of doubt- 
 ing, when negative, or interrogative with negative implied, generally 
 take quin, but that, that, and the subjunctive. Non dubitare quin de 
 omnibus obsidibus supplicium sumat, not to doubt that he will inflict pttn- 
 ishment on all the hostages. Ut nemini dubium esse debeat quin reliquo 
 tempore eadem mente sim futurus, so that nobody ought to doubt that I 
 am going to be of the same mind in the future. Et quisquam dubitabit 
 quin huic bellum transmittendum sit ? and will any one doubt (implying 
 that nobody will doubt) that my client should have the war committed to 
 him f 9 
 
 202. Non dubitare, not to hesitate, commonly takes the infinitive. 
 Non dubitavit exstruere aedincium, he did not hesitate to build a house. 
 
 203. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. If the action of a temporal 
 clause precedes that of the main clause (often expressed in 
 English by the auxiliary had], the verb may be either in the 
 pluperfect subjunctive with cum, when, or in the perfect in- 
 dicative 1 with postquam, posteaquam, 2 after ; ubi, when; 
 ut, as, when ; ut primum, cum primum, simul atque (ac), or 
 simul alone, as soon as. Cum tridui viam processisset, nun- 
 tiatum est, when he had advanced a three days journey, 'word 
 was brought. Posteaquam Lucullus venit, plures gentes 
 concitatae sunt, after Lucullus had come, more peoples were 
 stirred up. Ubi de eius adventu certiores facti sunt, legates 
 mittunt, when they had been informed of his arrival, they sent 
 envoys. Cum primum potuit, ad exercitum contendit, as 
 soon as he could he hastened to the army. 
 
 1 The historical present may also be used, but is less common. 
 
 2 A favorite form with Cicero.
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES 
 
 43 
 
 204. When the action of a temporal clause is past, but rep 
 resented as going on at the same time as that of the main 
 clause (frequently expressed in English by was, or a participle 
 in -ing}, either cum, when, with the imperfect subjunctive, or 
 dum, while, with the present indicative, may be used. Cum 
 se finitimis bellum inferre simularet, in Hispaniam legates 
 misit, pretending tliat lie was making war on his neighbors, he 
 sent envoys to Spai". Dum aedificant tamquam beati, in 
 aes alienum inciderunt, while they were building like million- 
 aires, they fell into debt. 
 
 205. Cum, when, introducing a clause of present or future time, takes 
 the present, future, or future perfect indicative; of a definite time in 
 the past, if the temporal clause serves to date the main action, the 
 past tenses of the indicative are used. Ad quos (equos) se, cum usus 
 est, recipiunt, to which they return when need arises. Cum prodierit, 
 audiet, when he comes (shall have come} forward, he will hear. Turn, 
 cum res permulti amiserant, scimus fidem concidisse, at that time, when 
 many had lost their property, we knmu that credit collapsed. 
 
 206. Dum, quoad, or quam diu, as long as, so long as, are 
 used with all tenses of the indicative. Dum civitas erit, iudicia 
 fient, so long as a state shall exist, trials will be held. Quoad 
 fuit in urbe, obstiti, so long as he was in town, I opposed him. 
 
 NOTE. Donee is for the most part a poetical word. Caesar never uses it, 
 Cicero but rarely (=.until). In the meaning as long as it is first used by Livy. 
 
 207. Quoad (and sometimes dum) until, takes the indicative 
 when the temporal clause expresses an actual occurrence. 
 Neque finem sequendi fecerunt, quoad praecipites hostes 
 egerunt, and they did not stop following until they drove the 
 enemy in headlong flight. 
 
 208. Dum and quoad, until, take the subjunctive when 
 purpose or expectation is expressed by the temporal clause. 
 Dum hie veniret, locum relinquere noluit, until my client 
 should come (expectation), he was unwilling to leave the place.
 
 44 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 Nolite expectare dum ego haec crimina agam, do not wait 
 for me to enumerate (equivalent to that I may enumerate) 
 these charges. 
 
 209. Antequam and priusquam 1 (also written ante quam, 
 prius quam, cf. second example), before, introducing a state- 
 ment of fact, take the indicative. The present tense is used 
 of present time, the present or future perfect of future time, 
 and the perfect of past time. Antequam ad earn orationem 
 venio, videntur ea esse refutanda, before I come to that part 
 of my speech, those charges appear to need refutation. Neque 
 prius fugere destiterunt quam ad flumen pervenerunt, and 
 they did not stop in their flight before they readied the river. 
 
 210. Antequam and priusquam, before, take the subjunc- 
 tive when the action of the temporal clause is represented, not 
 as an actual fact, but as anticipated or prevented. Prius- 
 quam se hostes ex terrore reciperent, in fines Suessionum 
 exercitum duxit, before tlic enemy should recover from terror, 
 he led Iris arm v into tJie land of the Suessiones. Priusquam 
 periculum faceret, Volusenum praemittit, before making the 
 attempt, he sent out Volusenus in advance. 
 
 211. CONDITIONS. In a simple condition of which the 
 apodosis is stated as a fact if you succeed, I am glad ; if you 
 were successful, I was glad ; if you '(shall} succeed, I shall be 
 glad, etc. the indicative is used in both protasis and apodosis. 
 Si me consulis, suadeo, if you ask my opinion, I advise it. 
 Si umquam de bonis viris potestas vobis iudicandi fuit, 
 hoc tempore earn potestatem omnem vos habetis, if ever 
 you have had an opportunity of passing judgment on good men, 
 at this time you have that opportunity in its completeness. 
 
 212. The apodosis may have, instead of the indicative, an imperative, 
 hortatory subjunctive, or any other form demanded by the sense. Qui si 
 
 1 Priusquam is the commoner word.
 
 CONDITIONS 
 
 45 
 
 hie permanent, mementote hos pertimescendos, if they stay here, remem- 
 ber that these are the men to be feafed. 
 
 213. It should be noted that, if the condition -refers to the future, 
 Latin usually employs a future tense. English generally prefers the pres- 
 ent. Si iste unus tolletur, videbimur esse relevati, if he, and he only, is 
 removed, we shall seem to have been relieved. If the condition is thought 
 of as completed before the conclusion begins, the future perfect is used 
 in the protasis. Faciam, si mihi fidem dederis, / will do it, if you will 
 first promise me. 
 
 214. If a future condition is less distinctly stated if you 
 should (or were to] succeed, I should be glad the present sub- 
 junctive is used in both clauses. Si per te liceat, belli casum 
 sustineant, if you were to alloiv it, they would support the for- 
 tune of war. 
 
 215. If the supposition is represented as contrary to fact 
 if you were succeeding, I should be glad ; if you had succeeded, 
 I should have been glad the subjunctive is used in both clauses. 
 Present time is denoted by the imperfect, past time by the 
 pluperfect. Si te parentes timerent, ab eorum oculis con- 
 cederes, if your parents were afraid of yon, you ivonld with- 
 draw from their sight. Nisi Ilias ilia exstitisset, tumulus 
 nomen etiam obruisset, unless the Iliad had been written, the 
 grave would have buried his name too. 
 
 216. In apodoses of conditions contrary to fact the past tenses of 
 the indicative, instead of the subjunctive, are used of verbs signifying 
 necessity, possibility, or duty. The imperfect is used of present (some- 
 times of past) time, the perfect of past. Si privatus esset, tamen erat de- 
 ligendus, if he were a private citizen, still lie ought to be chosen. Deleri 
 totus exercitus potuit si fugientis persecuti victores essent, the whole 
 army could have been destroyed if the victors had followed up the fugi- 
 tives. 
 
 217. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF COMPARISON. Clauses 
 introduced by the particles meaning as if ac si, quasi, tam-
 
 46 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 quam si, ut si, velut si, and simple tamquam or (from Livy's 
 time) velut take the subjunctive. Although the English 
 idiom gives an implication contrary to fact, the present or per- 
 fect tense is used unless sequence requires the imperfect or 
 pluperfect. Parvi sic iacent tamquam omnino sine animo 
 sint, babies lie there as if they had no wits at all. Velut si 
 pariter utrosque murus texisset, utrimque procursum est, 
 as if the ivall had protected both parties equally, they ran for- 
 ward from each side. 
 
 218. CONCESSIVE CLAUSES. Of the most common conces- 
 sive particles (meaning although] quamquam usually takes the 
 indicative ; quamvis and cum commonly take the subjunctive ; 
 etsi and tametsi follow the constructions of si ; licet (proper- 
 ly a verb, it is permitted) takes a subjunctive, which, by the 
 law of sequence, is restricted to the present or perfect. Rela- 
 tive pronouns (equivalent to cum is, etc.) take the subjunc- 
 tive (cf. 187). Hos cum finibus expellere non potuissent, 
 tamen vectigales sibi fecerunt, although they had not been 
 able to drive them from their territory, they nevertheless made 
 them tributary to themselves. Tametsi video quanta tem- 
 pestas impendeat, although I see zvhat a mighty storm is 
 threatening. 
 
 219. CLAUSES OF PROVISO. Dum, modo, or dum modo 
 (negative dum ne, etc.), provided, if only, take the present 
 or imperfect subjunctive according to sequence. Ipse sese in 
 cruciatum dari cuperet, dum de patris morte quaereretur, 
 he would desire to be put to torture himself , provided his father's 
 death could be investigated. Est mihi tanti, dum modo a 
 vobis periculum depellatur, it is worth my while, if only the 
 danger may be warded off from you. 
 
 220. INDIRECT QUESTIONS. If a question is not asked di- 
 rectly, but depends upon an expression of saying or doubt, it 
 takes the subjunctive. The introductory word may be num
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 47 
 
 or -ne, L ivhether, or an interrogative pronoun or adverb. Quid 
 senatus censuerit exponam, / will tell ivhat tlie senate has 
 voted, (The direct question would be, quid censuit ? ivhai 
 has it voted?} Quaesivit a me vellemne secum proficisci, 
 he asked me whether I wished to go with him, 
 
 NOTE. Double indirect questions may be introduced by the same particles as 
 double direct questions, cf . 282. Or not is necne (less commonly annon). 
 
 221. INDIRECT DISCOURSE. Indirect 'discourse gives the 
 thought merely, not the exact words of a quotation. It is in- 
 troduced by a verb of saying, knowing, thinking, or perceiving. 
 The statement, / am giving what they ask, becomes, when 
 quoted by another person, he says that he is giving what they 
 ask ; or in past time, he said that he was giving what they 
 asked. If a declaratory sentence is thus indirectly quoted, 
 all main verbs which represent an indicative of the direct state- 
 ment take the infinitive ; all dependent verbs take the sub- 
 junctive. In the example above, am giving, the main verb, is 
 put in the infinitive; ask, the dependent verb, goes into the 
 subjunctive : dicit se dare quod petant, or in past time, dixit 
 se dare quod peterent. Observe that the English conjunc- 
 tion that, which introduces indirect discourse after verbs of 
 saying, etc., is not expressed in Latin. 2 
 
 222. If the main verb of the direct statement is an imperative, or an 
 optative or hortatory subjunctive, it is expressed by the subjunctive 
 when indirectly quoted. 
 
 f (pres.) dicit, he tells him, mit- 
 
 mitte, send, ) tat, to send, 
 
 mittat, let him send, \ 1 (past) dixit, he told him, mit- 
 
 [ teret, to send. 
 
 1 An, introducing single indirect questions, occurs most frequently in 
 the phrase haud scio an, / don't know but, I am inclined to think. Haud 
 scio an fieri possit, / don't know but (=perhaps) it is possible. 
 
 * It is necessary to analyze carefully in each case the English that. 
 Jt may mean, so that, in order Ma/=ut ; in that= quod, etc. ; or it may 
 introduce the indirect discourse as above.
 
 48 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 223. Questions in indirect discourse, when expecting an answer, are 
 expressed by the subjunctive (cf. 220). Rhetorical questions, on the 
 other hand, not expecting any answer, are equivalent to declaratory 
 sentences, and take the infinitive with subject accusative. Num obli- 
 visci possum? can I forget f becomes dicit num oblivisci se posse, he 
 says, can he forget? 
 
 224. The infinitive 1 is not influenced by the time of the verb 
 of saying, thinking, etc. In deciding what tense of the infini- 
 tive to use, consider what tense of the direct, unquoted state- 
 ment or thought it is to represent. 
 
 A present indicative of the direct statement is represented 
 when quoted by the present infinitive ; a past tense (imper- 
 fect, perfect, pluperfect), by the perfect infinitive ; a future 
 tense, by the future infinitive or by fore (futurum esse) ut 
 with the present subjunctive (imperfect when the verb of say- 
 ing is past, cf. 171). The construction with fore ut must be 
 used of verbs which have no passive participle. 
 
 f (pres.) putat me mittere, he thinks that I 
 
 am sending, 
 Mitto, / am sending becomes \ 
 
 I (past) putavit me mittere, he thought 
 
 [ that I was sending. 
 
 | (pres.) putat me misisse, he 
 
 , . thinks that I sent or have 
 
 Mittebam, / was sending, ^ 
 
 Misi, I have sent or 7 sent, \ become -J 
 
 ,_. , , , . I (past) putavit me misisse, he 
 
 Miseram, 7 had sent, J 
 
 thought that I sent, or kad 
 
 I sent. 
 
 ( (pres.) putat me missurum or putat fore 
 ut mittam, he thinks that I will send. 
 
 Mittam, 7 shall send, becomes \ (past) putavit me missurum or putavit fore 
 
 ut mitterem, he thought that I would 
 
 I send. 
 
 1 Remember that the subject accusative of the infinitive should ret?>i 
 larly be expressed.
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 49 
 
 potero (without passive parti- 
 
 f becomes (past) putavit fore ut possem, 
 ciple), / shall be able, \ , ,, , , ., , , , , , , 
 
 he thought that I should be 
 
 (pres.) putat fore ut possim, 
 he thinks that I shall be able. 
 
 able. 
 
 225. The tenses of the subjunctive in indirect discourse, un- 
 like the infinitive, depend upon the verb of saying, thinking, 
 etc., in accordance with the laws of sequence (cf. 168), being 
 present or perfect if the verb of saying is principal, imperfect 
 or pluperfect if it is historical. The present and imperfect 
 subjunctive, denoting incomplete action, represent a present, 
 imperfect, 1 or future of the direct discourse ; the perfect and 
 pluperfect subjunctive, denoting completed action, represent a 
 perfect, pluperfect, or future perfect. 
 
 (pres.) dicit se dare quod pe- 
 tant, he says that he isgiv- 
 Do quod petunt, / am giving ) J ing what they ask. 
 
 what they ask, \ j (past) dixit se dare quod pe- 
 
 terent, he said that he was 
 giving what they asked. 
 f (pres.) dicit se dare quod peti- 
 erint, he says that he is giv- 
 
 Do quod petierunt, / am giv- i ing what they have asked, 
 
 ing what they have asked, \ (past)dixit se dare quod petis- 
 
 sent, he said tJiat he was 
 giving what they had asked. 
 ( (pres.) dicit se daturum quod 
 petierint, he says that he 
 
 will give what they ask 
 Dabo quod petierint, / will , . .. . ... 
 
 (shall have asked). 
 >>-ive what they ask (shall becomes < 
 
 (past) dixit se daturum quod 
 have asked), .. . . , ., . , 
 
 petissent, he satd that he 
 
 wonldgive what they should 
 ask (should have asked}. 
 
 1 If, however, the action of a subordinate imperfect is completed at 
 the time of saying or thinking, it must be represented in quotation by 
 the perfect or pluperfect subjunctive. 
 4
 
 50 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 226. The examples of 225 show that the present and future infinitives 
 do not influence the sequence of the subjunctive. But the perfect in- 
 finitive is generally accompanied by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunc- 
 tive, even though the verb of saying is principal. Dicit se dedisse quod 
 peterent, he says that he gave what they asked (ci. 171). 
 
 227. Verbs of promising, hoping, swearing, and threatening, generally 
 take the indirect discourse with the infinitive in \\\e future, unlike the 
 English idiom, which more frequently has a complementary present in- 
 finitive. Polliceor me brevi venturum, I promise to come soon. Speravit 
 se adfuturum, he hoped to be present. 
 
 228. If the verb of saying, thinking, etc., is passive, the personal con- 
 struction is common. Caesar dicitur pervenisse, Caesar is said to have 
 arrived. But with the compound tenses the impersonal construction is 
 preferred. Nuntiatum est Caesarem pervenisse, /'/ was reported that 
 Caesar had arrived. 
 
 NOTE. Videor, seem, is regularly personal except in the phrase mini videtur, 
 / believe (it seems to me). Credo, believe, is impersonal in the passive (cf. 89). 
 Credebat.ur me abisse, / was believed to have gone. 
 
 229. SIMPLE AND FUTURE CONDITIONS IN INDIRECT DIS- 
 COURSE. When conditions are indirectly quoted, the protasis, 
 being a subordinate clause, is put in the subjunctive, and the 
 apodosis, if independent, goes into the infinitive. In protasis 1 
 the tenses have the same distinctions as in other subordinate 
 clauses indirectly quoted (cf. 225). The tense of the infinitive 
 in apodosis 1 is settled just as in any main clause of an indirect 
 
 quotation (cf. 224). 
 
 Simple Conditions 
 
 C (pres.) dicit se, si petant, dare, he says 
 
 51 petunt, do, if they \ \ that, if they ask, he gives. 
 
 ask, I give, \ S 1 (past) dixit se, si peterent, dare, he 
 
 t said that, if they asked, he gave. 
 (pres.) dicit se, si petierint (or petis- 
 sent, 226), dedisse, he says that, if 
 they have asked, he has given. 
 
 Si petierunt, dedi, if ~\ 
 
 they have asked, I \ becomes 
 
 (past) dixit se, si petissent, dedisse, he 
 have given, 
 
 said that, if they had asked, he had 
 
 given. 
 
 1 Except when the supposition is contrary to fact (cf. 230).
 
 CONDITIONS IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 
 
 Si petent, dabo, //' 
 they ask, I will 
 give, 
 
 Si petierint, dabo, //' j 
 they shall ask, I 
 will give (cf. 213), 
 
 Si petant, dem, if 
 they should ask, I 
 wouldgive (cf . 2 1 4) , 
 
 becomes 
 
 becomes 
 
 Future Conditions 
 
 f (pres.) dicit se, si petant, daturum, he 
 
 says that, if they ask, he will give. 
 | (past) dixit se, si peterent, daturum, he 
 I said that, if they asked, he would give. 
 ( (pres.) dicit se, si petierint, daturum. 
 
 he says that, if they shall ask, he will 
 
 give. 
 (past) dixit se, si petissent, daturum, 
 
 he said that, if they should ask, he 
 
 would give. 
 identical in form with the more vivid 
 
 future when quoted (third example 
 
 above). The difference in meaning 
 
 can be seen only by the context. 
 
 230. CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT IN INDIRECT DIS- 
 COURSE. The protasis does not follow the sequence of the 
 verb of saying, but always remains in the direct form. The 
 verb of the apodosis, if it is active and has the passive par- 
 ticiple, is expressed by the periphrastic perfect infinitive 
 (-urum fuisse ') ; if it has no passive participle or is passive, 
 it is expressed by the imperfect subjunctive introduced by 
 futurum fuisse ut. The only distinction, therefore, between 
 present and past conditions contrary to fact, when indirectly 
 
 quoted, is in the protasis. 
 
 dicit i se, si peterent, da- 
 dixit j turum fuisse (esse), 
 
 { that, if they were 
 he says J . / 
 
 . .,-{ asking, he should 
 he satd 
 
 I be giving. 
 
 dicit 
 dixit 
 
 PRESENT. Si peterent, darem, 
 if they w'ere asking, I 
 should be giving, 
 
 becomes 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Si petissent, dedissem, 
 if they had asked, I 
 should have given. 
 
 becomes 
 
 \ se, si petissent, da- 
 > turum fuisse, 
 f that, if they had 
 
 he said 
 
 
 
 asked, he should 
 have given. 
 
 1 The periphrastic present infinitive (-urum esse) might be expected in 
 the apodosis of -A present condition contrary to fact, but it rarely occurs.
 
 52 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 Ai-oDosis PASSIVE. Si id petis- 
 sent, datum esset, if 
 
 they had asked for it, \ becomes { 
 
 it would have been 
 
 f . . ( si id petissent, fu- 
 dicit \ * , . 
 
 . ., \ turum fuisse ut da- 
 dixit / 
 
 < retur, 
 
 f that, if they had 
 he says \ asked for it, it 
 he said \ would have been 
 
 given, 
 
 I given. 
 
 231. IMPLIED INDIRECT DISCOURSE. When a subordi- 
 nate clause expresses the thought of some other person than 
 the speaker or writer, even though it is not introduced by a 
 word of saying, thinking, etc., it takes its verb in the subjunc- 
 tive (cf. 225). Si sese interfici nollent, arma ponere iusse- 
 runt, they ordered them, if they did not wish to be killed, to 
 lay down their arms. Nollent is quoted by Caesar from the 
 actual command, si vos interfici non vultis, arma ponite, if 
 you do not ivish to be killed, lay doivn your arms. 
 
 232. SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION. A subordinate clause 
 which depends on a subjunctive or infinitive, and forms an es- 
 sential part of the idea expressed by that subjunctive or in- 
 finitive, takes its verb in the subjunctive. Quis tarn dissolute 
 animo est, qui haec cum videat tacere possit ? who is of 
 such a depraved spirit, that when he sees these things he can be 
 silent ? The idea in cum videat is an essential limitation of 
 tacere possit. A person's depravity is not shown by his 
 mere ability to keep silent, but by his exercise of that ability 
 when he sees such disgraceful conduct. 
 
 Imperative 
 
 233. The imperative expresses various shades of will, from 
 strong command to mild entreaty. (For negative command, 
 see 175.) 
 
 234. The present imperative is more common than the future, and 
 expects immediate fulfilment. Educ tecum omnis tuos ; purga urbem, 
 lead out all your fellows with you ; cleanse the city. 
 
 The future imperative is the regular imperative form of some verbs: 
 scito, knmv ; habeto, consider ; memento, remember; esto, be thou.
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 53 
 
 NOTE. The future imperative is used in legal formulas, general maxims, and 
 apodoses of future conditions. Amicitia his legibus esto, there shall be amity 
 on these terms. Ubi nihil erit quod scribas, id ipsum scribito, when there 
 isn't anything for vou to write, writ? simply that. 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 235. THE INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT. The infinitive is a verbal 
 substantive. It is used as the subject of est and many im- 
 personal expressions e. g., pudet, it shames ; licet, // is al- 
 lowed ; oportet, ought ; libet, // delights; placet, it pleases ; 
 interest, it matters ; necesse est, must ; opus est, there is 
 need ; fas est, // is right, etc. Neque longius anno re- 
 manere licet, nor is it allowable to remain longer than a year. 
 Legem illam appellate fas non est, to call that a law is not 
 right. A predicate noun is in the accusative. 
 
 236. INFINITIVE AS OBJECT. Many verbs take an infini- 
 tive to complete their meaning. These are especially verbs 
 meaning to be able, wish, be accustomed, resolve, begin or end, 
 attempt, dare, hasten, and seem. 
 
 A brief list : 
 
 possum, be able vereor, be afraid 
 
 volo (and compounds), wish paro, prepare 
 
 cupio, desire neglego, neglect 
 
 incipio, coepi, begin cogito, meditate 
 
 desino, cease meditor, have in mind 
 
 conor, attempt statuo, constituo, resolve, decide 
 
 audeo, dare consuesco, soleo, be wont 
 
 contendo, "I doceo, teach 
 
 mature, disco, learn 
 
 \ hasten , 
 
 propero, scio, know how 
 
 festino, J debeo, ought 
 
 dubito, hesitate videor, seem 
 
 Nostri tamen, quod neque ordines servare neque firmiter insistere neque 
 signa subsequi poterant, etc., but our men, bccattse they were not able to 
 keep their ranks nor to stand firmly nor to follow close to the standards, 
 etc. In Britanniam proficisci contendit, he hastened to set out for Britain.
 
 54 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 NOTE. Verbs of wishing take ut also, opto regularly so, but cupio always 
 has the infinitive. Cf. 238 and 239. 
 
 237. INFINITIVE WITH SUBJECT ACCUSATIVE. The infini- 
 tive with subject accusative is used as the subject of expres- 
 sions made up of est followed by a predicate nominative 
 (substantive or adjective) and of some impersonal verbs. 
 
 A brief list of expressions with est : 
 
 aequum, par, iustum est, it is right necesse, opus, /'/ is necessary, needful 
 fas, nefas, /'/ is right, wrong mirum, it is wonderful 
 
 apertum, manifestum, /'/ is clear verum, /'/ is true 
 honestum, it is honorable falsum, /'/ is false 
 
 turpe, // is disgraceful fama, the story is 
 
 Impersonate : interest, it matters ; placet, it pleases ; constat, // is es- 
 tablished ; oportet, ought ; conducit, // is expedient, etc. Quod vos igno- 
 rare non mirum est, your ignorance of this is not strange. 
 
 238. The infinitive with subject accusative is used as the object of 
 volo (and compounds), when the subject of the infinitive is different 
 from that of volo ; so of iubeo, order ; veto, forbid ; patior and sino, al- 
 low. Volo te hoc facere, / wish you to do this. Eos in continentem 
 adduci iussit, he ordered them to be brought to the continent. (For the 
 infinitive with subject accusative in indirect discourse as object of verbs 
 of saying, etc., cf. 221.) 
 
 239. Volo and compounds also take the subjunctive with or without 
 ut. With velim, vellem, malim, mallem, Cicero always uses the co- 
 ordinate subjunctive (without ut). Velim eas, / should like you to go. 
 
 240. The tenses of the infinitive denote time relative to the 
 time of the verb on which they depend. Thus the present 
 infinitive describes an action as contemporaneous with the time 
 of the main verb ; the perfect, an action as prior to the time of 
 the main verb ; and the future, an action as subsequent to the 
 
 time of the main verb : 
 
 that he is coming (contem- 
 
 poraneous) 
 
 r / 
 
 inrimuvr. < ui-a.li., nc *utu j i that he was coming (contem- 
 
 poraneous)
 
 FI'TURK ( dicit, he says > 
 INFINITIVE \ dixit, he saiit \ 
 
 se venturum 
 
 PARTICIPLES 55 
 
 PERFECT ^ dicit, lie says > ( that he came (prior) 
 
 INFINITIVE \ dixit, he said ) \ that he had come (prior) 
 
 f that he will come (subse- 
 quent). 
 
 that he would come (subse- 
 quent). 
 
 241. Such English phrases as ought to have done, cottld have done, 
 might have done, etc., should be rendered in Latin by the perfect or im- 
 perfect of possum, oportet, etc., with the present infinitive: facere po- 
 tuit, he might have done ; facere eum oportuit, he ought to have done. 
 The English puts the tense of the infinitive in the past, while the Latin 
 puts the tense of the main verb in the past. 
 
 Participles 
 
 242. The participle is a verbal adjective. Like a verb it 
 may govern a case ; like an adjective it agrees with a substan- 
 tive. Participles denote time with reference to the finite verb 
 of the clause in which they stand. 
 
 PRESENT: contemporaneous action : moriens dixit, (while) dying he said, etc. 
 PERFECT : prior action : progressus dicit, having advanced, he speaks. 
 FUTURE : subsequent action : venturus scripsit, when intending to come 
 (about to come) he wrote. 
 
 243. The perfect participle of some deponents is used practically like 
 our present. So arbitratus, ratus, thinking ; solitus, accustomed ; ausus, 
 venturing; usus, using, etc. 
 
 244. The missing perfect active participle is supplied by the perfect 
 participles of the deponent verbs ; in other verbs by clauses with cum, 
 postquam, etc. (203), or by the ablative absolute. Cum venisset, dixit, 
 having come he said. The missing present passive participle is made 
 good by clauses with dum or cum (204). Dum de condicionibus agunt, 
 while they were discussing terms (terms being discussed ). 
 
 245. ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE. The present and perfect 
 participles may be used like attributive adjectives. Id ille 
 intuens neque ignorans civium suorum consuetudinem, 
 he, regarding this ami not unacquainted with the habit of his
 
 56 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 fellow-citizens. His de rebus Caesar certior factus et in- 
 firmitatem Gallorum veritus, Caesar, informed of these events 
 ii id fearing the fickleness of the Gauls. 
 
 246. Attributive participles often express time, cause, manner, means, 
 condition, concession, etc., and are thus equivalent to clauses. Hunc 
 infamatum a plerisque tres historic! summis laudibus extulerunt, him, 
 though defamed (concession) by the majority, three historians have greatly 
 praised. C. Flaminium cum exercitu insidiis circumventura occidit neque 
 multo post C. Centenium saltus occupantem, he slew Gains Flaminius 
 involved with his army in an ambuscade (time) and a little later Gains 
 Centenius while he was holding the passes (time). 
 
 247. The attributive perfect passive participle often carries the main 
 idea. Ab urbe condita,/>w the founding of the city. 
 
 248. After video, audio, and the like, note the difference in meaning 
 between the infinitive and present participle. Audivi eum vocantem, / 
 heard him (in the act of) calling ; but audivi eum vocare, I heard that he 
 was calling. 
 
 So facio, induco, represent, take a present participle to indicate the 
 act as taking place. (Plato) eum induxit commemorantem, Plato repre- 
 sented him saying. 
 
 249. The use of present participles as substantives in the nominative 
 singular is rare. In the other cases it is common. Thus : amans should 
 not be used to mean a lover, but amantis, amantem, amantes, etc., may 
 be so used. This applies also to the masculine of the perfect passive 
 participle with a few exceptions e.g., natus, son; but not to the neuter 
 e. g., dictum, factum, institutum, responsum. 
 
 250. The future participle rarely occurs with a noun in classical Latin 
 (except in the phrase res futura, the future, singular and plural). Its 
 only common use is in the periphrastic conjugation. 
 
 . Gerund and Gerundive 
 
 251. The gerund is a verbal substantive with active mean- 
 ing ; the gerundive, a verbal adjective with passive meaning. 
 The gerund may, therefore, be used alone like a noun, while 
 the gerundive must always accompany a noun or pronoun
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE 57 
 
 with which it agrees. In legendo, in the reading (gerund). 
 Liber legendus, a book to be read (gerundive). 
 
 252. Instead of the gerund with an accusative, the gerundive con- 
 si ruction is generally used. Instead of pacetn petendi causa, write pacis 
 p ^tendae causa, for the sake of seeking peace. 
 
 NOTE. If the accusative is a neuter pronoun or adjective, the gerund is used. 
 Studium aliquid agendi, desire of doing something. 
 
 253. GENITIVE. 1 The genitive of both gerund and gerun- 
 dive frequently depends upon nouns and adjectives, especially 
 causa (sometimes gratia). Summa difficultas faciendi pon- 
 tis, extreme difficulty of building a bridge. Cupidus audiendi, 
 desirous of hearing. Praedandi frumentandique causa, for 
 the sake of plundering and foraging. 
 
 254. When used with mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, the gerundive takes 
 the same form without regard to gender or number. Sui conservandi 
 causa, for the sake of preserving themselves (not conservandorum). 
 
 255. DATIVE. The dative of gerund and gerundive may 
 be used with studeo, be eager for ; praesum, be in charge of; 
 diem dicere, name a day for, etc., also with official titles and 
 comitia, election. Studeo libris legendis, I am eager to read 
 (for reading) the books. Curator muris reficiendis, com- 
 missioner for repairing the walls. 
 
 256. The dative may be used also after words of fitness (cf. 92), but 
 ad with the accusative is better. Locus ad egrediendum accommodatus, 
 or locus egrediendo accommodatus, a place suitable for disembarking. 
 
 257. ACCUSATIVE. The accusative of gerund and gerundive 
 is chiefly used after ad (rarely in). Navium magnam copiam 
 ad transportandum exercitum pollicebantur, they promised a 
 large number of ships for the transportation of the army. 
 
 258. The accusative of the gerundive is also used in dependence on 
 euro, care for ; conduce, hire; loco, contract for, let; trado, give over. 
 
 'The nominative of the gerund is supplied by the infinitive (cf. 235).
 
 58 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 etc., to denote the effect sought. Pontem in Arare faciendum curat, he 
 had a bridge built over the Safine. 
 
 259. ABLATIVE. The ablative of gerund and gerundive is 
 used to express means and cause (rarely manner}, and very 
 often with in, ab, de, ex. Hominis mens discendo alitur, 
 the liiiman mind is quickened by learning. In illo uno laudan- 
 do consentiunt, in praising him alone do they agree. 
 
 260. The gerundive alone or with esse (periphrastic) ma} 7 
 denote necessity or obligation. Oratio legenda, a speech that 
 ought to be read. Dedecus vitandum est, disgrace should be 
 avoided. The gerundive of transitive verbs only can have a 
 subject (cf. 89). With intransitives an impersonal construction 
 is necessary. Nobis currendum est, we must run. 
 
 NOTE. But utor, fruor, fungor, potior, are used personally in the oblique 
 cases. In fungendo munere, in performing a duty. 
 
 The Supine 
 
 261. The supine is a verbal substantive. The form in -um 
 (accusative supine) expresses purpose after verbs of motion. 
 It rarely takes an object. Cohortes frumentatum mittit, he 
 sends his cohorts a-f or aging. Legati veniebant questum quod, 
 etc., envoys came to complain because, etc. 
 
 262. The form in -u (ablative supine) is used chiefly as an 
 ablative of specification with fas, right ; nefas, wrong; ho- 
 nestus, honorable; turpis, base; iucundus, pleasant ; facilis, 
 easy; difficilis, difficult; mirabilis, marvellous; utilis, useful, 
 etc. It never takes an object. Incredibile dictu, incredible 
 to say (as to the saying).
 
 PREPOSITIONS 
 
 59 
 
 5. Particles 
 
 Prepositions 
 
 263. Most prepositions in Latin are used with the accusa- 
 tive. The following always belong with the ablative: a, ab 
 (abs), cum, de, e, ex, prae, pro, sine. With in and sub the 
 accusative is used of the limit of motion, the ablative of the 
 place where (cf. 137). In urbem pervenire, to arrive in town, 
 but in urbe esse, to be in town. Sub iugum mittere, to send 
 under the yoke, but sub monte considere, to encamp at the 
 foot of a mountain. 
 
 264. The forms a and e may be used before consonants only ; ab and 
 ex must be used before vowels and h, and may be used before most 
 consonants. Abs is allowable only with te, but a te is more frequent. 
 
 265. With two or more words in the same connection the preposition 
 is usually not repeated. Ex Aquitania Cantabrisque, from Aquitania 
 and the Cantabrians. On the other hand, the preposition should be re- 
 peated if the individual words are to be emphasized or distinguished. 1 
 Legati ab Haeduis et a Treveris veniebant, ambassadors came from the 
 Haeduans and (others} from the Tr evert. 
 
 Conjunctions 
 
 266. COPULATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 et, and, connects both likes and unlikes. 
 
 -que, and, is always appended to the first word in its clause 
 (unless that word is a monosyllabic preposition). It unites 
 things belonging closely together. 
 
 atque, ac, and, adds a more important member to a less im- 
 portant. The member adde>d is often a sort of definition 
 or afterthought. Ac never stands before vowels or //, rarely 
 before c, g, q. 
 
 etiam, even, still, etc., emphasizes the word to which it be- 
 longs and which it usually precedes. 
 
 1 Repetition of the preposition is the rule after et . . . et, nee . . . nee, 
 aut . . . aut, vel . . . vel, non modo . . . sed etiam, ut . . . ita, etc. ; also 
 after aut, vel, sed, nisi, quain, quasi, sicut, tamquam. etc.
 
 60 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 quoque, also, emphasizes the word to which it belongs and 
 which it always immediately follows. 
 
 267. Instead of et non, et numquam, et nullus, etc., write nee, nee um- 
 quam, nee ullus, etc. 
 
 268. Where three or more members are to be connected, use a con- 
 junction before each (it is not necessary before the first member) or 
 omit conjunctions entirely (asyndeton) ; or connect the last two by -que. 
 The general, the envoys, and the soldiers is iraperator, legati, milites, or 
 (et) imperator et legati et milites, or imperator, legati, militesque. 
 
 269. Two adjectives belonging to one noun are regularly connected 
 by et. A long, sewre journey, iter longum et grave. 
 
 270. ADVERSATIVES. 
 
 sed, but, the general word, both strong and weak. 
 
 verum, but, rare ; like sed. 
 
 tamen, nevertheless, really concessive. Usually stands first ; 
 sometimes after an emphatic word. 
 
 autem, but, however, etc., weakest ; introduces a contrast ; 
 often used in transitions := moreover, furthermore. It is 
 always post-positive, generally in second place. 
 
 vero, verily, of a truth, emphasizes a statement. Generally in 
 second place (always post- positive). 
 
 atandatqui, but and yet, very strong; contradict and intro- 
 duce objections. 
 
 271. DISJUNCTIVES. 
 
 aut, or, excludes one member or the other ; allows no choice. 
 
 vel, or, allows a choice ; adds an unimportant contrast. It 
 often introduces a correction, vel potius, or rather, -ve (en- 
 clitic) is like it, but rarer. 
 
 sive (seu), or, allows a choice ; often denotes indifference or 
 is used to introduce a correction, like vel; sive potius, or 
 rather. 
 
 272. CORRELATIVES. Both copulatives and disjunctives are used 
 correlatively. 
 
 COPULATIVE CORRELATIVES 
 et . . . et, both. . . . and. 
 cum . . . turn, both . . . and, not only . . . but also.
 
 ADVERBS 6r 
 
 non solum (modo) . . . sed (verum) etiam, not only . . . but also. 
 
 neque (nee) . . . neque (nee), neither . . . nor. 
 
 et . . . neque, and (on the one hand) . . . and not. 
 
 non modo non . . . sed ne quidem, not only not . . . but not even. 
 
 tarn . . . quam, so . . . as. 
 
 DISJUNCTIVE CORRELATIVES 
 aut . . . aut, either . . . or, excludes one or the other member. 
 
 vel . . . vel, ) , , . 
 
 > whether . . . or, allows a choice, 
 sive . . . sive, > 
 
 ADDITIONAL CORRELATIVES 
 
 modo . . . modo, now . . . now, at one time . . . at another. 
 ut . . . ita, as ... so (cf. also 282). 
 
 273'. INFERENTIAL (ILLATIVE) CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 itaque, and so, betokens an actual result following a preced- 
 ing statement. It stands first. 
 ergo, therefore, points to a logical inference. Usually stands 
 
 first. 
 
 igitur, therefore, is used chiefly of opinions based on a pre- 
 ceding statement. It is usually post-positive. 
 proinde, therefore, is used in exhortations or commands 
 
 based upon what precedes: proinde abite, therefore go. 
 Numerous phrases may replace these conjunctions : qua re, qua ex 
 re, quibus ex rebus, qua de causa, etc. Note that an illative conjunction 
 cannot be used with a copulative e. g., et ergo, and therefore. Write 
 propterque earn causam, and the like. 
 
 274. CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 na.m,/or, always begins a sentence or clause. 
 enim,y<?/% is always post-positive. 
 etenim,/<?r, begins the sentence. 
 
 Adverbs 
 
 275. NEGATIVES. Non, the general negative, may negative 
 a whole sentence or a single word. 
 
 NOTE. Haud negatives single words. Of verbs it is common only with scio 
 (cf. p. 47, foot-note i). 
 
 276. Two negatives make an affirmative. Non ignoro, I am not igno- 
 rant (I know), non neg;o, / do not deny (I confess}. But after a general
 
 62 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 negative the distributives neque . . . neque, or the emphasizing neg- 
 atives ne . . . quidem, non modo, may follow without destroying the 
 negation. Nemo neque deus neque homo semper vigilat, nobody, either 
 god or man, is always on the ivatch. 
 
 277. Note the difference in meaning caused by the position of non. 
 
 nemo non, everybody, but non nemo, somebody. 
 nihil non, everything, but non nihil, something. 
 nulli non, all, but non nulli, some. 
 numquam non, always, but non numquam, sometimes. 
 
 278. Where a negative proposition is connected with the preceding 
 by tamen, enim, vero, etc., neque is to be used instead of non. 
 
 279. Ne is used with the various forms of independent subjunctive 
 (cf. 174 ff.), except the potential (179), and with many subordinate 
 clauses (cf. 188 ff). 
 
 Interrogative Sentences 
 
 280. Interrogative sentences may be classified as : 
 
 (a) Word-questions, introduced by some interrogative word. 
 Quid censes ? ivhat is your opinion ? Other like words are : 
 qualis, of what sort? quotiens, hoiv many times f quantus, 
 how great? ubi, where? etc. 
 
 (b) Sentence -questions, introduced by nonne, num, -ne, 
 or by no interrogative particle at all, the question being indi- 
 cated by the tone of voice, as in English. 
 
 281. Simple word-questions (a) require no rules except as to 
 mode (cf. 177-178). 
 
 Of the particles introducing sentence-questions (b), -ne is 
 used in real questions for information and is attached enclit- 
 ically to the emphatic word to which the question applies. 
 Nonne expects the answer Yes, num the answer No. Adest- 
 ne? is he here ? (question for information, no answer implied). 
 Nonne adest? isnt he here? or he's here, isnt he? (answer 
 Yes expected). Num adest ? is he here ? or he isnt here, is he ? 
 (answer No expected).
 
 ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES 63 
 
 NOTE. Questions of special emphasis, such as those expressing indignation, 
 refutation of an opponent, surprise, etc., may he introduced by an. An quod 
 non venerunt, de eorum fide dubitatis ? can it be that, because they have no/ 
 come, you are harboring doubts of their loyalty ? 
 
 282. Double or disjunctive questions have in the first mem- 
 ber utrum, -ne, whether, or less often no particle at all ; in 
 the second member an, or. Or not is annon. Utrum adest 
 an venit ? is he present or is he coming ? Bonumne an malum 
 est? is it good or bad? Videsne annon ? do you see or not ? 
 
 (For rhetorical questions, cf. 178; deliberative 177; indirect 
 questions, 220.) 
 
 283. ANSWERS. Latin has no words meaning exclusively 
 Yes or No. The most common form of answer consists in 
 repeating the word to which the question refers. Adestne 
 miles? is the soldier here? Adest, yes or non adest, no. 
 
 NOTE. Yes is further represented by ita, etiam, vero, sane, etc. Aut etiam 
 aut non respondere, to answer yes or no. 
 
 No is represented by non, (emphatically) by minime, minime vero, non ita, 
 nihil, etc. Coges me ? minime, will you compel me ? not at all (by no means). 
 
 6. Order of Words and Arrangement 
 of Clauses 
 
 284. The order of words in Latin is much, more flexible than 
 in English. There are two general types of order, the gram- 
 matical and the rhetorical. 
 
 285. GRAMMATICAL ORDER. The words belonging together 
 grammatically are placed together. 
 
 Subject. ttb. Modifiers of Predicate. Predicate. 
 
 non tarn mag-nitudine 
 Iphicrates, Atheniensis, rerum gestarum quam nobilitatus est. 
 
 disciplina militari 
 
 This is the usual order where no part of the sentence is to 
 be particularly emphasized or where it is not necessary to in- 
 dicate the connection \vith preceding or following sentences.
 
 6d NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 286. RHETORICAL ORDER. Since, however, the order is not 
 usually determined within each sentence, but depends upon 
 the relation of the sentence to others surrounding it, the 
 grammatical order (285) is constantly altered by numerous 
 influences. Any such deviation from the grammatical order, 
 for whatever reason, is a case of rhetorical order. This order 
 is by far the more important. The reasons for it may be 
 grouped under three heads: (i) desire for emphasis on some 
 word or phrase ; (2) desire to indicate clearly the connection 
 between the sentence and others ; (3) euphony or rhythm. 
 
 287. (i) EMPHASIS. There are three common methods of securing 
 emphasis: 
 
 (a) By placing the words to be emphasized first 1 or very early in the 
 sentence. Proelio supersedere statuit ; cotidie tamen equestribus proe- 
 liis, quid hostis virtute posset, periclitabatur, he decided to refrain from 
 a pitched battle ; yet daily (the emphatic word), by cavalry skirmishes 
 (hardly less emphatic, being contrasted with proelio, which is the most 
 emphatic word of all), trial was made of the enemy s mettle. Temporis 
 tanta fuit exiguitas, the time (the main thing) was so short, etc. . 
 
 (b) By anaphora, the repetition of a single word in the same position or 
 the recurrence of a series of words in the same order. Sed pleni omnes 
 sunt libri, plenae sapientium voces, plena exemplorum vetustas, but full 
 of examples are all books, full are the utterances of philosophers, full is an- 
 tiquity. Transire latissimum flumen, ascendere altissimas ripas, subire 
 iniquissimum locum (here the words are different, but the order is the 
 same), to cross a broad stream, mount lofty banks, approach a very difficult 
 position, etc. 
 
 (c) By chiasmus, contrasting one pair of words with another by ar- 
 
 1 221 
 
 ranging the second in the reverse order, z. ^jr -r^rr '~r~r; : r^r- 
 
 Quam diu vixit, vixit in luctu, 
 
 as long as he lived he lived in grief. 
 
 NOTK. Anaphora and chiasmus are more than mere rhetorical figures; they 
 are inherent in the language. By these two figures emphasis may be secured in 
 
 'The occurrence of an emphatic word late in a sentence is almost 
 always due to the fact that the word itself expresses emphasis (ipse, 
 nemo, etc.), or is an afterthought, or falls under one of the principles 
 of anaphora or chiasmus (287, b and c).
 
 ORDER OF SINGLE WORDS 65 
 
 any part of the sentence. Chiasmus is named from the Greek letter ^, the ' 'criss- 
 
 foris v arma, 
 cross order, X , 
 
 consilium domi. 
 
 288. (2) CONNECTION BETWEEN SENTENCES. The order is often 
 influenced by the desire to indicate clearly the relation of one sen- 
 tence to another. It is well to place early in a sentence any words re- 
 ferring back to a preceding sentence. Palus erat inter nostrum atque 
 hostium exercitum. Hanc si nostri transirent, hostes exspectabant, 
 there was a marsh between our army and that of the enemy. The enemy 
 were waiting to see if our men would cross this (Hanc put first to recall 
 palus). To this principle is due the frequent use of many connecting 
 words and phrases in Latin : qua ex re, quibus rebus cognitis, qua de 
 causa, quo facto, etc. 
 
 289. (3) EUPHONY AND RHYTHM. Of this principle we know little 
 save what the Romans themselves have told us. They avoided succes- 
 sions of many short words, of long words, of words-with like endings, 
 and poetic rhythm in prose, striving to produce a style pleasant to the 
 ear. 
 
 Order of Single Words 
 
 290. SUBSTANTIVES. An appositive regularly follows; as, Cicero 
 consul. 
 
 For the attributive genitive no rule can be laid down. 
 
 291. (a) Verbs like possum, audeo, volo (and compounds), used like 
 English auxiliary verbs may, might, would, etc., regularly follow a de- 
 pendent infinitive: dicere non ausim, / should not venture to say; but, 
 when these verbs are not weakened in meaning they precede : audeo 
 dicere, I dare to say. 
 
 (b) The parts of esse stand first when they denote reality or exist- 
 ence : fuit, fuit ista quondam in hac re publica virtus, there did exist, there 
 did exist, etc. 
 
 NOTE. In Cicero the infinitive esse usually follows an auxiliary. Inquam, 
 say, always follows one or more words of the quotation; credo, believe, and 
 opinor, suppose, are often used parenthetically in the midst of a direct statement. 
 
 292. ADJECTIVES, (a) The common adjectives, bonus, malus, etc., 
 usually precede their noun. An adjective becomes emphatic by being 
 placed out of its usual position. This is seen in the figure called hyper- 
 baton : magna proponit his qui occiderint praemia, great are the rewards 
 he offers those who shall kill (him). 
 
 5
 
 66 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 (b) But an adjective accompanied by a phrase regularly follows. Vir- 
 tus digna summo honore, virtue -worthy of the greatest honor. 
 
 (c) Of numerals the cardinals regularly precede, the ordinals follow. 
 Sex dies, but dies sexta. 
 
 293. PRONOUNS, (a) Demonstrative, relative, and interrogative pro- 
 nouns regularly precede the word to which they belong. 
 
 NOTK. But ille often follows regularly with a possessive. 
 
 (b) Possessives regularly follow the substantive unless they are em- 
 phatic. 
 
 (c) Indefinites regularly follow the substantive. 
 
 294. ADVERBS. Adverbs regularly stand next to and before the 
 word to which they belong. If very emphatic they may begin the 
 clause (cf. 287 a). Tarn and quam, however, are often separated by 
 some short word from the word they limit. Quam sit iusta (causa) 
 videamus, let us see how justifiable the reason is. 
 
 m 
 
 295. PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions, except tenus and versus, regu- 
 larly precede their case. If an adjective accompanies the noun, it often 
 precedes a monosyllabic preposition : quam ob rem, his de causis, summa 
 cum laude. 
 
 NOTK. The preposition cum is attached enclitically to the personal pronouns: 
 tecum, nobiscum ; and often to the relative : quocum, quibuscum. 
 (For the order of conjunctions, see 266-274.) 
 
 Arrangement of Clauses in a Period 
 
 296. A period is a compound sentence, containing one or 
 more subordinate clauses, in which the meaning is kept sus- 
 pended until the close. Latin tends naturally to assume the 
 periodic structure, and in this differs fundamentally from Eng- 
 lish, which prefers coordination. Hence a series of coordi- 
 nate clauses or sentences in English may often be fused into 
 one Latin period, thus dispensing with the excessively fre- 
 quent English " and!' Cf. 310. 
 
 NOTE. All Latin periods, however complicated, may be reduced by analysis 
 to one of three simple types : 
 
 1. One principal (A) and one subordinate (a) clause. 
 
 2. One principal (A) and two subordinate (a and b) clauses, independent of 
 each other and not connected by et.
 
 ARRANGEMENi OF CLAUSES IN A PERIOD 67 
 
 3. One principal (A) and two subordinate (a and ) clauses, one of which de- 
 pends on the other. 
 
 Under I, there are four possible arrangements of the period; under 2, five 
 simple combinations; under 3, no fewer than fifteen combinations, some of which 
 are rare. By the addition of other clauses almost endless combinations are possible. 
 It is good practice for the student to analyze complicated periods by reference to 
 these three simple types e. g., Romam ut ex Sicilia redii (a), cum iste atque 
 istius amici sermones eius modi dissipassent (b), me magna pecunia a vera 
 accusatione esse deductum (/3), tametsi probabatur nemini (c), tamen us- 
 que eo timui (A), ne quis de mea fide atque integritate dubitaret (d) donee 
 ad reiciundos iudices venimus (e). Here are no fewer than five clauses inde- 
 pendent of each other, one of which has a clause of the secend grade ()8) depend- 
 ent on it. It belongs, therefore, to (3), A : a : a. 
 
 297. By reason of this flexibility of arrangement, Latin pos- 
 sesses the power to produce the most subtle contrasts. In 
 practice the student should aim first at perfect clearness. 
 The use of many subordinate clauses should generally be 
 avoided. If many are necessary, it is usually better to ar- 
 range them side by side, avoiding insertion, except in the 
 case of very short clauses. This is the general practice of 
 Cicero, the master of the periodic style. 
 
 7. Remarks on Style 
 
 a. Substantives 
 
 298. The English, like other modern languages, possesses 
 many more substantives than the Latin. Hence we must 
 carefully analyze English nouns in order to find the best Latin 
 equivalent. The following are some useful principles. 
 
 299. A general Latin term may represent a special English noun. 
 Taste (good judgment) is iudicium. Imagination (as thought} is cogita- 
 tio. Prince is rex, regulus. Etymology is vis verbi. 
 
 NOTE. Mark the very wide use of res. It may mean any thing provided th p . 
 context makes it clear e. g., state, circumstance, proposal, experiment, etc. 
 
 300. The concrete in Latin may represent an English abstract. Arts 
 tocracy = principes ; the philosophy of Socrates = Socrates ; style of Caesar
 
 68 NOTES ON IDIOM 
 
 = Caesar. So names of peoples are often put for the country. Alli- 
 ance between Gaul and Germany = Gallorutn et Britannorum foedus. 
 
 301. Often the best way to render an English noun is to employ a 
 Latin adjective. By an equality of servz<;es=pa.ribus officiis ; journey to 
 4sza=iter Asiaticum ; war with the slaves =b&\\Mm servile. 
 
 NOTE. See the varied use of adjectives as substantives, 3 and 4. For the 
 substantive use of participles, see 249. 
 
 302. Many English substantives are best rendered by a phrase in 
 Latin. / > a/r*0/w=studium rei publicae. A relative clause is very 
 common. Standard-bear w=is qui aquilam fert. A subject=is qui paret. 
 So, too, other clauses may be used. 
 
 303. An English substantive may disappear in the Latin rendering, 
 or be represented by a pronoun. The latter is very common where a 
 noun has once been written. A pronoun may, in fact, represent any 
 thought or object made clear by the context. There is a river, the 
 Saone, which empties into the Rhone. This river the Helvetians were 
 crossing, is flumen est Arar, quod in Rhodanum influit. Id Helvetii transi- 
 bant. 
 
 304. The repetition of proper names is not so common in Latin as in 
 English. When once the persons are named the Latin prefers to repre- 
 sent them by pronouns, is, ille, hie, etc. Caesar demanded hostages of 
 the Gauls. The Gauls refused to send them, etc., is Caesar a Gallis ob- 
 sides postulavit. I Hi autem, etc., cf. 303. 
 
 b. Adjectives 
 
 305. English adjectives in -ble are often to be rendered by the perfect 
 passive participle : invincible =invic.tvis, /#zw/tf/<?=:inviolatus, incorrupt- 
 /</= incorruptus, immovable = immotus. Also by ad and a gerund : inft/- 
 ligible = la.c\\is ad intellegendum ; or by a relative clause: visible = <p\oA 
 cerni potest. Gerundives, too, may be used in this way : admirable 
 admirandus, tolerable = tolerandus. 
 
 NOTE. So adjectives in -less, where no exact equivalent exists, may be ren- 
 dered by a phrase with vacuus or sine : a treeless plain ager arboribus va- 
 cuus, or sine arboribus. 
 
 306. Adjectives which are not indispensable even in English may be 
 omitted in Latin e.g., practical, theoretical, subjective. Analyze the ex- 
 pression carefully to make sure that the adjective is unnecessary.
 
 REMARKS ON STYLE 69 
 
 For adjectives as substantives, see 3 and 4 ; adjectives instead of a 
 genitive, 63 and 64 ; and in general, i 10. 
 
 c. Verbs 
 
 307. The missing passive of deponent and many other verbs is 
 supplied by a phrase : to be admzred=tss& admiration!, to be ha/ed= 
 odio esse, etc. (cf. 99). 
 
 (For the perfect active participle, see 243-244.) 
 
 308. English auxiliary verbs may often be omitted in Latin. He 
 needed to fear no penalty = non metuit poenam. He knew how to protect 
 his position^, dignitatem tuebatur. But if the auxiliaries are in any way 
 emphasized it is better to render them by their corresponding Latin 
 equivalents: possum, volo, necesse est, etc. 
 
 309. The English passive is much more used than is the Latin pas- 
 sive. Hence the passive in English is often to be rendered in Latin by 
 an active (changing the subject), by an impersonal expression, etc. 
 Dumnorix is summoned to his presence may thus be translated, Dum- 
 norigem ad se vocat. 
 
 310. Avoidance of et in Latin. Latin prefers subordination, English 
 coordination. Hence the excessive use of and in English is not to be 
 duplicated by a like use of et in Latin. Avoid this by using a relative 
 clause, participle, ablative absolute, etc. He left his horse and hastened 
 to the camp is equo relicto ad castra contendit.
 
 PART I! 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 BASED ON 
 
 Caesar, Gallic War 
 
 BOOK III 
 
 For the Latin text, see pages 70 ff. 
 
 In the text of the exercises superior letters refer to the foot-notes; superior 
 figures, to the sections in Notes on Idiom. A superior letter or figure put after 
 a word applies to that word only ; preceding a word, applies to two or more words 
 following. 
 
 In the foot-notes of the exercises references to sections (e. g. 108) apply 
 to the Notes on Idiom. Ex. I. b = exercise I, foot-note b. A reference like 
 " Text 3. 4," occurring under an exercise based, for instance, on the third book 
 of the Gallic War, applies to chapter and section of that book. If a different 
 book is referred to, it is designated by abbreviations easily understood ; as, Text 
 B. G. 4. 7. 3 Caesar's Belliun Gallicum, book 4, chap. 7, 3. No reference is 
 made to any portion of text not printed in this book. 
 
 CHAPTERS 1-2 
 
 I. When Caesar a had finished his second campaign in Gaul and 1 ' 
 was on the point of starting for Italy, he ordered Galba 19i to go with 
 one legion to the Nantuates and the neighboring peoples, and to 
 try I93 to open a route through the Alps by which men and supplies 
 'might be sent I37 to Gaul from Italy without danger. Galba d fought 
 
 "Use abl. abs., exacta aestate. Campaign = aestas, as the season 
 when war is carried on ; or bellum, of the war itself. b Too frequent 
 use of et may be avoided by means of a pf. pass, ptc., an abl. abs., or a 
 clause with cum, postquam, etc. (310). c This expresses Caesar's pur- 
 pose in having a route opened ( 188 ; also cf. 171). d llle ( 304).
 
 CAESAR. GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 71 
 
 several successful engagements, and 1 ' established his cohorts "in 
 villages of the enemy for the purpose of wintering there 1 . But 
 I28 within a few 1 -' days the Gauls determined for several reasons ' 93 to 
 renew the war, because they believed -'that h by seizing the heights 
 in the night "'they could easily crush the Romans. 
 
 e The plural is usual. f Omit. ^Pauci. h Use abl. abs. 
 
 Cl* / CHAPTERS 3-4 
 
 H* * frl , aJ^fj^^ ., 
 
 "2. "'After Galba bad Defeated tneGmls a in several engagements^ . 
 
 ho reueived hostage^^arn/ (nomand b made peao./ TJwr*Tn-g r that 
 
 A HIT Lt^-4 -ft*- r ity*-*ty-4~*rd+ i L&S 
 there was no reason *e-Ter gunner hostilities, he had not quite 
 
 completed his fortifications nor laid in a sufficient.' stock of pr 
 visions. Consequently 1 , when the ILomAnsmRtyssaw 22I that the 
 higher ground g was 224 all occupied by armed men, and that the 
 roads were blocked, many of them almost despaired 11 of escape. 
 The majority', however, decided I93 to fortify the camp and to j see 
 what turn events would take. Soe the enemy rushed down upon 
 them from all directions, and fought so bravely I96 that they almost 
 captured 168 the camp. 
 
 a Instrumental ( 108), not local. b Ex. i.b. c Use a causal clause 
 ( 1 86). d Render by iam (iam non or non iam = no longer). c Not . . . 
 nor, neque . . . neque. f = and so ( 273). K Neuter pi.; loci= pas- 
 sages of books. h Caesar uses despero as a transitive vb. only in the 
 abl. abs. with the pf. ptc. With the active he generally (dat. twice) 
 uses de and the abl. 'Two words in Latin. \ j Text 3. 4. 
 
 CHAPTERS 5-6 
 
 3. a 4 While our men were fresh 3 , they hastened b to aid those 
 parts of the camp which were being stripped of defenders 101 ; but 
 when c the conflict had been raging for several hours" 8 , both strength 
 and weapons failed them, and' 1 , owing to their small numbers, they 
 were brought into desperate straits. Galba, consequently, deter- 
 mined to make a sally, and ordered his men to cease fighting a 
 
 a = of fresh strength (117). b Text 4. 2. c =// was being fought. 
 Kor tense, see 159. d Ex. i. b.
 
 72 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 little while and rest themselves. c When the signal was given, they 
 burst forth from camp so quickly I96 that they easily surrounded and d 
 either f killed or routed all 72 of the Gauls who had come g to that 
 place. On the next day, with no enemy to delay his march, Galba 
 h set out for the province. 
 
 e Use abl. abs. Either . . . or, aut . . . aut ( 272). e Text 3. 3. 
 h Text i.i. 
 
 CHAPTERS 7-8 
 
 4. 203 When Caesar heard ^'that Galba 224 had routed 3 the enemy 
 in the Alps, he believed that there were no longer 5 any c tribes of 
 Gaul which ^ would try' 71 to d renew hostilities with the Romans. 
 And so at the beginning of winter he went to Illyricum I88 to ac- 
 quaint' 68 himself with the country and people. But e shortly after- 
 wards war broke out in several states of Gaul. The Veneti began 
 the trouble f I25 by holding two Roman ambassadors who had come 
 to ask for supplies. 8 By this proceeding they thought that they 
 could compel 11 Crassus, Caesar's lieutenant, I93 to return their host- 
 ages. For the same reason ambassadors were held by the adjoin- 
 ing states too, and soon all the peoples on the seaboard had sworn 
 through their leading men not ^to remain in subjection to the 
 Romans. 
 
 a Text 6. 3. b Ex. 2. d. c Ullus. d Text 2. 2. e Paulo post. 
 i = thing (299, N.). s = thus. h Cogo. 
 
 CHAPTERS 9-10 
 
 5. ^As soon as Caesar, who had gone to Illyricum, had been in- 
 formed by Crassus of this revolt of the maritime states, he gave 
 orders that war-ships should be built and everything which ^'was 
 needed for their equipment provided 8 as soon as possible. He de- 
 termined "to carry the war first into Venetia, I8s because b that was 
 the most influential state of this region, and he believed that, c if 
 the rebellion here should not be allowed to pass unnoticed, the re- 
 
 a = /0 make war upon, text B. G. 4. 7. 3. b Text 8. i. c Render 
 this clause by abl. abs.
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 73 
 
 maining states could 224 be easily pacified d . e At the same time, 
 188 that other states might not 188 f join the conspiracy, he hastened to 
 send troops into all parts of Gaul. 
 
 d Text 7. i. e At the same time, one word. i join tke conspiracy, 
 one word. For sequence, see 168. 
 
 CHAPTERS n-12 
 
 6. Titus Labienus, whom Caesar sent to the Treveri, was or- 
 dered* to hold the Belgians in allegiance and to prevent the Ger- 
 mans I94 from crossing the Rhine. Publius Crassus b was put in 
 command of the troops which were sent to Aquitania. Decimus 
 Brutus with the fleet and Caesar himself with the land forces started 
 203 as soon as they could for the country of the Veneti. The 
 towns of this people were for the most part situated on the ends of 
 promontories, I96 so that approach to them, c either on foot or with 
 ships, d was rendered difficult by the tide. Owing to their ad- 
 vantageous locations, they easily defended themselves during most 
 of the summer. 
 
 "Use iubeo. b Was put in command of, one word. * Either . . . 
 or, vel . . . vel ( 272). d Was rendered difficult, one word. 
 
 CHAPTER 13 
 
 7. The Veneti had a a large number of ships, and in both the 
 b theoretical and the practical knowledge of nautical affairs they 
 far surpassed their neighbors. Their vessels were built of great 
 strength, I88 to enable them to withstand the many dangers of nav- 
 igation in these waters . The keels were s rather flat, I89 that they 
 might more easily float in the shallow water at ebb-tide. Skins 
 were thinly prepared d to serve as sails, and, being 6 stronger' than 
 linen, they were better adapted g to withstand the fury of the ocean 
 tempests. Io6 In s'peed alone our fleet h was superior. 
 
 "Text 12. 2. b Text 8. I ( 106). c = places. d = for sails. 
 
 c Ex. 2. c. Tortis. * Ad and the gerundive. h One word.
 
 74 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 CHAPTERS 14-15 
 
 8. 2l8 Although Caesar "captured several towns of the enemy by 
 assault, he could not prevent 1 ' the townspeople I94 from escaping by 
 means of their ships ^so long as his own fleet was not d at hand 
 "to help him. Consequently 6 he gave orders for his ships to as- 
 semble 8 as soon as possible. With these a large fleet of the Ven- 
 eti hastened to engage f , l86 since they 19 thought that the enemy would 
 *-'at once seek safety in flight. But the Romans, who surpassed the 
 barbarians Io6 in valor, fought all the more bravely l85 because the 
 contest was taking place under the rye of Caesar himself; and, 
 although the fighting continued from about I34 ten o'clock until sun- 
 set, they were finally 11 victorious. 
 
 * Captured by assault, one word. b Use prohibeo. c Use is. d Ad- 
 sum. e Ex. 2. f. f Congredior. g Statim. h Denique. 
 
 CHAPTERS 16-17 
 
 9. "After this battle the Veneti were unable ''to continue the war, 
 I85 because they had brought together all their men and all the ships 
 they had in the world, c and .now that these had been defeated, they 
 had no lb2 means of defending themselves and their towns against 
 the Romans. ^When they had surrendered, Caesar put the sen 
 ators to death, and d the rest of the people he sold into slavery; 
 for he wished all the Gauls I93 to understand that they -^must ob- 
 serve the rights 6 of ambassadors. ^ During these occurrences 
 among the Veneti, Sabinus, who had been sent out by Caesar, 
 arrived in the country of the Venelli ; but 2l8 although Viridovix, 
 the commander of the Gauls, offered battle every day, he had been 
 unwilling to fight ^until a f favorable occasion should be given. 
 
 a Text 6. 4. b = to wage war longer (diutius). c Connect by a rel. 
 pron. and use abl. abs. d Ex. i. b. 'Singular in Latin. f Favor- 
 able occasion, one word. 
 
 CHAPTERS 18-19 
 
 10. ' 3I After a few days Sabinus persuaded one 7 'of the Gauls 
 whom he had with him I9 to go over to the camp of Viridovix a in 
 
 a Pro,
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 75 
 
 the character of a deserter and tell him that I28 on the next night 
 the Roman army 2 - 4 was going away to aid Caesar. = 3 Uppn hearing 
 this the Gauls urged their officers I9 to lead them 27 out against the 
 enemy at once. I88 ln order to give the Romans 8 as little time as 
 possible for equipping themselves, they set off at full speed. b The 
 result was I98 that they arrived all out of breath and exhausted ; and 
 so, when the Romans suddenly ''burst forth from two gates 6 at once, 
 they were not able to withstand even 1 a single attack. g Most of 
 them were killed in the rout, and' 1 their states at once surrendered. 
 
 b = from which it happened. c Easily inferred from the noun in 
 the text. A =.made a sally. e = at the same time ; text 9. 3. 
 
 f Not even = ne . . . quidem, which enclose the limited word or words. 
 -Plerique. h Ex. I. b. 
 
 CHAPTERS 20-21 
 
 11. At about the same time, Publius Crassus, who had been or- 
 dered to go I37 to Aquitania with a force of infantry and cavalry ' KK in 
 order that a aid might not be sent from 'that powerful nation to the 
 Veneti, came to an engagement with the enemy. '"A few years be- 
 fore, the Aquitanians had routed a Roman army, and c slain the com- 
 mander; and so at this time, confident because of their former vic- 
 tory" 1 , they thought that they could 224 easily' 1 defeat ^the young 
 Crassus. The battle was long and fierce, but at last, exhausted 
 from their wounds, the enemy turned in flight. Their town was 
 then attacked, and c , 2l8 although they resisted bravely, they soon 6 
 begged Crassus 55 I9 to accept f their surrender, and gave up their 
 arms. 
 
 a Text 1 1. 3. b Tantus. c Ex. i.b. d Text 13.6. e Brevi 
 
 tempore. ' ' = them into surrender. 
 
 CHAPTERS 22-23 
 
 12. In that town of the Aquitanians. which Crassus had cap- 
 tured, "as has been said, 128 within a few days after his arrival 
 thither, there was a band' 1 of six hundred men who had devoted 
 
 "Text 20. i. ''Text 11. 4.
 
 76 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 themselves to the friendship of a certain Adiatunnus, taking oath 
 227 that, "'if any 38c harm should come to him, they would all bear the 
 same fortune together or would put themselves to death. d On the 
 other hand, he 19 promised ^that they should enjoy with him 27 all 
 the good things in life. These men tried to force a way out I37 from 
 the town, but were repulsed, and 6 straightway surrendered. Crassus 
 then f made war upon other tribes of Aquitania, which had called 
 in soldiers and officers from Spain to carry on the war with them. 
 
 c Accidit, /'/ happens, often implies misfortune ; contingit, on the other 
 hand, is used of fortunate events. d Contra. "By use of a ptc. 
 
 and may be omitted ( 310). f Ex. 5. a. 
 
 CHAPTERS 24-26 
 
 13. l86 Since the Spanish 3 officers b had been associated Ia8 for sev- 
 eral years with ^the skilful c general Sertorius, they possessed an 
 "excellent knowledge of military science; and so, l86 as the number 
 of the enemy was d increasing every day, Crassus thought that he 95 
 Bought to e come to an engagement 8 as soon as possible. At day- 
 break he led out all his forces, and f waited to see ^what plan 70 the 
 enemy would adopt ; but they remained in camp, for they thought 
 that they could win a victory" 5 more easily g by blockading the 
 roads and cutting off supplies. Crassus saw through this plan. 
 and f hastened to attack a part of the camp which he had learned 
 was 2 * 4 not carefully fortified. The enemy, surrounded on all sides, 
 sought safety in flight, but barely a fourth part h of their great 
 number escaped. 
 
 a Hispanus. b Text 23. 5. c Text 21. 3. d Text 23. 7. 'Text 
 20. 3. f Ex. i. b. *Use abl. abs. h =s/rom so great a multitude. 
 
 CHAPTERS 27-29 
 
 14. " a Although winter a was now near at hand, Caesar determined 
 to lead a force b against the Morini and Menapii, for they were now 
 
 a Was near at hand, one word. b In with ace.
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 77 
 
 the only peoples of all Gaul l84 which had neglected to send envoys 
 to him about peace. c Upon his arrival they d withdrew with all 
 their possessions into the woods and swamps, l85 because they were 
 afraid 195 that, 23 'if they ^should meet e him I10 in battle, the war would 
 be speedily brought to an end. Caesar, however, ordered his men f 
 to cut down the woods, and I28 within a few days such a great space 
 had been cleared >96 that the Romans could capture g part of the 
 baggage of the enemy. But the work ^had to be given up, owing 
 to long-continued rains, and Caesar led his army away into winter- 
 quarters. 
 
 c Text 23. 4. d W ithdrew with = betook themselves and. e = con- 
 tend with. { Omit. g Text 24. 3 ( 1 15). 
 
 Caesar, Gallic War 
 
 BOOK IV 
 
 CHAPTERS 1-2 
 
 15. The Suevi, who forced* the Usipetes and Tencteri to cross 
 the Rhine, are the 7 most warlike of the German tribes b . I8s Since 
 they live chiefly Io8 on the milk and flesh of their flocks, they are 
 c large and strong. They are d capable of great endurance also, 
 for 274 they allow no wine nor other things which weaken human 
 strength to be brought e into their country. f In fact, traders visit 
 them rather I88 to buy* what they have captured in war than to sell 
 them anything. Their horses, though small, are I96 so well trained 
 that in time of battle they remain h quiet where they are left. 
 
 Note how the important words come early in the sentence e. g., in 
 chap. 2 : mercatoribus, iumentis, vinum. See 287. 
 
 a Use cogo with infin. ( 193). b Note Caesar's expression. c Text 
 i. 9. and see 117. d Text 2. 2, and see 65. "Omit into their 
 country. The verb is enough. f Use vero ( 270.) K Emo. h Note 
 Caesar's expression.
 
 78 
 
 CHAPTERS 3-4 
 
 16. a On almost every side the country about the Suevi is unin- 
 habited, for 2 " 4 they have driven out all the tribes ''except the Ubii. 
 The Usipetes and Tencteri, who c held their ground against the 
 Suevi r - 8 for many years, were at last driven I37 from their territories, 
 and arrived I37 at the Rhine in d 55 B.C. Frightened at their ap- 
 proach, the Menapii, who had lived on both banks, crossed the 
 river and e . removed all their boats. By this means and by station- 
 ing pickets along the shore they prevented the Ubii I94 from cross- 
 ing. But the Ubii, pretending to return to their own country, 
 marched back f by night, and g by an unexpected attack crushed the 
 Menapii, who had recrossed the river. 
 
 a Omnes fere agri. b Abl. abs. : Ubiis exceptis. c Held their 
 
 ground vim sustinuerunt, etc. See text. d See text i. i, and read 
 
 132. c Ex. i. b. f Noctu. s By an unexpected attack, etc., note 
 the Latin expression, text 4. 5. 
 
 CHAPTERS 5-7 
 
 17. ^When Caesar learned 22I that the Germans had crossed the 
 Rhine, he thought ^'that he 95 ought not to trust the Gauls'* 9 , for he 
 feared their a fickle character. They are in the habit of stopping 
 travellers even 1 against their will and questioning them, and they 
 often b follow the lead of the vaguest rumors 87 . As Caesar sus- 
 pected, they had already invited the Germans 'to leave the Rhine 
 205 when he reached his army. 2 4 While he was on the march, Ger- 
 man envoys came to him c to ask ^why' 1 he had determined to 
 make war upon them. 2 " " If," said they, " the Romans give us lands, 
 we can be useful friends, but we do not e refuse """to fight, for we 
 yield only to the Suevi 87 , for whom 92 not even the gods are a match." 
 
 a One word. ^Follow the lead of, one word. Use a relative 
 clause of purpose ( 188). d Why = cur, qua re, etc. e Text 7. 3. 
 
 CHAPTERS 8-10 
 
 18. ^When the German envoys asked ' Caesar ;G to allow b them 
 193 to settle in Gaul, he refused, but told them "'that they might go 
 
 a Use peto ( 190). ''Patior.
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, 'BOOK IV 79 
 
 among the Ubii, who were unable alone c to defend their country 
 from the Suevi. The envoys promised d to return in three days and 
 five their reply. Caesar was aware 22I that they desired delay be- 
 cause most of their cavalry had gone on a plundering expedition 
 across the river Meuse. "This is a stream which rises in the Vosges 
 mountains and enters the Rhine about " 6 eighty miles from the sea. 
 The Rhine itself rises in the country of the Helvetii, and, after 
 flowing through the countries of many peoples, empties into the 
 sea by many mouths. 
 
 c Solus. d Polliceor, cf. 227. e This is a stream which = ivhich 
 
 stream. 
 
 CHAPTERS n-12 
 
 19. The German envoys earnestly 55 asked Caesar for a truce 
 a that they might have an opportunity to send ambassadors to the 
 Ubii. For they said that they would b avail themselves of Caesar's 
 offer" 5 in case the Ubii would ratify it for them. Caesar promised 
 not to advance more than four miles 105 , 2 ' 8 although he saw 22I that 
 they were delaying I8s because their cavalry had not returned. He 
 likewise sent orders to his cavalry not to fight until he himself came 
 up. But the Germans, ll in spite of the truce, made so fierce an at- 
 tack on Caesar's cavalry I96 that they drove them back in confusion 
 'with a loss of seventy-four men. 
 
 Note the long period at the beginning of chap. 12. See 296. 
 
 "Read 221 foot-note. h Avail themselves of use. c Text 11.3. 
 d / spite of= contra. e With a loss, etc., use abl. abs. 
 
 CHAPTERS 13-14 
 
 20. ^ After the Germans had attacked our cavalry so treacher- 
 ously it seemed folly 69 to "pay any further attention to their offers. 
 Caesar thought he 95 ought to attack their camp ''at once before 
 their cavalry could return. Early the next morning all the chief 
 
 1 /'//)' iiny further attention, etc. = listen to them longer. Cf. 235. 
 ''Kx. 8. g. c Priusquam, cf. 209 and 210.
 
 8o EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 men of the Germans came to him to excuse the attack of the previ- 
 ous day. But Caesar arrested them and d advanced rapidly against 
 the German camp. His men burst into the camp before the Ger- 
 mans, confused by their sudden attack, could e make up their minds 
 220 whether it was better to sally forth against them or defend the 
 camp. 
 
 d Ex. i. b. e Make up their minds decide. 
 
 CHAPTERS 15-16 
 
 21. 2l8 Notwithstanding the fact that he had defeated the Germans 
 with heavy loss and a captured their camp, it seemed expedient 15 to 
 Caesar to follow the fugitives across the Rhine. He was brought 
 to this decision by several considerations' 1 . In the first 6 place, the 
 Sugambri had refused to surrender to him the fugitives who had 
 found refuge with them, saying that the Romans had no power 
 across the Rhine. Then 6 the Ubii were earnestly asking his aid. 
 185 because, as they said, the Suevi were constantly attacking them. 
 Finally, 6 he wished to inspire the Germans with fear for 97 their own 
 country and thus to f prevent them from crossing into Gaul. 
 
 "Ex. 12. e. Cf. 127. b Seemed expedient to C. = C. decided. 
 
 c Fugitives = those -who had fled, cf. 302. d Note the simplicity of 
 
 the Latin, text 16. i. Cf. also 296. e First, secondly, thirdly, etc., 
 
 may be rendered by primum, deinde, turn, postremo or ad extremum. 
 f See text 4. 3. 
 
 CHAPTER 17 
 
 22. l88 In order to a inspire the Germans with fear for their own 
 country and respect for the Romans, who, they thought, would not 
 dare 224 to cross the Rhine, Caesar decided to build a bridge. The 
 structure rested b on piles driven obliquely into the bed of the river 
 in such a way I96 that they supported easily the great strength of the 
 current. It was feared that the Germans might send down trunks 
 
 a = in order that the Germans might fear . . . and respect (vereor), etc. 
 See text 16. i. ^ Rested = was supported by. c It was feared =. 
 
 theyfeared(% 309).
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 8 1 
 
 of trees against the bridge, d and in order to prevent these from in- 
 juring it, other piles were driven a short distance" 6 above. In this 
 way a bridge fourteen hundred feet long 66 and forty feet wide 66 was 
 completed I28 within ten days. 
 
 d = which that they might, etc. 
 
 CHAPTERS 18-19 
 
 23. Having completed the bridge in a few days, Caesar led his 
 army across into Germany. The Germans, dismayed at his ap- 
 proach, sent envoys a from all sides to ask for peace. The Su- 
 gambri, however, with whom the fugitive Germans had found refuge, 
 had made ready for flight from the time when the bridge I52 began 
 to be built, and now b were safely hidden in the forests. The Suevi, 
 as Caesar was informed by the Ubii, into whose territory he had 
 marched, had assembled in one spot in order to fight it out with 
 the Romans. But Caesar 304 , having now accomplished all the ob- 
 jects for which he had crossed into Germany, decided to withdraw 
 into' Gaul. 
 
 *From all sides = undique. b Now, not nunc, which is used of 
 
 time actually present. 
 
 CHAPTERS 20-21 
 
 24. Caesar decided to invade Britain 2I before winter should come 
 on, in order to prevent 3 the Britons I94 from assisting the Gauls. He 
 thought it would be of advantage" also 5 to learn '""how large the 
 island was and what tribes inhabited it, for 274 it was almost wholly 
 unknown. c Being unable to gain any information from the traders, 
 he sent Volusenus ahead with one ship d on a reconnoitering expe- 
 dition. Meanwhile, e since little of the summer remained, he or- 
 dered his fleet to assemble as soon as possible on the coast of the 
 Morini, opposite Britain. This was in the autumn f of the year 
 55 B -C. 
 
 "Text 4. 3. b Quoque, cf. 266. c Ex. 2. c. d Ad explo- 
 
 randum. c Abl. abs., cf. 126. ' Autumnus. 
 
 6
 
 82 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 CHAPTERS 22-23 
 
 25. ^"While Volusenus was reconnoitering the shores of Britain, 
 Caesar made ready his ships, and ^as soon as Volusenus arrived 
 he hastened to embark 1 ' upon them two legions together with cav- 
 alry. Setting sail about midnight 1 ' with a favorable breeze, he 
 reached Britain about nine 134 o'clock the next morning. But the 
 shores were so steep and the enemy so numerous that he did not 
 at first venture to land. c After waiting several hours ^ until his 
 cavalry should come up, he set sail at length to a more favorable 
 landing d about I36 seven miles distant. Even 26 " then he did not 267 at 
 first allow his men to disembark, because the cavalry had not yet 
 arrived. 
 
 in naves ( 143). b '=.middle #/"( 10) the 
 
 night. c Render by a clause with cum. d Note Caesar's expres- 
 
 sion. 
 
 CHAPTERS 24-25 
 
 26. When the Romans reached Britain, the natives, occupying 
 the shore, prevented them from disembarking. For a while the Ro- 
 mans ''had to fight standing in the waves, the barbarians were able 
 to hurl their javelins from dry land. ^As soon as Caesar noticed 
 the dismay of his men at the difficulties of landing, he ordered some 
 of his galleys to row c to a position on the flank of the enemy 
 182 whence they could worry 1 ' them by arrows and missiles. This 
 caused them to retreat slightly, but even then the Romans "might 
 not have landed had not the standard-bearer 302 of the tenth legion 
 boldly leaped from his ship and led the way towards the shore. 
 
 a While, not dum. b = Aad to fight while they stand, cf. 204. 
 
 c To a position, omit. d Worry = perturbo (text 14. 2), or lacesso 
 
 (text 1 1. 6). *=perhaps (fortasse) would not, etc. ( 215). 
 
 CHAPTERS 26-27 
 
 27. As soon as the eagle-bearer leaped into the waves, the soldiers 
 followed, and a fierce conflict ensued. The barbarians, outnumber-
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 8^ 
 
 \J 
 
 ing the Romans, * 57 would attack them one by one, and thus the 
 Romans a were at a great disadvantage. , When, however, the Ro- 
 mans had obtained firm footing, they 'speedily put the enemy to 
 flight. After the battle envoys came to Caesar to seek peace and 
 to bring to him Commius, who had been sent to them as an ambas- 
 sador, but b had been thrown into chains. Although they had at- 
 tacked him without provocation, Caesar decided to pardon them 
 and ordered them c to furnish hostages. 
 
 a Were at a great disadvantage = this was for a great disadvantage to 
 the Romans ( 99). b Ex. 12. e. c To furnish, omit. 
 
 CHAPTERS 28-29 
 
 28. Though Caesar reached Britain safely with his infantry and 
 defeated the enemy, yet he was unable to pursue them, because his 
 cavalry had been ''too 5 slow in starting. When b at last they ap- 
 proached the island, they were prevented from landing by a violent 
 storm which drove some back to the continent and others to the 
 westward coast of the island. On the same night many of Caesar's 
 ships were wrecked by the storm and tne high tide which occurs 
 at the time of full moon. The Romans were greatly dismayed at 
 these misfortunes c , for they had nothing with which to repair the 
 ships, and not enough provisions 70 to winter in Britain. 
 
 a Too slow, etc., see text 23. 2. b At last = tandem. c Res (cf. 
 
 299, note). 
 
 CHAPTERS 30-31 
 
 29. 2 3 As soon as the Britons discovered that Caesar's ships had 
 been wrecked, they conspired l88 to destroy" the Romans, I25 though 
 peace had been made. They thought that they could do this b by 
 cutting them off from provisions and prolonging matters until win- 
 ter. And so they ceased to send in hostages. This caused Cnesar 
 197 to suspect their plans and make ready to meet them. His sol- 
 
 "Opprimo. b By cutting, etc., express by a condition, cf. 229.
 
 84 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 diers were busy gathering corn into the camp and repairing the 
 ships by means of the tackle of those ships which had been wholly 
 ruined. The soldiers worked so eagerly that they soon d made most 
 of the ships suitable for sailing. 
 
 c Omit. Render the idea by the imperfect ( 160). d Not mox, which 
 is used, as a rule, with future tenses. 
 
 CHAPTERS 32-34 
 
 30. While the seventh legion was engaged in foraging not far 
 from the camp, it was treacherously 3 attacked by the barbarians, 
 who 2IS would have destroyed it entirely had not Caesar come to 
 its assistance with the cohorts which b happened to be on guard. 
 When Caesar came up he found the legion in disorder and surrounded 
 by c clouds of cavalry and war-chariots. They drive these chariots 
 among the ranks of the enemy in order to throw them into con- 
 fusion, and then, descending 11 , fight on foot. The soldiers were so 
 much in disorder that Caesar perceived it *" was not a good oppor- 
 tunity for battle, and gradually 6 withdrew his forces to the camp. 
 
 a Text 13. 1. b = by chance (forte) were. c Do not render literally. 
 d Render by a clause. e Text 30. 3. 
 
 CHAPTERS 34-36 
 
 31. Encouraged by their attack 123 on the seventh legion, the 
 Britons determined to assault the camp, hoping 3 that they would 
 free Britain forever, ^if they could crush the few Romans who had 
 come with Caesar. But although they assembled from all sides ''in 
 large numbers, the Romans easily routed them. c As usual they 
 sent envoys immediately to secure peace. After they had promised 
 to send hostages, Caesar thought that he ought not to delay longer 
 in Britain, because the winter was coming on and he feared to trust 
 his unseaworthy ships to the storms of autumn. 
 
 * Render by a clause. b Render by an adjective. " c As ustrt= 
 ex consuetudine.
 
 NEPOS, ALCIBIADES 85 
 
 CHAPTERS 37-38 
 
 32. The Morini, to whose coast Caesar returned from Britain, 
 "acted with great treachery; for, when two transports were unable 
 to land with the others, b but were driven several miles by the wind, 
 they surrounded the soldiers, as soon as they had disembarked, 
 and commanded them to surrender on pain of death. But they re- 
 sisted the attack of the enemy for several hours ^ until the cavalry 
 came to their assistance. Labienus then marched against them and 
 d took speedy vengeance. The Menapii, too 266 , who had e neglected 
 to send envoys to him before 209 he set sail for Britain, were hum- 
 bled f by two of his lieutenants. Their territories were laid waste 
 and their buildings burned. 
 
 a Acted with = used, cf. 115. b Use a participle. c Severa/= 
 plures. d Use ulciscor (text 19. 4). e Text 22. 5. f Text 3. 4. 
 
 Nepos, Alcibiades 
 
 For the Latin text, see pages 151 ff. For abbreviations, see page 70. 
 
 CHAPTERS 1-2 
 
 33. Alcibiades was the most remarkable of the Athenians, both 
 as regards virtues 106 and faults 106 . He was a man a of great beauty 
 and eloquence, and was very wealthy b as well. And yet 270 he was 
 31 at the same time a given to luxury and a lacked self-control, I96 so 
 that he seemed 168 to be a man c of strangely diverse character. He 
 309 was intrusted by Pericles, whose step-son he was, to Socrates 
 I88 to be educated. And Socrates was thought d to be the wisest of 
 men. e ln fact, nature seemed to be trying in his case f how many 
 blessings she could 168 confer*. 
 
 Note how the adjectives of chapter i may be represented by phrases 
 in English. 
 
 a Use adjectives, cf. text. b As /<?//= also, cf. 266. c = of char- 
 acter, strange (mirabilis) and diverse. d Text 3. 4. e Use vero, 
 270. f How tnany = quot. See 220. e =give.
 
 86 KXKKC1SES BASED ON 
 
 CHAPTER 3 
 
 34. ^' 4 While the Peloponnesian war ; 'was going on, Alcibiades 
 persuaded the Athenians 87 I9 to declare 168 war on the Syracusans 9 ' 
 and to elect him 54 general 54 with two colleagues. The expedition 
 was ready 25 ~to sail b ^when all 72 but one of the small busts of 
 Hermes which were in the city 140 of Athens 62 were thrown down 
 in a single night 128 . l86 Since this could not have happened without 
 the connivance of many people, there were persons I82 who believed' 68 
 221 thai c some one was "conspiring against the state. They sus- 
 pected Alcibiades, because no one was equal to him 92 in influence 106 , 
 and because he celebrated mystic rites in his own house. For this 
 is considered impious by the Athenians 108 . 
 
 a Was going on, use passive of gero. b Navigo. c Read 221 
 
 and foot-note. d Conspire again st = coniuro contra. 
 
 CHAPTER 4 
 
 35. ^When the enemies of Alcibiades I6s were about to accuse 
 him of sacrilege 3 , he wished the trial to take place b while he was 
 present. But they decided to wait ** until he had set sail, I88 so that 
 they might injure' 68 him 87 in his absence. And so, ^ after he had 
 reached Sicily, a messenger came to him from Athens c with direc- 
 tions that he d must return 257 to plead his case. But he fled to 
 Thurii, in Italy. ^When the Athenians learned this they con- 
 demned him to death 82 and forced the Eumolpid priests to pro- 
 nounce a curse upon him. He then fled to Sparta, and persuaded 
 the Spartans 87 I9 to make an alliance with the Persian king and to 
 fortify Decelea in Attica. 
 
 Observe in this chapter the variety in the constructions of place, cf. 
 137, 138, 141- 
 
 *Note that Nepos expresses this by a causal clause, cf. 185. b Con- 
 dense. See text 4. i. c With directions that,c>m\t. This is rendered 
 by the indirect discourse. d Must return = must be returned by hint, 
 cf. 260.
 
 NKPOS, ALCIBIADES 87 
 
 CHAPTER 5 
 
 36. "*' ia Although Alcibiades was friendly to the Spartans'^', they 
 feared him and planned to put him to death. But he was so keen 
 that he discovered their purpose, and fled I4 'to Tissaphernes in 
 Asia. Meanwhile the Athenians were being defeated 144 on land 
 and sea, and Alcibiades perceived that a he had a good opportunity 
 h o being restored to his native land. This was brought about 
 I09 through the agency of Thrasybulus. 267 And yet he did not at 
 once c return to Athens, but was elected in his absence 54 one 7 'of 
 the generals. Immediately the Athenians were everywhere* 1 vic- 
 torious, and Alcibiades, " 5 after conquering many cities, returned 
 with his colleagues to Athens laden with booty" 3 . 
 
 a = there was to himself a good opportunity, cf . 94. *> = of return- 
 ing. c Ex. 8. g. d Omnibus locis ( 144). 
 
 CHAPTERS 6-7 
 
 37. ^As soon as Alcibiades reached the Piraeus all the people of 
 Athens came down to meet him 92 , 125 taking no notice of his col- 
 leagues. For they attributed to him alone all their victories, and 
 no longer considered the loss of their army in Sicily as his fault. 
 When they heard him speak 248 about his misfortunes they a could 
 not refrain from tears. And so ''once more he became famous, but 
 his great reputation c injured him, for the Athenians believed that 
 he could do anything, and, when he had attacked Cyme unsuccess- 
 fully, they thought that he had been bribed by the Persian 11 king. 
 The result was I9S that his office was taken from him 98 , and he fled 
 to Thrace. 
 
 a Could not refrain = they could not but that they wept ( 2OO). b Once 
 c Text 7. 3 (cf. 99). d Text 4. 7. 
 
 CHAPTER 8 
 
 38. Although Alcibiades was now a an exile b for the second time, 
 yet he still '"continued to love his country. When the fleets of the 
 
 "Ex. 23. b. b Ex. 37. b.
 
 88 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 Athenians and Spartans were stationed on the Hellespont he '^at- 
 tempted to persuade the Athenian admiral d I9 to employ a plan of 
 his 27 against the Spartans I82 by which they l68 should be forced 
 2;i either to fight or to seek peace. But the admiral, Philocles, re- 
 fused to listen to him. "For," 274 he said **, 2 " " if I follow his ad- 
 vice I shall get none of the credit." He even refused to move his 
 camp I37 from the neighborhood of Lysander. This proved the 
 "ruin of the Athenians, for Lysander, waiting 6 until the Athenians 
 were nearly all on shore, attacked their fleet and 310 ended the war. 
 
 c Hellespontus. d Note that the Latin employs a general term = 
 
 commander or officer ( 299). e Not a participle in Latin. 
 
 CHAPTERS 9-10 
 
 39. After the defeat of the Athenians the Spartans were so pow- 
 erful that Alcibiades was a not safe even in Thrace 137 . For 274 the 
 Thracians b robbed him 98 of all his money and forced him to flee 
 to Asia 137 . There d Pharnabazus became so friendly to him 92 I96 that 
 he began to hope ^he could gain the friendship of King Darius 
 also 266 . He planned" to go to him and reveal the conspiracy of 
 his 35 brother Cyrus against him. 3 At that very time the thirty 
 tyrants, who were ruling' 53 at Athens 138 , sent word to Lysander to 
 kill Alcibiades. They said that ^unless he were put out of the 
 way none of the arrangements of the Spartans at Athens would 
 endure. 
 
 *Not . . . even, cf. Ex. 10. f. b Robbed him of . . . money '= took away 
 for htm . . . money ( 98). c Ex. 4. h. d lbi. 'Consilium capio, 
 with gerund or gerundive ( 253). 
 
 CHAPTERS lo-ii 
 
 40. ^As soon as Lysander received the message of the thirty 
 tyrants he persuaded Pharnabazus that 3 the king's power ^ would 
 be diminished unless Alcibiades should be killed. And so the 
 satrap b , I25 proving false to his friendship with Alcibiades, sent a 
 
 a Analyze that carefully, cf. 221, foot-note. b Satrap, not neces- 
 
 sarily a noun in Latin. Read 303.
 
 NEPOS, HANNIBAL 89 
 
 band of barbarians I88 to murder him. l86 Not daring to attack him 
 openly, they set fire to the hut in which he was sleeping, and, 
 though he escaped the flames, slew him with missiles from a dis- 
 tance. His head 287 they carried to Pharnabazus. 
 
 At the time of his death Alcibiades was forty years of age. He 
 was a man of most c versatile character, for he successfully imitated 
 all peoples at their own pursuits 106 . This caused him I97 to be ad- 
 mired and popular among all men. 
 
 c Versatile character, cf. text 1. 4. 
 
 Nepos, Hannibal 
 
 CHAPTERS 1-2 
 
 41. Nobody will deny 221 that Hannibal, ^the famous leader of the 
 Carthaginians, excelled all the Roman generals who a carried on the 
 war against him. Although he was in Italy fifteen years, he was 
 never defeated by the Romans "in battle, and, 2I5 if he had not been 
 handicapped 5 by the jealousy of his 293 countrymen at home, he 
 would perhaps have been victorious. His hatred 6l forthe Romans, 
 which he cherished throughout his long life, d he had, as it were, in- 
 herited from his father, Hamilcar. When he 22 was a mere lad 6s nine 
 years old, his father 20 decided e to make war upon Spain, and as he 
 was about to leave Carthage 138 , he asked his son 22 """if he would 
 like to go with 295 him 27 . Hannibal did not hesitate ""to accept the 
 offer, and swore always 227 to be a foe of the Romans ^if his father 
 would take f him. 
 
 a = waged war with him ( 226). * ^weakened. Fortasse. 
 
 d Use a passive construction with hatred as the subject. e Ex. 5. a. 
 171). 
 
 CHAPTERS 3-4 
 
 42. Hamilcar had gone ' 37 to Spain 253 for the sake of raising an 
 army there I88 with which to make war upon the Romans in Italy.
 
 9 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 Is8 Within a few years, however, he was killed, and 3 Hasdrubal, his 
 son-in-law b , was made commander 54 in his place. For the next eight 
 years Hannibal was at the head of all the cavalry 9 ', and became so 
 c popular with the soldiers I96 that after Hasdrubal's death the chief 
 command was conferred upon him. d In three years he subdued 
 almost all the tribes of Spain, and, 244 having taken Saguntum by 
 storm, decided to set out the next year I37 for Italy. When he had 
 arrived there 6 , he defeated the Romans twice f in the neighborhood 
 of the Po, and then, crossing*-' the Apennines in the next year, en- 
 trapped and a destroyed a large army near Trasumenus and slew the 
 consul. 
 
 a Ex. i. b. b Gener. c = beloved by. d Cf. 22 and 27, end. 
 
 e Use quo = whither ; for position, cf. 288 and 293. f Bis. s = hav- 
 ing crossed ( 244). 
 
 CHAPTERS 5-6 
 
 43. Hannibal afterwards marched into Apulia, and in the next 
 year I3 at the battle 63 of Cannae he routed the armies of both 3 con- 
 suls, and killed about fifty thousand men 73 . Although the Romans 
 feared I9S that he would immediately attack 1 " the city, they did not 
 c despair of their 293 fortunes' 1 , but e made all preparations l8R to oppose 
 a strong force to him 23 'if he should come. But Hannibal 304 was 
 unwilling to lead his army I38 to Rome, for he knew that it was so 
 strongly f fortified I96 that he could not take it by storm; and so at 
 the g end of summer he went into winter-quarters I4I at Capua. Al- 
 though Hannibal remained 11 in Italy several years and was uncon- 
 quered in battle, he was 'at last recalled to Africa, and, wonderful 
 262 to relate, was defeated lo8 by Scipio I39 near Zama. 
 
 * = eac/i (text 4. 4). b Text /?. G. 3. 21. 2. c Ex. 2. h. 
 
 d = things ( 299). c = prepared '(text 7>. G. 3. 9. 3) all things. f Om it. 
 R Text B. G. 3. 28. i ( 125). h Text B. G. 4. i. 5. j Postremo. 
 
 CHAPTER 7 
 
 44. Although Hannibal had been defeated by Scipio I3 in the 
 battle 63 of Zama, he nevertheless gathered 8 as large a force as pos- 
 sible I38 at Hadrumetum, and 2 ' 5 would have engaged with the Ro-
 
 NEPOS, HANNIBAL 91 
 
 mans a a second time if b terms of peace had not been agreed. upon. 
 '"Shortly afterwards the Romans "managed to h.ive him called 
 home' Jti ; for, when ambassadors had come to Rome from Carthage 
 188 to thank the Roman senate 8 '" and people t I85 for having made 
 peace, and at the same time to request 56 of them I9 that they would 
 restore the Carthaginians whom they held as prisoners, d they were 
 told that, ^if they wished to recover 6 their prisoners', Hannibal 
 166 must first be recalled from the army. ^Upon his return to Car- 
 thage he was elected king 54 ; for, as the Romans annually chose 
 two consuls, so the Carthaginians chose two kings. 
 
 "Text 5. 3. b Text 6. 2. c effected that he ( 22) should be 
 
 called ( 197). d = // was replied to them. e Text B. G. 3. 8. 2. 
 
 f Omit. 
 
 CHAPTERS 8-9 
 
 45. l86 Since the Romans were afraid ' 95 that, ^'if they ^should 
 allow Hannibal a I93 to remain longer b in Carthage, he would soon c 
 persuade his 87 countrymen' 1 e to go to war again f , they sent am- 
 bassadors I88 to demand I9 that he' 9 should be surrendered to them 27 . 
 This undoubtedly '-'' 5 would have been done if he had not fled to 
 Syria to King Antiochus. ' 3I After a few years, when the king 15 had 
 been defeated by the Romans on land and sea, Hannibal 15 , perceiv- 
 ing 8 that he was again in danger, went away secretly 1 ' to Crete. He 
 had a great amount of money with him, and, since he feared that 
 the Cretans would try 191 to get " 5 it into their possession, he 'made 
 a pretence of depositing it in the temple of Diana, which was there- 
 after j carefully' 21 watched by the Cretans, l88 that he might not carry 
 off his property 125 without their knowing it. 
 
 a Make Hannibal subject of the that clause, substituting a pronoun 
 (22) here. b Text B. G. 3.9. 5. Ex. n. e. d Omit. e = /<? 
 itndertake(\ 190). f Ex. 44. a. *Cf. Ex. 42. g. h Text 7. 6. 
 
 ' pretended that ( 221) he was depositing. j Delude. 
 
 CHAPTER 10 
 
 46. a As a matter of fact, the Cretans were keeping guard over 
 b nothing but lead; for Hannibal had filled several jars with this 
 
 a Re vera. ! Nihil nisi.
 
 92 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 metal c , and, covering' 1 the tops 10 with silver and gold, had deposited 
 them in the temple, while 6 his money he concealed' at home in 
 brazen statues which he I57 was accustomed to carry about with him. 
 131 A little later he went to Pontus, where he showed 2 that he was 
 no less an enemy of Rome in Asia than in Italy. For he incited 
 the king against the Romans, and persuaded many 87 of the neigh- 
 boring nations h to come to his assistance. Eumenes 64 of Perga- 
 mon, however, being a warm friend of the Romans, began 1 to wage 
 war with the other kings both by land and by sea. He especially 
 desired to capture Hannibal and to hand him over to the Romans. 
 
 c Omit. d Cf. Ex. 42. g. e Autem ( 270). f Text B. G. 
 
 4. 1 8. 4. g Text B. G. 4. 1 1. 3. h = that they should be ( 190) for 
 
 an aid to him ( 99). 'Text 2. 4. -"Trado ( 193). 
 
 CHAPTER ii 
 
 47. When Hannibal saw that owing to the alliance of the Ro- 
 mans Eumenes could not be crushed a by force of arms, he b adopted 
 the following 16 plan. 244 Having filled a great number of earthen 
 vessels " a with poisonous serpents, he ordered 8 as many as possible 
 to be put on board each 4 ' ship 143 , in order that his men might de- 
 fend themselves with these 23I if they ^should be hard pressed Io8 by 
 the enemy. a 3 As soon as the battle began, the Bithynians, in ac- 
 cordance with Hannibal's orders, c all together directed their attack 
 upon the king's ship, and 2I5 would soon d have captured it if it had 
 not fled for safety. But the other ships of the royal fleet l6o were 
 getting the better of their 33 opponents * 7 until e at last the earthen 
 vessels began 152 to be hurled upon them. Then, terrified Io8 by the 
 serpents, the king's forces retreated to their naval camp. 
 
 a By force of arms, one word. b Text 9. 3. C AU together, one 
 
 word. d Ex. ii. e. e Ex. 43. i. 
 
 CHAPTERS 12-13 
 
 48. "Not long after this it was reported to the senate b at Rome 
 that Hannibal was living in Bithynia, and since nobody doubted 
 
 a Non ita multo ( 1 16) post. b Express by an adj. (cf. 64).
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 93 
 
 "'that the state would always be in danger I25 so long as he lived, 
 ambassadors were sent I88 to request Prusias 55 I9 to surrender him 19 
 to them 27 at once. Prusias 304 c replied that he would not do what 
 was 225 contrary to the rights of hospitality, but that they d might 
 arrest him if they could find him. Accordingly they hastened 6 to 
 the strong castle in which they had heard that he was living at 
 that time, and hoped ^to seize all the avenues of escape 2I before 
 he should know that they were looking for him. But he f was at 
 once informed by a faithful slave that the house had been sur- 
 rounded by armed men ; and so, since he feared I95 that, 231 if they 
 caught him, they would put him to death, he did not hesitate g to 
 end his own life with poison. 
 
 c == denied that he would do. d Licet ( 193) may be used, or, 
 
 assuming that the direct discourse contained an impv., Arrest him if 
 you can find him, the subjv. (222). e Text B. G. 3. 19. i. f Was 
 
 informed, express by a ptc. ( 310). *Mihi mortem conscisco ( 202). 
 
 Cicero, Manilian Law 
 
 For the Latin text, see pages 164 ft. 
 For abbreviations, see page 70. 
 
 In the exercises based on Cicero, all references to the Latin text (as " text 23 ") 
 apply to sections, not to chapters. 
 
 CHAPTER i 
 
 49. 2l8 Although Cicero was I38 forty years old ^when he defended 
 the cause of Pompey, he had not before attained to a the dignity of 
 speaking from the Rostra b . He had, however, for fifteen years c de- 
 voted himself so uprightly and faithfully to private suits that he 
 was elected d praetor. 'From this time he thought "'that he ought 
 to employ his influence" 5 and power of speaking among those who 
 225 had given him so distinguished an honor. He said that he was 
 
 (is, 23) dignity that he spoke ( 196). b Neuter pi. 
 
 1 Versor in with abl. ''Creo ( 54). e lnde.
 
 94 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 especially glad because he was to speak about the unparalleled merit 
 of Gnaeus Pompey; for in such a cause language could not fail any 
 man. 
 
 CHAPTER 2 
 
 50. Two powerful monarchs, Mithridates and Tigranes, think- 
 ing 186 that an opportunity was offered them of getting possession 
 of Asia, were making war upon tributaries and allies of the Ro- 
 mans. This war was "particularly oppressive to b members of the 
 equestrian order, many of whom had large properties invested in 
 managing the taxes there. But the largest and surest revenues of 
 the Roman people, c without which Cicero declares there would be 
 neither the means of supporting war nor the requisites of peace, 
 were also at stake, so that all the citizens were fired with enthu- 
 siasm d for prosecuting the war. As commander for this war all 
 men, both citizens and allies, desired Gnaeus Pompey. 
 
 a Express by superlative. b One word. c = which having 
 
 been lost. d Genitive. e Omit. 
 
 CHAPTERS 3-4 
 
 51. Cicero said in his a speech for b Pompey that c it was a deep 
 stain on the name of the Roman people because Mithridates, who 
 131 twenty-two years before on a single day and by a single message 
 had ordered so many citizens of Rome to be massacred, ^had as 
 yet suffered no punishment worthy of his crime 1 ". 2l8 Although two 
 brave commanders had celebrated triumphs at Rome cl for victories 
 over him, he still "remained on his throne, and, more f covetous of 
 glory than all other kings, he I59 had long been building fleets and 
 collecting powerful armies for the purpose of contesting the su- 
 premacy & with the Romans by land and sea. He even sent envoys 
 to Spain, where Sertorius h was conducting a vigorous campaign 
 against Rome. 
 
 *= <ff>eer/i delivered (habita) for Pompey; b Pro (^ 263). c = a 
 
 stain was deeply seated. d = concerning him. f Remained un 
 
 his throne, one word. f More than = beyond. * = about the suprem- 
 acy. ^ = was waging war vigorously (text />'. G. 3. 21. i) with the 
 Romans ( 300) .
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 95 
 
 CHAPTER 5 
 
 52. Your ancestors, fellow-citizens, I28 eighty years ago 9 , ""when 
 they heard that their ambassadors had been wrongfully treated ' 38 at 
 Corinth, wished that great and noble city a to be utterly destroyed. 
 h What, then, ought your feelings to be 2 s when you remember that 
 you are allowing that proud king to go unpunished who has, tor- 
 tured and ^put to death at one time so many thousands of your 
 fellow-citizens? Moreover, the safety of your allies and friends is 
 imperiled d by this same king, who, 2l8 although he has "several times 
 been defeated by your generals, is threatening all Asia 87 . The only 
 man I84 who is able to check his attacks is, they believe, Gnaeus 
 Pompey. To him, therefore, they ask you at once I9 to intrust 
 their welfare. 
 
 a One word. b = 0/ r what mind ( 117) ought you to be. c Use 
 
 ptc. agreeing with the obj. (cf. 310). d = called into danger. e AH- 
 quotiens. 
 
 CHAPTER 6 
 
 53. ^ After the Romans had conquered Philip in Greece, they 
 sent an army into Asia I88 to check Antiochus. I31 Forty years after- 
 wards they carried on war for three years with the Carthaginians in 
 Africa. All 72 of these wars they undertook* for the sake of allies, 
 although they had not themselves been provoked by any wrongs. 
 It was fitting, therefore, 2ir that Cicero should ask his fellow-citizens 
 ^with what feelings 121 they could 1 '" 1 allow Mithridates I93 to be un- 
 punished, >86 since he 2 - had not only ''made war upon their allies 
 and tributaries, but had even put many of their own citizens to 
 death. Their largest revenues were also endangered , for Asia 
 was at that time the richest and most productive of all the Roman 
 provinces. 
 
 ^Text B. G. 3. 19. 6. "Text 4. c Ex. 52. d. 
 
 CHAPTER 7 
 
 54. Not only were the glory of the commonwealth, the welfare of 
 the allies, and 268 the greatest public revenues at htake a I3 in the 
 
 'Text 6.
 
 96 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 Asiatic war, but large properties had been invested by many Ro- 
 mans in Asia, which would all be lost 2I4 if Pompey were not sent 
 as soon as possible to check the attacks of the king. l86 Inasmuch 
 as the misfortunes of a great number of citizens could not be sep- 
 arated from the public cause, it was ^the part of wisdom 235 to bear 
 in mind 220 what I7 'had happened at the beginning of the war; for 
 at that time ^when upon the suspension of payments in Asia credit 
 fell even in Rome, all men had been taught that great fortunes 
 could 224 not be lost in one state b without involving' 71 other states in 
 the same calamity. 
 
 b = s0 as not to involve ( 196). 
 
 CHAPTER 8 
 
 55. Although Lucullus, who had been sent to Asia I31 eight years 
 before to conduct the war with Mithridates, had not been able to 
 destroy the power of the king 19 , he had, nevertheless, accomplished 
 a so much by his persistence and his wise policy that all men be- 
 stowed upon him b such praise as is due to a brave man and a great 
 commander. The town of the Cyzicenes, which Mithridates was 
 besieging I07 with a large force thoroughly equipped, had been freed 
 101 from its extreme danger. Then, ^when he had overpowered d 
 and sunk a powerful fleet which was being sent I37 to Italy, he cap- 
 tured a great many cities of Pontus and Cappadocia, so that the 
 great 20 king, stripped I01 of the realm of his fathers, fled as a sup- 
 pliant to other nations and to other kings. 
 
 a = so great things. b =so much of praise ( 70) how much is, 
 
 etc. c = with all things. d Cf. Ex. 52. c. 
 
 CHAPTER 9 (TO 24) 
 
 56. Once on a time from that same Pontus which was the king- 
 dom of Mithridates ^the famous Medea ^is said to have fled 
 "against the will of her father with Jason. Tearing I9S that her 
 
 a Invitus ( 126). b Ex. 2. c.
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 97 
 
 father would pursue, she I27 murdered her brother and scattered his 
 limbs on the sea, I88 that her father' 9 , who c she knew would try d I93 to 
 gather the scattered bones of his son, might thus be delayed. So 
 Mithridates, when fleeing from his realm, left behind a vast quan- 
 tity of silver and gold and beautiful things, in order that, 232 while 
 the Roman soldiers were plundering c this treasure, he might escape 
 from their hands. Despairing of his fortunes 87 , he arrived f at the 
 court of Tigranes, king 64 of Armenia, who received s him kindly h 
 and promised 227 to protect' him from the Roman army. 
 
 c Subject of ind. disc, depending on knew. d Conor. e = these 
 
 things. f Ad. *Cf. Ex. 52. c. h Hospitio ( 122). 'Text 19. 
 
 CHAPTER 9 (FROM 24) 
 
 57. Lucullus pursued Mithridates into Armenia, and, 2l8 although 
 he fought 3 several successful engagements, he was unable to cap- 
 ture the king 22 , because the soldiers, affected by the remoteness of 
 the locality and by longing ^for their friends, begged an early re- 
 turn rather than a further advance. Mithridates, accordingly, was 
 able not only to return to his kingdom, but to gather a large force 
 Io8 with which I88 to renew the war; for it generally happens 198 that 
 kings, b when they are in distress, easily attract to their aid the re- 
 sources of many I82 who think that the name c of king is great and 
 holy. And so ^after he believed that his army was sufficiently 
 large, he made a successful attack upon the Romans who had re- 
 cently' 1 been victorious. 
 
 a Use ntor (text 23 ad fin.). b Use pass. ptc. c Use adj. d Nuper. 
 
 CHAPTER 10 
 
 58. After this disaster Lucullus was ordered to hand over the 
 army to Manius Glabrio. But the Romans soon perceived* that 
 2S7 to-carry on war with the most powerful monarchs and the most 
 warlike states of Asia, a general better versed 74 in military science 
 
 26.
 
 98 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 36o must be chosen. ''It was not a difficult matter to decide "'"whom 
 they should appoint, for Gnaeus Pompey "was believed by all, both 
 citizens and allies, to be the only man lS4 who could finish so great 
 and so dangerous a war. From school he had gone off at once to 
 his father's army ; when a mere youth he was himself a general-in- 
 chief : and he had been trained to a knowledge of most varied 
 kinds of warfare, not under the orders of others, but under his own 
 command. 
 
 b = nor was the deliberation difficult whom, etc. c Omit. 
 
 CHAPTER ii 
 
 59. Cicero said that language could 224 not be found worthy of the 
 merit of Pompey, for all the a good qualities of a general existed b in 
 him alone c to such a degree that all other commanders who ^had 
 fought either for d the Romans or against them were 225 not his 9 - 
 equal ; that not only many and powerful foreign nations e bore 
 testimony f to this effect, but Italy herself had s several times been 
 delivered IOI from the dangers of war Io8 by his bravery, diligence, 
 and h wise counsel; that finally all seas and all shores gave their 
 testimony, for, although for many years a war had been carried on 
 against the pirates I44 over the whole sea, 'without, however, lessen- 
 ing even-" one peril of seafaring, Pompey in a single summer had 
 brought that disgraceful and long-standing war to a close. 
 
 a =z merits. b = were ( 224). c =so great. d Ex. 51. b. 
 
 e = were witnesses. f Omit. g Use a comparative adverb. h One 
 word. 'Use a rel. clause of characteristic. j Not even, see Ex. 10. f. 
 
 CHAPTER 12 (TO 34) 
 
 60. I28 In summer for many years the whole sea had been so over- 
 run 3 " 3 with pirates that no Roman army had set out from Brun- 
 disium to Greece or Asia except in the dead of winter. No tribute 
 had been safe for the Romans, no ally had been defended, lK al- 
 
 a Text 31.
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 99 
 
 
 
 though formerly the Roman armies and Roman fleets had often 
 fought l8ii to protect not b their own homes, but the fortunes of their 
 allies. Not only had ambassadors who were coming to Rome from 
 foreign states 'fallen into the hands of the pirates, but Roman cit- 
 izens as well ; the children of a Roman magistrate had been car- 
 ried off, a Roman fleet had been captured near the mouth of the 
 Tiber, and those harbors of Italy from which Rome d drew the very 
 e breath of life had been plundered. 
 
 b Although in a purpose clause, mm should be used here, as it limits a 
 single word, not the whole clause. c = come into power. d = Romans 
 ( 300). "Express by hendiadys. 
 
 CHAPTER 12 (FROM 34) 
 
 61. 215 If the Romans had 'appointed for this war, by which Italy 
 and all the allies had been burdened for many years, a general less 
 skilled b74 in military science than Pompey, perhaps they would not 
 have been able to conquer the pirates. Indeed d , Cicero, when he 
 was urging 6 19 that Pompey should be chosen*, said that no man 
 had believed that the dangerous and long-protracted war could be 
 finished by one commander I=8 in all years or by all commanders in 
 one year. Yet Pompey, 2 3 as soon as he had been appointed, 'be- 
 fore the navigation season opened, sent out ships s to strengthen 
 and defend all the states l82 which were h under the power of Rome, 
 'and then beginning the war in the early spring, brought it to a 
 close in the middle of summer. 
 
 "Text 27. b Text28. c Ex.4i. c. d Quidem, post-positive. 
 
 e Suadeo. f =. the sea not yet seasonable for navigation. * Use a rel. 
 purpose cl. ( 188) with passive vbs. h Text 33. ' Deinde cum ( 203). 
 
 CHAPTER 13 
 
 62. Cicero asked his fellow-citizens "to consider briefly "how 
 many a good qualities of a commander existed in Gnaeus Pompey, 
 and he said that by a comparison of other generals who had been 
 
 a Ex. 59. A.
 
 100 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 117 less faithful he could most easily make them understand 197 " 7 how 
 great were PompeyV 9 justice and self-restraint. He b mentioned 
 nobody, however, by name ; c so that, 232 unless a man was willing to 
 admit that he himself 29 was not innocent, he could not be angry 
 with him d . And so when he had bidden them recollect the mis- 
 fortunes 77 ^ which many towns, not only of foreign peoples, but 
 even of Italy herself, had suffered on account of the avarice of 
 Roman generals, he e asserted that Pompey's armies had never in- 
 jured any 39 people s?{ which had once 8 been subdued. 
 
 b Mentioned by name, one word. c = so that nobody ( 196, foot- 
 
 note), unless he, etc. d For form, cf. 22 and 27 end ; for construc- 
 tion, cf. 87. e Asserted that never = denied (nego) that ever (text 
 
 34). f Express by a ptc. g Omit. 
 
 CHAPTER 14 
 
 63. 13 In the war 3 with the pirates Pompey showed 6 "'that he 
 could restrain not only himself 29 , but also his soldiers. For when 
 he had set out for Asia, he arrived in that distant land so quickly, 
 that it had to be acknowledged 95 by all that no greed had called 
 him from his purposed course for plunder, no lust for pleasure, no 
 toil for rest; and although Greece was full of statues 74 and paint- 
 ings and all other beautiful things, d even these did not delay him 
 a single day 128 . Finally, in Asia by his accessibility and mercy he 
 made all men love' 97 him no less than they had previously feared 
 him for his bravery 123 . 
 
 **=war waged with, etc. b Text 2, ad fin. c Text 38. d Ex. 10. f. 
 
 CHAPTER 15 
 
 64. 2I1 If we admit that men are influenced I96 to love or hate or 
 fear no less by fancy or rumor than by reasoning, I78 who can doubt 
 201 that Pompey I6s will accomplish more by his reputation a alone 
 than other generals could b effect by c force of arms? All nations 
 
 * = znfluetice. b A protasis, if they should try (214), is implied. 
 
 c Use hendiadys.
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW IOI 
 
 know how much the d price of corn fell ^as soon as he ''"'had been 
 appointed to carry on the war against the pirates. And, to cite but 
 one example of his exploits, when the Roman army had met dis- 
 aster in Pontus, and Tigranes was threatening the province 87 with a 
 strong force, Asia 2IS would have been lost if Pompey had not provi- 
 dentially arrived in that neighborhood and checked the armies of 
 the enemy by his mere 6 name and reputation. 
 
 d = cheapening of corn followed. e = itself. 
 
 CHAPTER 16 
 
 65. We can easily see how great was the reputation of Pompey 
 among the enemies of Rome a 2I9 if we only remember that the 
 Cretans, although there was 226 a Roman general with his army sta- 
 tioned b in their island, sent an envoy almost to the ends of the 
 earth to tell Pompey that they preferred to surrender themselves 
 and all their fortunes to him. But, l88 not to speak c at greater length 
 of his reputation, it remains for me I98 to mention his good fortune. 
 For it is not by valor alone, but also by fortune that the great ex- 
 ploits of generals are accomplished. Now' 1 , Pompey's good for- 
 tune was so remarkable that even the elements 6 seemed always to 
 obey his will 87 , 267 and Cicero did not hesitate """to assert that no 
 man had ever ventured to pray the immortal gods for so great 
 blessings as they had bestowed on Pompey. 
 
 * = Roman people ( 300). b Omit. c Comparative of longe. 
 
 d Autem ( 270). e = "winds and tempests. 
 
 CHAPTER 17 
 
 66. "Even 2I5 if Pompey were not already in that region," said a 
 Cicero, "he b would, nevertheless, deserve to be appointed at once 
 to take charge of a war so important." There were, however, dis- 
 tinguished and patriotic men at Rome ' 8a who did not agree with 
 
 "To introduce a direct quotation, use inquit, and for its position, cf. 
 291, note. b Use the pass, periphrastic ( 166), and for mood, cf. 
 216.
 
 102 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 lliis view of Cicero, c not because they wished to deny that Pompey 
 possessed in the highest degree all the qualities 13 of a commander, 
 but because they believed that it was not for the interest of the 
 state 83 for so much power to be bestowed upon one man. But it 
 must be granted that, 23 if such arguments had prevailed the year 
 before 6 when the bill was proposed concerning the appointment of 
 Pompey as commander-in-chief against the pirates, the Romans 
 undoubtedly f would not have finished that war ? so soon. 
 
 c When a cause is given as not effective, the subjunctive is used. 
 d Text 29. e Prior. f Sine dubio. e Text 34. 
 
 CHAPTER 18 
 
 67. " 5 If the Roman people 89 had been persuaded by the argu- 
 ments of Catulus and Hortensius ^when they talked against the 
 proposition of Gabinius, it would have been deprived of the assist- 
 ance 101 rendered 3 by Pompey's great b military knowledge and ex- 
 perience. Had this happened, perhaps the pirates would have 
 remained unconquered, and the Romans 95 would have had to admit 
 that they had lost all the maritime power 101 and glory which their 
 ancestors had bequeathed them. For during many years without 
 interruption the great 20 Roman people, whose ancestors had de- 
 feated the most skilful and best equipped enemies "in so many 
 naval battles, had d not been able to defend even the harbors and 
 coast of Italy. We can easily believe, therefore, that many patriots 6 
 during those years were ashamed to mount the Rostra which had 
 been adorned by their fathers with naval booty. 
 
 a Praesto (309). b Text B. G. 3. 8. i. c =/^/. d = Ex. 10. f. 
 'Text 51. 
 
 CHAPTER 19 
 
 68. Your fellow-citizens, Quintus Hortensius, do not doubt """that 
 you have spoken 12I with good intentions ^against Pompey and Ga- 
 binius; a but if you 2 ' 3 take into consideration ^what Pompey has 
 
 * 
 a Sin autem.
 
 CICERO, MANIL1AN LAW IO1 
 
 *J 
 
 accomplished in a single year on land and sea under the law of 
 Gabinius, you will be ashamed, ''1 fancy, to remember that you 
 have tried I93 to prevent his I94 being c put in charge of the war 3 ' with 
 Mithridates. Moreover, who is more worthy than Gabinius I84 to be 
 assigned as a partner of the d exploits of 20 that great general ? For 
 not only e is he the man who proposed f the bill by which Pompey 304 
 was appointed to the command of the naval war, but Pompey, too, 
 earnestly requests I9 that Gabinius 304 may be given him as his lieu- 
 tenant. In my opinion, at any rate, fellow -citizens, since many 
 other men who have been tribunes of the people have been ap- 
 pointed lieutenants in the very next year, Gabinius surely ought 
 not to be deprived e of the same privilege 74 . 
 
 b Opinor, used parenthetically ( 291, note). c Text 27. d = things 
 done by. *fs . . . w/&0 = ipse ( 29). f Text 52. *Use expers. 
 
 CHAPTER 20 
 
 69. After Cicero had tried a to overthrow the arguments of Hor- 
 tensius, he said that it remained for him b to speak briefly about the 
 opinion of Quintus Catulus. l88 That he might not appear c to be 
 belittling a man 1I7 of such wisdom and integrity, he recalled the 
 flattering recognition of his worth and merit which Catulus 304 had 
 recently received from his fellow-citizens at the time ^when they 
 declared with one accord that, if anything 38 happened' 68 to Pom- 
 pey ", they would put all their hope in him alone. But when Cat- 
 ulus had said d in the case of Pompey that he wished no 7 new step 
 to be taken contrary to the established custom of their fathers, 
 Cicero did not hesitate ^to disagree with him. "For e the greater 
 the dangers which threaten the state 87 ," said f he, "the more ought 
 we all to enjoy the advantage of the valor and military skill of our 
 greatest men." 
 
 Text 52. b For mood, cf. 198; for sequence, 171. "Text 57. 
 
 d / the case of, one word. e The greater . . . the more = quo . . . 
 
 eo with comparatives ( 116). f Ex. 66. a.
 
 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 CHAPTER 21 
 
 70. ^ When Catulus said that he did not wish any '"new measures 
 a contrary to the precedents of their fathers to be taken in the case 
 of Pompey, he ^ seems to have forgotten 15 ""how many new prece- 
 dents ^had already been established in the case of this man, 
 121 with the approval not only of himself but of many distinguished 
 men ^of the same rank. For when he was a mere youth and a 
 private citizen, Pompey d raised an army and gained brilliant suc- 
 cesses I21 under ^his own command. Afterwards, although it was 
 unusual I?8 for an army to be given to a man I82 who had not held* a 
 magistracy, f the management of the campaign in Africa was in- 
 trusted to him, and when he had concluded the war and 3 s brought 
 home a victorious army, he h was allowed, 'though only a knight, to 
 celebrate a triumph. 
 
 a Text 60. b Obliviscor. c = good-will. d Use a pronoun 
 
 ( 34) a d put it at the beginning of the sentence ( 287). e Habeo. 
 f Use a gerundive construction ( 251). ^Brought home, one word. 
 
 h The Latin vb. is impersonal. ' Though only, omit. The emphasis 
 
 on knight should be expressed by its position in the clause ( 287). 
 
 CHAPTER 22 
 
 71. " s lf Pompey had not conducted his campaigns so success- 
 fully a in Italy, Africa, Spain, and on the sea, we should perhaps 
 admit, fellow-citizens, that Hortensius and Catulus b are doing right 
 in trying I93 tO prevent us I94 from appointing him to the command of 
 the war 91 with the pirates. But 2I2 if we have seen c from the outcome 
 of events that these men have d not taken sufficient thought for the 
 public welfare 87 , and that their judgment on the character' of Pom- 
 pey ^is not to be approved, 174 let us not hesitate """to defend our 
 opinion, and to select f for this great war in Asia the one man 
 184 whom not only the greater part of our fellow-citizens but all our 
 allies g most earnestly desire. " 3 If we do this 288 , foreign states will 
 
 a Feliciter. b = rightly try. c =.from the things themselves. 
 
 A Not sufficient, one word. e = "worthiness. f Use ad (text 27) with 
 
 a gerundive (this so great war to be waged). e Text 57.
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 105 
 
 believe that we have h at last heard their complaints, 267 and are no 
 longer 'more eager 74 to plunder than to protect them 254 . 
 
 h Ex. 28. b. 'Ex. 2. d. 
 
 CHAPTER 23 
 
 72. I ask you, fellow-citizens, I9 to consider "" whether the influ- 
 ence of Catulus and Hortensius ought to be so great that it can 
 persuade us 87 19 not to send to the war 30I with the king the only man 
 184 whom our 293 allies would rejoice a to have come into their cities. 
 217 As ii, indeed, the allies did b not know that, 2l8 while most Roman 
 commanders, c owing to their lust and desire of plunder, would d 
 make war upon them no less than upon the enemy, Pompey is " 7 of 
 such uprightness and self-control that, remembering 6 he was sent 
 to conquer the enemy alone, he will restrain the desires of his sol- 
 diers IOI from the homes, wives, and treasures of his allies and 
 friends. Since you have a man not only endowed with such a 
 character but also thoroughly experienced 74 in all kinds of warfare, 
 175 do not disgrace f the Roman people 259 by appointing a general 
 182 who will try more to enrich himself than to subdue your foes. 
 
 Pf. inf. of indir. discourse. b Not know, one word. c Text 65. 
 d Volo. e = holding (tenens) in memory ( 108). f = affect with 
 
 disgrace. 
 
 
 CHAPTER 24 
 
 73. When Cicero had shown that the war with Mithridates was 
 a so inevitable that it could not be neglected, and of such magnitude 
 that it must be managed with the greatest care, he tried to per- 
 suade his fellow-countrymen MI that they 94 had but one general suit- 
 able 1 ' to be placed in command. Although there were some I82 who 
 did not think that the whole power should be conferred upon one 
 man, nevertheless, the majority believed that, "'if the war were not 
 committed to Pompey, it "^ would be protracted 11 for many years. 
 Accordingly they not only gave their warmest approval to the e bill 
 
 Text 49. ' b Text 57. c Text 67. d Produce. e Text 54.
 
 106 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 of Manilius, but they also believed that Cicero had spoken truth- 
 fully when he declared that whatever he had undertaken in this 
 case he had undertaken not for the sake 253 of winning favor for 
 himself, but for the public welfare. 
 
 Cicero, Archias 
 
 CHAPTER i 
 
 74. Aulus Licinius Archias was a poet and friend of Cicero, 
 whom the latter 15 defended "when he was accused b of having ille- 
 gally obtained Roman citizenship. In the first part of his speech 
 Cicero said that he ought to employ for Archias all the powers of 
 intellect and oratory he possessed, for the latter had been his chief 
 guide 257 in the pursuit of all the d branches of literature. He added 
 that "'if his oratory had ever aided any one k ought surely to aid 
 him who gave it. 83 It made no difference that 3 poetry and oratory 
 were not the same, since all the arts were united by e a sort of rela- 
 tionship. 
 
 * When he was accused, pf. pass, participle. b Use an indicative 
 
 clause with quod. c Contra leges. A Branches of literature, sim- 
 
 plify. *A sort of, quasi, a word with which the Roman often quali- 
 fied a metaphor, apologizing for it, so to speak, if I may use the term, 
 etc. 
 
 CHAPTER 2 
 
 75. The trial of Archias was conducted before a praetor and 
 jurors whom Cicero called well versed in literature. And so he 
 asked them I9 to pardon him I85 for using a style of speech *not only 
 quite different from his own ordinary custom, but also from the 
 style b expected in the law-courts. For 274 , I86 since he was speaking 
 in behalf of a man of the greatest learning, he discoursed freely on 
 
 Use a relative clause, see text. b One a'djective in Latin.
 
 CICERO, ARCHIAS 107 
 
 the subjects 303 of culture and literature. He c elt sure that' 31 in this 
 way"' he could easily convince the jurors that Archias ought not 
 to be deprived of the citizenship 101 , but was l84 worthy to receive it 
 even 23 if he were not a citizen. 
 
 Note the long period occupying nearly the whole of this chapter. 
 Read 296. 
 
 c Feel sure = know, scio. 
 
 CHAPTER 3 
 
 76. Archias was born at Antioch 138 and was remarkable from 
 boyhood for his ability lo6 and skill in writing 253 . 2 3 After travelling 
 throughout' Asia, where he enjoyed great fame as a poet, he came 
 to Rome 138 in the year I32 io2 B.C. Not long before 131 he b had re- 
 ceived great rewards 86 for c his poetry in the cities of d Southern Italy. 
 He was still 6 a young man, and yet 270 he was at once received 46 as 
 an intimate friend by the Luculli. The famous 20 Metellus Numidi- 
 cus, Quintus Catulus. Lucius Crassus, and 268 many other noble men 
 became his friends. In fact, he was beloved by all who even pre- 
 tended to f have an interest in literature. 
 
 a Per ( 263). b Had received '= had been presented with, etc., cf. 
 
 86. c Use propter. d = Great Greece. e Etiam turn. 
 
 ' Have an interest, simplify. For construction, see 221. 
 
 CHAPTER 4 
 
 77. The law of Silvanus and Carbo declared all to be Roman 
 citizens who had held residence in Italy and who, " 5 after obtaining 
 the citizenship of an allied state, appeared before the praetor 
 ""within sixty days. Now a , in the first b place, Archias had already 
 had a residence at Rome I28 for many years 209 before he accompanied 
 Lucullus to Sicily. Secondly 1 *, he was presented with the citizen- 
 ship 86 of Heraclea, an allied state, 272 not only because of the influ- 
 ence 123 of Lucullus, but also because of his own worth. And lastly" 
 
 *Nmv, omit. b Ex. 21. e.
 
 I08 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 he appeared before the praetor within sixty days. Though the 
 records of Heraclea have been burned, here is 287 Lucullus, here 
 are 287 the Heraclean envoys who swear c ^that all I have said is 
 true. 
 
 c luro. 
 
 CHAPTERS 4-5 
 
 78. It cannot be doubted ^'that Archias appeared before a prae- 
 tor, for his name stands on the records. Moreover 270 , the Greeks 
 have often given the citizenship to men of no ability" 7 . "Would 
 they have refused it to Archias, a man of great genius? But, b you 
 say, his name is not on the census-list. All know that when Archias 
 first came to Rome no census was taken, and, during the last two 
 censorships, he has been in the provinces with our generals. c And 
 besides he who is d rated in the list is only proved to have performed 
 the acts of a citizen. This 6 same thing can be said of Archias, for 
 he has both received legacies and made his own will in accordance 
 with Roman laws. 
 
 a Equivalent to an apodosis of a condition contrary to fact, cf. 215 
 and 178. b Omit. The force of But, you say, is given by the proper 
 
 conjunction, cf. 270. c And besides, praeterea. A Rated in the 
 
 list, census. c Use the relative. 
 
 CHAPTER 6 
 
 79. Poets refresh the mind worn out with toil, a and " 5 unless the 
 mind were daily refreshed we should have nothing to say worth 
 listening to. No one can say that I have not always aided those 
 who needed my services. And so no one ought to blame me if I 
 have employed my leisure time in the study of literature, for from 
 literature I draw all the power of oratory I possess. Literature 
 teaches that praise and honor are the greatest things b in the world, 
 for it is full of examples 74 of great and good men whom I have 
 
 a And unless the mind, avoid et by means of a relative, cf. 310. 
 b Omit.
 
 CICERO, ARCHIAS 109 
 
 striven e to imitate. And yet all these examples " 5 would have per- 
 ished had it not been for literature. 
 
 Note the fine anaphora in Sed pleni omnes, etc. Cf. 287. 
 
 e Ex. 56. d. 
 
 CHAPTER 7 
 
 80. Not all the great men a of the world have been educated, b it 
 is true, and ability without learning has more often been deserving 
 of praise than learning without ability, 27 and yet when the same 
 man possesses both ability and learning something remarkable c is 
 usually produced. I might 173 mention as examples Africanus, Lae- 
 lius, the famous 20 old man Cato, and 268 many others. And so we 
 may feel sure that literary studies are very valuable. 84 Even 2I5 if 
 they were not we should pursue them merely because of the pleas- 
 ure d they afford. For they surpass 6 all other pleasures, I85 from the 
 fact that they are ^suited to all occasions, all places, and every 
 period of life. 
 
 * Of the world, omit. ^It is true, quidem. c fs usually pro- 
 
 duced, soleo -\- infinitive. d Omit. e Supero. 
 
 CHAPTER 8 
 
 81. Mere skill of body can affect men I96 to such a degree that 
 they weep at the death of actors just as a they did recently in the 
 case of Roscius. " 6 How much more ought we to be affected by 
 mental b skill and genius? Such c genius Archias possesses, for 
 poets receive their power by a certain divine inspiration ; all other 
 things may be learned by study. Indeed poets ought to be consid- 
 ered sacred, as Ennius calls them. If stones and brute beasts are 
 moved by the power of poetry, ought we educated men d to think of 
 depriving a man of citizenship whose poetry is equal to 24 that of the 
 ancients ? 
 
 a Omit they did. If represented at all, the Latin would repeat the 
 verb weep, using the perfect tense. b Many English adjectives are to 
 be rendered by the genitive of a noun in Latin. c Talis. Cf. 287. 
 
 d To think of depriving to think about depriving, cf . 259.
 
 110 EXERCISES BASED ON 
 
 CHAPTER 9 
 
 82. Archias has celebrated in verse the glory of the Roman peo- 
 ple and has been a friend even of Gaius Marius, who conquered the 
 Cimbri and Teutones. Famous men love those who are able to 
 celebrate their great deeds. So Marius and Lucullus loved Archias. 
 But the great 20 victories of Marius and Lucullus have rendered 
 famous the name of the Roman people. When the enemy's fleet 
 was sunk near 139 Tenedos, when their leaders were slain, the glory 
 ''belonged to the a Roman people. And so those who have cele- 
 brated the great deeds of our generals have 3I at the same time cele- 
 brated the fame of the Roman people itself. 
 
 "Note and imitate the skilful anaphora of Cicero in the position of 
 Populus Romanus, cf. 287. 
 
 CHAPTER 10 
 
 83. If Ennius received the citizenship I85 for having praised the 
 deeds of great men, 28l does not Archias deserve the same reward 1 "? 
 Rome has conquered the world, and her fame ought to reach the 
 limits of the world ; 27 and yet Latin is read only in Italy. But the 
 Greek 3 poetry of Archias has spread the fame of Rome b far and 
 wide, because almost all peoples understand Greek. Indeed 2I5 if 
 there were no poets, the deeds of great men would be forgotten. 
 The famous 20 Alexander considered Achilles fortunate because 
 Homer sang his praises. 2I5 If Archias had asked any of our great 
 men for the citizenship, he would certainly have received it. Sulla. 
 who gave the citizenship to Gauls and Spaniards, c would certainly 
 have rewarded Archias. 
 
 a Arrange the sentence so as to emphasize Greek, cf. 287. b !Longe 
 lateque. 'Equivalent to an apodosis ( 215). 
 
 CHAPTER ii 
 
 84. I have said that all 44 the best men are attracted by love of 
 glory. Even the very philosophers, who pretend* "'to despise glory, 
 
 "Text 6.
 
 CICERO, ARCHIAS III 
 
 wish their names to be eternal 5 with their books. Ennius, the poet, 
 fought against the Aetolians Ia6 under the leadership of Fulvius, who 
 actually dedicated spoils to the Muses. Even 266 I myself admit 
 that I am touched with the same desire and wish the deeds of my 
 consulship to endure forever. Glory is the reward of excellence, 
 and, I25 if this is taken away, l82 there is nothing in life worth striving 
 for. Though we ourselves may die, yet our names can last forever. 
 
 b Text 30. c Ultro. 
 
 CHAPTER 12 
 
 85. It is impossible for everything to die with us, and it is much 
 better to leave behind as memorials the likeness of our virtues than, 
 as many great men "have done, statues 104 of our persons. b lt mat- 
 ters not whether we shall ourselves feel this fame after death c or 
 not, 2 ' 9 provided that we now take delight in the hope and expecta- 
 tion of it. ; 
 
 In view of all this, judges, I trust that you will pardon what 87 1 have 
 said not in accordance with the ordinary custom of the law-courts 
 on behalf of Archias, a sacred poet who will cause the fame of 
 Rome I97 to be remembered, and a man d in every way worthy of the 
 citizenship. 
 
 Omit, cf. Ex. 8 1. a. b // matters not, nihil refert (83, second 
 
 note). c See 220, note. d Use a relative. 
 
 College Entrance Examinations 
 
 86. While Caesar was thus engaged, he desired to know what was 
 being done elsewhere. A message was brought to him from Titurius, 
 whom he had placed in command 1 of the troops at the bridge : " The 
 Belgians have changed their plan, and have come down to the river. 
 
 i. praeficere
 
 112 SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 I fear they will cross it at zford 2 , and thus attack us in the rear 3 .'' 
 Caesar immediately despatched his horse and light troops* to pre- 
 vent their carrying out this design. These squadrons? crossing the 
 river by the bridge, reached the ford before the Belgians had passed 
 it, and attacked them with their missiles while they were still strug 
 gling 6 in the middle of the stream. Part of them who had already 
 gained the opposite side were surrounded and cut in pieces 7 by the 
 cavalry. The Belgians were forced* to retreat to their former en- 
 campment, where they heard that Divitiacus had entered their con- 
 fines and was now wasting their homes with sword and fire. They, 
 therefore, determined to abandon their attempt 9 and to return each 
 to defend his own land. 
 
 2. vadum 6. impeditus 
 
 3. a tergo 7. trucidare 
 
 4. miles expeditus 8. cogere 
 
 5. turma .9. inceptum 
 
 AMHERST, June, 1897. 
 
 87. Under these circumstances, conscript fathers, I have deter- 
 mined to refer to you the question of 1 the punishment of the con- 
 spirators. Thus far two opinions' 2 are proposed* : Silanus thinks that 
 those who have tried to destroy the empire of the Roman people 
 should be immediately put to death ; Caesar, on the other hand, holds 
 that death was ordained*' by the immortal gods not for the sake of 
 punishment, but as a rest from labor. He, therefore, urges that the 
 property of these wretches be confiscated^ and they be imprisoned* 
 for life in our municipal towns. Do not doubt, conscript fathers, 
 that I see clearly where my own interest 7 lies. If you adopt the 
 opinion of Caesar, I shall have less fear of popular hatred. But 
 if you prefer the opinion of Silanus, I shall easily be able to acquit 
 myself of the charge* of cruelty. Wherefore, I urge you to act 
 boldly in defence of the safety of the Roman people. You have 
 
 1. Omit 5. publicare 
 
 2. sententia 6. in vincula dare 
 
 3. ferre 7. interesse 
 
 4. constituere 8. crimen
 
 COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 113 
 
 a consul mindful of you, forgetful of himself, who will not hesitate 
 to carry out your decrees. 
 
 AMHERST, June, 1898. 
 
 88. Caesar made a speech in order to encourage his men. He told 
 them they ought not to be disturbed in mind ; that the unfavorable 
 nature of the ground (place) had brought this about. "Do not," 
 said he, " attribute it to the enemy's valor. I am going to lead 
 the army out of the camp and draw up a line of battle in a suit- 
 able place. Then you will see whether Vercingetorix will come 
 down on to level ground or not." But Vercingetorix remained in 
 the same place, and so Caesar fought only a slight cavalry engage- 
 ment, which, however, was successful. A few days afterwards he 
 proceeded to the river Elaver in order to repair the bridges and lead 
 the army across. 
 
 BOWDOIN, June, 1897 
 
 89. When Hannibal, after being defeated by the Romans, had 
 finally fled-for-refuge (confugio) to Prusias, King of Bithynia, the Ro- 
 mans sent envoys to the king to command him (relative of purpose) 
 to surrender (dedo) Hannibal to the Roman people. Hannibal, how- 
 ever, perceiving that his end had come, determined (decerno) to die 
 by his own hand. Accordingly, having been informed by his slaves 
 that the house was surrounded by soldiers, he took the poison which 
 he always had with him in a ring, saying that his enemies should 
 never capture him alive. 
 
 Thus perished miserably that famous man whom many have 
 called the greatest general of all ages and nations. 
 
 BOWDOIN, June, 1898. 
 
 90. I. Tell me why you are ashamed of your work ; or are you only 
 tired of it ? I went to my uncle's in Utica, but I did not enjoy his 
 beautiful pictures, for I was not skilled enough in art. The general 
 left the city with his troops and hastened to the frontier to attack 
 the enemy. I cannot tell you how happy I am at your great vie- 
 
 8
 
 114 SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 tory. The girl married a man who was fifteen years older than her- 
 self. When asked why, she replied : " It is better to be an old man's 
 darling (deliciae) than a young man's slave." Do you think you 
 could trust a woman who says such things as that? 
 
 II. Hannibal, being conquered by Scipio, fled to Antiochus, King 
 of Syria. Ambassadors were sent from Rome to Antiochus, among 
 whom was Scipio, who asked Hannibal whom he thought to be the 
 greatest general. Hannibal replied that Alexander, King of Mace- 
 don, seemed to him to have been the greatest, because with small 
 forces he had routed innumerable armies. Then Scipio asked him 
 whom he placed second. "Pyrrhus,'' said he, "because he first 
 taught how to measure out a camp." Again, when Scipio asked 
 whom he placed third, he replied, " Myself.'' Then Scipio, smiling, 
 said, "What, then, would you say if you had conquered me?" "I 
 should have placed myself before Alexander and Pyrrhus and all 
 others." 
 
 BRYN MAWR, June, 1898. 
 
 
 
 91. A few days ago I met in Rome Cato the censor, which day, I 
 remember, was the igth of April. As soon as he saw me, he began 
 to speak of the growing power of Carthage, which has almost re- 
 covered from the former war. In fact, he said he should not cease 
 to fear that city until he should have learned of its utter destruc- 
 tion. "O that our young Scipio," said he, "might soon finish the 
 work begun by his grandfather." 
 
 CALIFORNIA, August, 1896. 
 
 92. Demetrius had taken the city of Megara. Upon his asking 
 Stilpo, the philosopher, if he had lost anything, the other answered, 
 " I have lost nothing ; for all my property is still mine." At this 
 the monarch marvelled much ; for his patrimony had been plun- 
 dered, his sons carried off, and his country conquered. No doubt 
 the philosopher meant Demetrius to understand that he cared noth- 
 ing for material possessions, and that no enemy could deprive him 
 of the possessions which alone he valued, namely, those of the mind. 
 
 CALIFORNIA, August, 1898.
 
 COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 115 
 
 {Mark all long vowels.) 
 
 93. Cicero, on being informed of these actions of Fulvia, thought 
 he must no longer delay. He summoned the senate to meet in the 
 Temple of Jupiter Stator. Catiline, with strange boldness, came in 
 and took his seat among the other senators, who, however, immedi- 
 ately left him alone. Cicero now delivered the famous speech that 
 is called the First Oration against Catiline. The guilty man rose 
 to reply, but was prevented from speaking by the shouts of the sen- 
 ators. He immediately left the senate house ; and, perceiving that 
 he was not safe at Rome, he called his fellow-conspirators ' together, 
 bade Lentulus, the praetor of the city, and the others, carry out 
 what had been determined upon, and left Rome before daylight to 
 join Manlius at Faesulae. 
 
 1 = socii. 
 
 CHICAGO, December, 1897. 
 
 (Mark all long vowels.) 
 
 94. "Then Cicero arose and poured forth the first of the four 
 celebrated Catilinarian orations, which begins with the well-known 
 words : ' How long, Catiline, will you abuse our patience ?' He 
 showed him that he knew what he had done, what he intended, that 
 he was informed of all his plans, and called upon him to relieve the 
 city of his hated presence, and to take his companions in crime 
 with him. Catiline, with downcast eyes and faltering voice, begged 
 the senate not to judge him harshly. But his voice was drowned by 
 the cry 'Traitor !' 'Parricide!' He rushed from the senate cham- 
 ber, and, after conferring with the leaders of the conspiracy, he left 
 the city at nightfall, and hastened to the camp of Manlius." 
 
 CHICAGO, June, 1898. 
 
 95. We have been expelled from our own country, and have come 
 hither against our will ; but if you wish by kindness to earn our 
 gratitude we can be most useful friends. 
 
 Envoys had come to him from the town to beg him to pardon 
 their offences and to spare their lives.
 
 Il6 SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 The force on guard is so small that not even the wall is manned 
 (cingere murum\ and no one dares to come beyond the fortifications. 
 
 COLUMBIA, June, 1898. 
 
 96. Such being the case, conscript fathers, see to it that you do 
 not fail in your duty to those whose help has never failed you. Our 
 common country is beset by the torches and weapons of an impious 
 conspiracy. Desperate men are threatening the citadel and the 
 Capitol, the temples of the gods, and even our very homes and fire- 
 sides; and upon you rests the decision whether all that we see 
 about us shall stand, or the whole republic be destroyed. 
 
 COLUMBIA, September, 1898. 
 
 97. i. All good citizens will obey the laws of the Roman people. 
 
 2. These brave men blocked the way of the enemy with their 
 own bodies. 
 
 3. Before I set out from Rome, you returned to the city from 
 Asia. 
 
 4. Take care that those who are absent may not have a place to 
 which to return. 
 
 5. If he had known that you were to come to-day, he would have 
 remained at Athens. 
 
 6. He said that he should have done this before setting out, but 
 that he did not know how important it was. 
 
 CORNELL, June, 1897. 
 
 98. i. When Caesar was in Gaul, the Belgians began to con- 
 spire against the Romans. 
 
 2. You must resist old age, if you wish to remain young. 
 
 3. Who is so unjust as not to defend a man whom he believes to 
 be innocent ? 
 
 4. Have no fear that he will not come ; there is no doubt that he 
 will leave home to-morrow ; it may be he has left already. 
 
 5. The old republic was not overthrown till more than seven 
 hundred years after the founding of the city.
 
 COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 117 
 
 6. If I could believe that you would be a true friend, I should 
 no longer fear to tell you what I did before returning to my home 
 
 in the country. 
 
 CORNELL, September, 1898. 
 
 99. On the next day Caesar led out his forces from both (uterque) 
 the camps, and advancing a short distance from the larger camp, he 
 drew up his army and offered battle to the enemy. As soon as (ubi) 
 he perceived that the enemy did not come out, he withdrew. Then 
 Ariovistus sent a part of his troops to attack (oppugnare) the smaller 
 camp, and a sharp battle was fought till evening (vesper]. Then 
 Caesar, calling a council, said that he should send out a detachment 
 of cavalry (a/a) to reconnoitre (explorare), and when they returned, 
 he should order the soldiers to prepare (corpora curare) for an en- 
 gagement. 
 
 DARTMOUTH, June, 1897. 
 
 100. If you wish to be of service to my glory, go forth with your 
 band of conspirators, betake yourself to Manlius, separate yourself 
 from good men, make war upon your country, so that you may seem 
 not driven out to strangers, but invited to friends. Yet I know that 
 some whom you have sent before you are waiting for you. Nature 
 bore you and fortune has saved you for such folly. In the camp to 
 which you go you will have a place to show that renowned endur- 
 ance of hunger, cold, and want of everything, but you will under- 
 take robbery rather than war. 
 
 DARTMOUTH, June, 1898. 
 
 101. Although only a small part of the summer was left, Caesar 
 determined to cross into Britain, for he had observed that in nearly 
 all the wars with the Gauls aid had been furnished to the enemy by the 
 inhabitants of that island. Since, however, he could learn nothing 
 from the Gauls about the nature of the island and of its people, and 
 was afraid that some misfortune might happen to him if he acted 
 incautiously, he sent a lieutenant to find out all he could about thai 
 portion of Britain which was nearest to Gaul.
 
 Il8 SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 In the mean time Caesar gathered together about eighty ships in 
 which to carry across the troops if a favorable report was made by 
 his lieutenant. When after five days this officer had returned and 
 reported all that he had seen, Caesar at once set sail with two 
 legions of infantry and ordered the cavalry to follow with all pos- 
 sible speed. 
 
 The cavalry, however, waited more than five days before setting 
 out, and then proceeded so slowly that one battle had already been 
 fought with the enemy before they came within sight of Caesar and 
 
 the infantry. 
 
 HARVARD, June, 1897. 
 
 102. On learning that the Germans were preparing to invade Gaul, 
 Caesar made up his mind to join his army at once. Having reached 
 the winter-quarters, he quickly made all necessary arrangements for 
 marching, and as soon as he could, started out with his army in the 
 direction in which he had been told the Germans were encamped. 
 Whan he was not many miles away from them, he met some ambas- 
 sadors whom they had sent to tell him that they might be useful 
 friends to him, if he would let them, and to ask him to assign them 
 land in Gaul where they could live without being molested by their 
 enemies. But Caesar was afraid that they were acting treacherously 
 and refused to grant their request. He told them, however, that if 
 they wished, they might settle on the farther banks of the Rhine in 
 the country of the Ubii. So they went back to consult their coun- 
 trymen in regard to this, but Caesar in the mean time kept on advanc- 
 ing, for he saw that it was necessary to force the Germans out of 
 
 Gaul without delay. 
 
 HARVARD, June, 1898. 
 
 103. Caesar, because he remembered that the consul L. Crassus 
 had been slain and his army routed and sent under the yoke by the 
 Helvetians, did not think that their request ought to be granted: 
 nor, moreover, did he believe that men whose feelings were hostile, 
 if given leave to march through the province, would refrain from
 
 COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 119 
 
 injury and evil-doing. However, that time might be gained (inter- 
 vene) for (until) the soldiers, whom he had ordered,,,to assemble, he 
 replied to the ambassadors that he would take a day for deliber- 
 ation. 
 
 JOHNS HOPKINS, September, 1897. 
 
 104. When now the turrets had approached the wall, Caesar 
 learned from captives that Vercingetorix had moved his camp nearer 
 to Avaricum and, together with his cavalry, was waiting in the place 
 where he thought that our men would come the next day. 
 
 JOH-NS HOPKINS, September ^.698. 
 
 105. While war was being waged in Numidia against Juguvtha, the 
 Cimbri and Teutones and other tribes of the Germans and Gauls 
 threatened Italy, and routed several Roman armies. There was 
 great fear in Rome, lest the city should be taken a second time by. 
 the Gauls. Therefore, Gaius Marius was elected consul, to make 
 war on the Cimbri and Teutones. He fought two battles with the 
 Cimbri and defeated them with great slaughter, capturing eighty 
 thousand men, together with their king Tewtobodus. Then the 
 Teutones invaded Italy, but were routed by Marius and Catulus 
 near Verona. Thus Rome was saved by the skill and valor of 
 Marius from the greatest danger which had threatened the city 
 since its capture by the Gauls in 390 B.C. 
 
 MICHIGAN, September, 1898. 
 
 106. When Caesar made these inquiries (asked these things) of 
 the envoys, he found that the Belgae long before had driven out the 
 Gauls (use participial phrase) and that they were the only ones who 
 had been able to prevent the Cimbri from entering (or invading) 
 their country; that the Nervii, who were considered the fiercest 
 among them, had promised fifty thousand armed men for this war. 
 
 While Caesar was waiting for reinforcements, the Belgae attacked 
 a walled town of the Remi, which was eight miles from the Roman 
 camp. So Iccius sent a messenger to say that unless aid were given
 
 I2O SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 him, he would have to surrender the town. Caesar replied that he 
 would send one legion to help the Remi because they had obeyed 
 
 his orders. 
 
 PENNSYLVANIA. June, 1897. 
 
 107. i. Caesar replied that there were no vacant lands in Gaul 
 which so large a multitude could settle in, but that he would order the 
 Ubii to allow them to settle in their territories. Caesar kept drawing 
 nearer to the camp of the Germans, and they kept sending ambas- 
 sadors to him, for the purpose, as he thought, of causing delay until 
 their cavalry, which was away, should return. 
 
 2. To these men I say, " Be assured that the consuls are vigilant, 
 that they have provided a sufficient guard for the city, and that the 
 citizens have been warned to defend their homes with sentinels and 
 guards. If you make the slightest attempt against your country, I 
 
 shall immediately discover it." 
 
 PRINCETON, September, 1897. 
 
 108. i. He says that you made him consul. 
 
 You said that you would not ask him for money. 
 I think that he would have conquered the Germans if you had 
 helped him. 
 
 2. After he had learned the conspirators' plans, Cicero assembled 
 the senate in the temple of Jupiter Stator, on the 8th of November, 
 and accused Catiline of treason. That very night Catiline set out 
 from Rome for Etruria in order to unite with Manlius, his lieuten- 
 ant, before he should be apprehended. 
 
 3. Caesar sent thirteen horsemen to see where the enemy had 
 pitched their camp. On their return (when they returned) they 
 informed him that the camp was in a narrow valley where two 
 
 streams met. 
 
 PRINCETON, June, 1898. 
 
 109. On the 8th of November, the consul Cicero asked Catiline in 
 the senate whether he did not know that all had learned that he 
 had conspired against the state. " All your plans," said he, " are
 
 COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 121 
 
 now clearer to me than daylight : you met your confederates at 
 Laeca's house ; you chose men to leave at Rome to burn the city and 
 murder the optimates ; you yourself, after killing me, intend to go to 
 the army which Manlius is now collecting for you in Etruria. You 
 ought to have been killed long ago by the command of the consul, 
 but I will permit you to go nay, I advise you to do so." 
 
 VANDERBILT, September, 1897. 
 
 no. When the ambassadors of that tribe came to the Roman gen- 
 eral's camp, he asked them what they wished. They replied that 
 they wished to put themselves and their people under the protection 
 of the Roman people. " We have been driven," they said, " from our 
 homes by the Chatti, with whom we could not contend, since they 
 surpassed us in number. Now if we are permitted to settle in your 
 territory, we will always be faithful to you ; but if you make war on 
 us, we can expect no help except from the immortal gods." Licin- 
 ius replied that he would ask the senate about the matter ; in the 
 mean time he ordered them to remain where they were and not to 
 devastate the country. He sent one of his legates to Rome to re- 
 port the affair to the senate. 
 
 VANDERBILT, September, 1898. ' 
 
 in. To show you what is to your interest, I shall explain the 
 matter fully. Caius Caesar believes that if the conspirators should 
 be put to death now, the people would blame the senate bitterly. 
 Many senators agree with Caesar. If we follow their opinion, these 
 dangers will increase, and soon Catiline and his friends will do 
 what they wish to do, get possession of Rome and put the most 
 prominent men to death. Now I ask you, what ought the senate to 
 fear most, the blame of a few men who have no foresight, or the 
 
 utter destruction of this glorious republic. 
 
 VASSAR, June, 1897. 
 
 112. C. Caesar, who protected the state by his zeal, was rewarded 
 by the senate with the greatest honors. For when we had no pro- 
 tection and were fearing the disastrous return of Antony, this youth
 
 122 SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 made ready an army, and warded off the danger. Who is there 
 who does not know that if Caesar had not prepared an army, the 
 return of Antony would have been our ruin ? For he was so stirred 
 up by his hatred of you and his slaughter of Roman citizens at 
 Suessa that he thought of nothing but the overthrow of the Roman 
 
 people. 
 
 VASSAR, June, 1898. 
 
 113. The day following, Vercingetorix convoked the assembly. 
 He declares that he did not undertake this war for the sake of his 
 own interests, but for the sake of the common liberty, and that, since 
 one must yield to fortune, he offers himself to them for either pur- 
 pose (rem), whether they choose (velinf) to satisfy the Romans by 
 his death or to deliver him up alive. Envoys are sent to Caesar on 
 this matter. He orders their arms to be delivered up, their chiefs 
 to be brought before him. He himself is seated within-his-lines (/// 
 mitnitione) in front of the camp. There the leaders are brought 
 before him. Vercingetorix is given up, their arms are surrendered. 
 Reserving the Aedui and Averni, that if possible he may through 
 them recover their- states, he distributes the rest of the captives, 
 6ne to each man in the army in the name of booty. 
 
 WELLESLEY, September, 1897. 
 
 114. At daybreak Caesar ordered all those men who had taken 
 stand on the mountain to come down into the plain from their higher 
 positions and throw down their arms. This they did without any re- 
 fusal, and with out-stretched hands threw themselves on the ground 
 weeping, and begged him for safety. He comforted them and bade 
 them rise, speaking a few words to them about his clemency, that 
 they might feel less fear. Then he gave them into the charge of 
 his own soldiers that none of them be harmed. 
 
 Are you not ashamed of your silence ? Messengers informed 
 Caesar that the army would be on the march three days later. I 
 would like to know what you are going to do. Labienus feared the 
 
 other legion would not come. 
 
 WKLLESLEY, June, 1898.
 
 COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 123 
 
 115. I see, Conscript Fathers, that some of the citizens are plot- 
 ting against the commonwealth. I have not punished them as yet ; 
 but I, the consul, am aware of their treachery, and all that they plan 
 is straightway reported to me. I know where they have been and 
 what leaders they have chosen. If that wicked wretch, Catiline, 
 does not depart from the city, he and his accomplices (socii) will be 
 seized and put to death. For the immortal gods have willed that 
 death should be the penalty of such crimes. 
 
 WESLEYAN, September, 1897. 
 
 116. The king of the Germans was Ariovistus. Caesar sent mes- 
 sengers to him to demand that he should liberate the Gauls. Ariovis- 
 tus insolently refused, saying that he wondered what business the 
 Romans had in Gaul, which he (Ariovistus) had conquered. Then 
 Caesar marched against him and defeated him in a great battle. 
 Thus the Gauls were liberated from the power of the Germans, and 
 returned to their allegiance to the Roman people. 
 
 insolently = superbe, return to allegiance = in fidem redire. 
 
 WESLEYAN, June, 1898. 
 
 117. In the five-hundred-and-fortieth year after the founding of the 
 city (a condita urbe] Paulus and Varro were sent against Hannibal. 
 At a town called Cannae in Apulia a battle was fought, in which, 
 both consuls were defeated. The consul Paulus was killed, thirty 
 senators were either captured or slain, as well as three hundred 
 nobles and forty thousand soldiers. Yet no Roman dared to speak 
 of peace. Slaves were manumitted (manumissi stint), a thing which 
 had never been done before, and in this way the army was increased. 
 
 WILLIAMS, June, 1897. 
 
 118. Caesar, on seeing that very many of his own men were being 
 wounded, ordered the cohorts to ascend the mountain and to raise 
 a shout. The inhabitants (oppidani\ greatly terrified at this (quo 
 facto), called back their armed men, but were finally forced (cogen-) 
 to surrender. Drappes, a captive, refused food (lit. kept himself,
 
 124 SIGHT EXERCISES 
 
 abstincrc, from food), and so died. At the same time Lucterius, 
 who had escaped (profugere) from the battle was brought back 
 
 bound to Caesar. 
 
 WILLIAMS, June, 1898. 
 
 119. When the Romans reached Britain, the barbarians, occupying 
 the shore, hurled javelins at them and attempted to prevent them from 
 disembarking (ex navibus egredi}. The Romans, not accustomed 
 to fight on ships, were terrified by this until (dum) Caesar ordered 
 some of his ships to be stationed near the exposed flank of the 
 enemy. Then the barbarians, disturbed by the arrows and javelins, 
 retreated slightly (paulum pedem referre}. While the Romans were 
 still hesitating, the eagle-bearer 1 of the tenth legion, jumping (se 
 proicere) into the sea, cried out, " Leap down (desilire), soldiers, un- 
 less you wish to betray your eagle to the enemy !" All immediately 
 followed him, and after a fierce conflict put the enemy to flight. 
 
 1 Eagle-bearer" he who carried the eagle." 
 
 YALE./W/J/, 1897. 
 
 120. In his speech for the Manilian law Cicero reminded his fel- 
 low-citizens of the services rendered by Pompey when he held su- 
 preme command against the pirates who had grown so bold that they 
 captured even large towns. " Even the very coast of Italy," said 
 Cicero, " and the Tiber itself were not safe from the attacks of 
 those rascals. Almost under your very eyes a fleet under the com- 
 mand of a consul of the Roman people was crushed. And yet un- 
 der the leadership of Pompey that dangerous war was ended within 
 a few months. He prepared for it at the end of winter, began it in 
 the early spring, and finished it "by midsummer." 
 
 W, 1898
 
 Caesar, Gallic War' 
 
 BOOK ill 
 
 1. Cum in Italiam proficisceretur Caesar, Ser. Galbam cum le- i 
 gione duodecima et parte equitatus in Nantuatis, Varagros, Sedunos- 
 que misit, qui a finibus Allobrogum et lacu Lemanno et flumine 
 Rhodano ad summas Alpes pertinent. Causa mittendi fuit quod 2 
 iter per Alpes, quo magno cum periculo magnisque cum portoriis 
 mercatores ire consueverant, patefieri volebat. Huic permisit, si 3 
 opus esse arbitraretur, uti in his locis legionem hiemandi causa 
 conlocaret. Galba secundis aliquot proeliis factis castellisque com- 4 
 pluribus eorum expugnatis, missis ad eum undique legatis obsidi- 
 busque datis et pace facta, constituit cohortes duas in Nantuatibus 
 conlocare et ipse cum reliquis eius legionis cohortibus in vico Vara- 
 grorum, qui appellatur Octodurus, hiemare; qui vicus positus in 5 
 valle, non magna adiecta planitie, altissimis montibus undique con- 
 tinetur. Cum hie in duas partes flumine divideretur, alteram partem 6 
 eius vici Gallis concessit, alteram vacuam ab his relictam cohortibus 
 ad hiemandum attribuit. Eum locum vallo fossaque munivit. 
 
 2. Cum dies hibernorum complures transissent, frumentumque i 
 eo comportari iussisset, subito per exploratores certior factus est 
 ex ea parte vici quam Gallis concesserat omnes noctu discessisse, 
 montesque qui impenderent a maxima multitudine Sedunorum et 
 Varagrorum teneri. Id aliquot de causis acciderat ut subito Galli 2 
 belli renovandi legionisque opprimendae consilium caperent : 
 pr-'mum, quod legionem, neque earn plenissimam, detractis cohort!- 3 
 bus duabus et compluribus singillatim, qui commeatus petendi causa 
 missi erant, absentibus, propter paucitatem despiciebant ; turn etiam 4 
 quod propter iniquitatem loci, cum ipsi ex montibus in vallem de- 
 currerent et tela coicerent, ne primum quidem posse impetum suum 
 sustineri existimabant. Accedebat quod suos ab se liberos abs- 5 
 tractos obsidum nomine dolebant, et Romanes non solum itinerum
 
 126 LATIN TEXT 
 
 causa sed etiam perpetuae possessionis culmina Alpium occupare 
 conari et ea loca finitimae provinciae adiungere sibi persuasum 
 habebant. 
 
 1 3. His nuntiis acceptis Galba, cum neque opus hibernorum muni- 
 tionesque plene essent perfectae neque de frumento reliquoque 
 commeatu satis esset provisum, quod deditione facta obsidibusque 
 acceptis nihil de bello timendum existimaverat, consilio celeriter 
 
 2 convocato sententias exquirere coepit. Quo in consilio, cum tnn- 
 tum repentini. periculi praeter opinionem accidisset, ac iam omnia 
 fere superiora loca multitudine armatorum completa conspicerentur, 
 neque subsidio veniri neque commeatus supportari interclusis itine- 
 
 3 ribuspossent, prope iam desperata salute nonnullae huius modi sen- 
 tentiae dicebantur ut, impedimentis relictis eruptione facta, isdem 
 
 4 itineribus quibus eo pervenissent ad salutem contenderent. Maiori 
 tamen parti placuit hoc reservato ad extremum casum consilio .in- 
 terim rei eventum experiri et castra defendere. 
 
 1 4. Brevi spatio interiecto, vix ut iis rebus quas constituissent 
 conlocandis atque administrandis tempus daretur, hostes ex omni- 
 bus partibus signo dato decurrere, lapides gaesaque in vallum 
 
 2 coicere. Nostri primo integris viribus fortiter propugnare neque ul- 
 lum frustra telum ex loco superiore mittere, ut quaeque pars castro- 
 rum nudata defensoribus premi videbatur, eo occurrere et auxilium 
 
 3 ferre ; sed hoc superari quod diuturnitate pugnae hostes defessi 
 
 4 proelio.excedebant, alii integris viribus succedebant: quarum rerum 
 ab nostris propter paucitatem fieri. nihil poterat, ac non modo de- 
 fesso ex pugna excedendi, sed ne saucio quidem eius loci ubi con- 
 stiterat relinquendi ac sui recipiendi facultas dabatur. 
 
 1 5. Cum iam amplius horis sex continenter pugnaretur ac non 
 solum vires sed etiam tela nostros deficerent, atque hostes acrius 
 instarent languidioribusque nostris vallum scindere et fossas com- 
 
 2 plere coepissent, resque esset iam ad extremum perducta casum, P. 
 Sextius Baculus, primi pili centurio, quern Nervico proelio compluri- 
 bus confectum vulneribus diximus, et item C. Volusenus, tribunus 
 militum, vir et consili magni et virtutis, ad Galbam adcurrunt atque 
 unam esse spem salutis docent, si eruptione facta extremum auxi- 
 
 3 Hum experirentur. Itaque convocatis centurionibus celeriter milites
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 127 
 
 certiores facit paulisper intermitterent proelium, ac tantummodo 
 tela missa exciperent seque ex labore reficerent ; post dato signo ex 
 castris erumperent atque omnem spem salutis in virtute ponerent. 
 
 6. Quod iussi sunt faciunt ac subito omnibus portis eruptione i 
 facta neque cognoscendi quid fieret neque sui colligendi hostibus 
 facultatem relinquunt. Ita commutata Fortuna eos qui in spem 2 
 potiendorum castrorum venerant undique circtimventos interficiunt, 
 et ex hominum milibus amplius xxx, quern numerum barbarorum 
 ad castra venisse constabat, plus tertia parte interfecta reliquos 
 perterritos in fugam coiciunt ac ne in locis quidem superioribus 
 consistere patiuntur. Sic omnibus hostium copiis fusis armisque 3 
 exutis se intra munitiones suas recipiunt. Quo proelio facto, quod 4 
 saepius Fortunam temptare Galba nolebat, atque alio se in hiberna 
 consilio venisse meminerat, aliis occurrisse rebus viderat, maxime 
 frumenti commeatusque inopia permotus, postero die omnibus eius 
 vici aedificiis incensis in provinciam reverti contendit, ac nullo hoste 5 
 prohibente aut iter demorante incolumem legionem in Nantuatis, 
 inde in Allobroges perduxit ibique hiemavit. 
 
 7. His rebus gestis cum omnibus de causis Caesar pacatam Gal- i 
 Ham existimaret, superatis Belgis, expulsis Germanis, victis in Alpi- 
 bus Sedunis, atque ita inita hieme in Illyricum profectus esset, 
 quod eas quoque nationes adire et regiones cognoscere volebat, 
 subitum bellum in Gallia coortum est. Eius belli haec fuit causa. 2 
 P. Crassus adulescens cum legione septima proximus mare Ocea- 
 num in Andibus hiemabat. Is, quod in his locis inopia frumenti 3 
 erat, praefectos tribunosque militum complures in finitimas civitates 
 frumenti commeatusque petendi causa dimisit, quo in numero est 4 
 T. Terrasidius missus in Esubios, M. Trebius Gallus in Coriosolitas, 
 Q. Velanius cum T. Silio in Venetos. 
 
 8. Huius est civitatis longe amplissima auctoritas omnis orae i 
 maritimae regionum earum, quod et naves habent Veneti plurimas, 
 quibus in Britanniam navigare consuerunt, et scientia atque usu 
 rerum nauticarum ceteros antecedunt, et in magno impetu maris 
 atque aperto, paucis portibus interiectis, quos tenent ipsi, om- 
 nes fere qui eo mari uti consuerunt habent vectigales'. Ab his fit 2 
 initium rctincndi Sili :itque Velani t:t si quos intercipere potuerunt,
 
 128 LATIN TEXT 
 
 quod per eos suos se obsides quos Crasso dedissent recuperaturos 
 
 3 existimabant. Horum auctoritate finitimi adducti, ut sunt Gallorum 
 subita et repentina consilia, eadem de causa Trebium Terrasidium- 
 que retinent ; et celeriter missis legatis per suos principes inter se 
 coniurant nihil nisi communi consilio acturos eundemque omnes 
 
 4 fortunae exitum esse laturos; reliquasque civitates sollicitant ut in 
 ea libertate quam a maioribus acceperint permanere, quam Roma- 
 
 5 norum servitutem perferre malint. Omni ora maritima celeriter ad 
 suam sententiam perducta communem legationem ad P. Crassum 
 mittunt, si velit suos recuperare, obsides sibi remittat. 
 
 1 9. Quibus de rebus Caesar a Crasso certior factus, quod ipse 
 aberat longius, naves interim longas aedificari in flumine Ligeri, 
 quod influit in Oceanum, remiges ex provincia institui, nautns gu- 
 
 2 bernatoresque comparari iubet. His rebus celeriter administratis 
 ipse, cum primum per anni tempus potuit, ad exercitum contendit. 
 
 5 Veneti reliquaeque item civitates cognito Caesaris adventu, siraul 
 quod quantum in se facinus admisissent intellegebant, legates, quod 
 nomen ad omnes nationes sanctum inviolatumque semper fuisset, 
 retentos ab se et in vincula coniectos, pro magnitudine periculi 
 bellum parare, et maxime ea quae ad usum navium pertinent pro- 
 videre instituunt, hoc maiore spe quod multum natura loci confi- 
 
 4 debant. Pedestria esse itinera concisa aestuariis, navigationem 
 impeditam propter inscientiam locorum paucitatemque portuum 
 
 5 sciebant, neque nostros exercitus propter frumenti inopiam diutius 
 
 6 apud se morari posse confidebant ; ac iam ut omnia contra opi- 
 nionem acciderent, tamen se plurimum navibus posse, Romanes 
 neque ullam facultatem habere navium neque eorum locorum ubi 
 
 7 bellum gesturi essent vada, portlis, insulas novisse ; ac longe aliani 
 esse navigationem in concfuso mari atque in vastissimo atque aper- 
 
 8 tissimo Oceano perspiciebant. His initis consiliis oppida muniunt, 
 frumenta ex agris in oppida comportant, naves in Venetiam, ubi 
 Caesarem primum bellum gesturum constabat, quam plurimas pos- 
 
 9 sunt cogunt. Socios sibi ad id bellum Osismos, Lexobios, Nam- 
 netes, Ambianos, Morinos, Diablintes, Menapios adsciscunt; auxilhi 
 ex Britannia, quae contra eas regiones posita est, arcessunt. 
 
 i 10. Erant hae difficultates belli gerendi quas supra ostendimus.
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 129 
 
 sed multa Caesarem tamen ad id bellum incitabant: iniuriae reten 2 
 torum equitum Romanorum, rebel! io facta post deditionem, defectio 
 datis obsidibus, tot civitatum coniuratio, in primis ne hac parte 
 neglecta reliquae nationes sibi idem licere arbitrarentur. Itaque*3 
 cum intellegeret omnes fere Gallos novis rebus studere et ad bellum 
 mobiliter celeriterque excitnri, mnnes autem homines natura liber- 
 tati studere et condicionem servitutis odisse, priusquam plures civi 
 tales conspirarent. partiendum sibi ac latius distribuendumexercitum 
 putavit. 
 
 u. Itaque T. Labienum legatum in Treveros, qui proximi flumini i 
 Rheno sunt, cum equitatu mittit. Huic mandat Remos reliquosque 2 
 Belgas adeat atque in officio contineat ; Germanosque, qui auxilio a 
 Belgis arcessiti dicebantur, si per vim navibus flumen transire co- 
 nentur, prohibeat. P. Crassum cum cohortibus legionariis xn et 3 
 magno numero equitatus in Aquitaniam proficisci iubet, ne ex his 
 nationibus auxilia in Galliam mittantur ac tantae nationes coniun- 
 gantur. Q. Titurium Sabinum legatum cum legionibus tribus in 4 
 Venellos, Coriosolitas Lexobiosque mittit, qui earn manum disti- 
 nendam curet. D. Brutum adulescentem classi Gallicisque navibus, 5 
 quas ex Pictonibus et Santonis reliquisque pacatis regionibus con- 
 venire iusserat, praeficit et cum primum posset in Venetos proficisci 
 iubet. Ipse eo pedestribus copiis contendit. 
 
 12. Erant eius modi fere situs oppidorum ut posita in extremis i 
 lingulis promunturiisque neque pedibus aditum haberent, cum ex 
 alto se aestus incitavisset, quod bis accidit cotidie semper horarum 
 duodenarum spatio, neque navibus, quod rursus minuente aestu 
 naves in vadis adflictarentur. Ita utraque re oppidorum oppugnatio 2 
 impediebatur ; ac si quando, magnitudine operis forte superati ex- 
 truso mari aggere ac molibus atque his oppidi moenibus adaequatis, 
 suis fortunis desperare coeperant, magno numero navium adpulso, 
 cuius rei summam facultatem habebant, sua deportabant omnia 
 seque in proxima oppida recipiebant ; ibi se rursus isdem oportuni- 
 tatibus loci defendebant. Haec eo facilius magnam partem aestatis 3 
 faciebant, quod nostrae naves tempestatibus detinebantur, summn- 
 que erat vasto atque aperto mari, magnis aestibus, raris ac prope 
 nullis portibus, difficultas navigandi. 
 9
 
 T3O LATIN TEXT 
 
 1 13. Nanique ipsoruin naves ad hunc moduin factae arVnataeqne 
 erant : carinae aliquanto planiores quam nostrarum navium, quo 
 
 2 facilius vada ac decessum aestus excipere possent ; prorae admodum 
 erectae atque item puppes, ad magnitudinem fluctuum tempesta-- 
 
 3 tumque adcommodatae ; naves totae factae ex robore ad quamvis 
 vim et contumeliam perferendam ; transtra ex pedalibus in altitu- 
 dinem trabibus confixa clavis ferreis digiti pollicis crassitudine ; 
 
 4 ancorae pro funibus ferreis catenis revinctae ; pelles pro velis alu- 
 taeque tenuiter confectae, hae sive propter lini inopiam atque eius 
 usus inscientiam sive eo, quod est magis veri simile, quod tantas 
 tempestates Oceani tantosque impetus ventorum sustineri ac tanta 
 onera navium regi velis non satis commode posse arbitrabantur. 
 
 5 Cum his navibus nostrae classi eius modi congressus erat ut una 
 celeritate et pulsu remorum praestaret; reliqua pro loci natura, pro 
 
 6 vi tempestatum, illis essent aptiora et adcommoclatiora. Neque 
 enim his nostrae rostro nocere poterant (tanta in iis erat firmitudo) 
 neque propter altitudinem facile telum adigebatur, et eadem cle 
 
 7 causa minus commode copulis cdntinebantur. Accedebat ut, cum 
 saevire ventus coepisset et se vento dedissent, et tempestatem fer- 
 rent facilius et in vadis consisterent tutius et ab aestu relictae nihil 
 saxa et cautes timerent ; quarum rerum omnium nostris navibus 
 casus erant extimescendi. 
 
 r 14. Compluribus expugnatis oppidis Caesar, ubi intellexit frustra 
 tantum laborem sumi neque hostium fugam captis oppidis reprimi 
 
 2 neque iis noceri posse, statuit exspectandam classem. Quae ubi 
 coavenit ac primum ab hostibus visa est, circiter ccxx naves eorum 
 paratissimae atque omni genere armorum ornatissimae profectae ex 
 
 3 portu nostris adversae constiterunt ; neque satis Bruto, qui classi 
 praeerat, vel tribunis militum centurionibusque, quibus singulae 
 naves erant attributae, constabat quid agerent aut quam rationem 
 
 4 pugnae insisterent. Rostro enim noceri non posse cognoverant ; 
 turribus autem excitatis tamen has altitudo puppium ex barbaris 
 navibus superabat, ut neque ex inferiore loco satis commode tela 
 
 5 adigi possent et missa a Gallis gravius acciderent. Una erat magno 
 usui res praeparata ab nostris, falces praeacutae insertae adfixae- 
 
 fi que longuriis non absimili forma muralium falcium. His cum funes
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK 111 131 
 
 qui antemnas ad tnalos clestinabant comprehensi adductique erant, 
 navigio re mis incitato praerumpebantur. Quibus praecisis antem- ; 
 nae necessario concidebant, ut, cum uinnis Gallicis navibus spes in 
 veils armamentisque consisteret, his ereptis omnis usus navium uno 
 tempore eriperetur. Reliquum erat certamen positum in virtute, 8 
 qua nostri milites facile superabant atque eo magis, quod in con- 
 spectu Caesaris atque omnis exercitus res gerebatur, ut nullum 
 paulo fortius factum latere posset; omnes enim colles ac loca supe- 9 
 riora, unde erat propinquus despectus in mare, ab exercitu tene- 
 bantur. 
 
 15. Deiectis, ut diximus, antemnis, cum singulas binae ac ternae i 
 naves circumsisterent, milites summa vi transcendere in hostium 
 naves contendebant. Quod postquam barbari fieri animadverterunt, 2 
 expugnatis compluribus navibus, cum ei rei nullum reperiretur 
 auxilium, fuga salutem petere contendebant. Ac iam conversis in 3 
 earn partem navibus quo ventus ferebat, tanta subito malacia ac 
 tranquillitas exstitit ut se ex loco movere non possent. Quac quidem 4 
 res ad negotium conficiendum maximae fuit oportunitati : nam 
 singulas nostri consectati expugnaverunt, ut perpaucae ex omni 
 numero noctis interventu ad terram pervenerint, cum ab hora fere 
 quarta usque ad solis occasum pugnaretur. 
 
 16. Quo proelio bellum Venetorum totiusque orae maritimae con- i 
 fectum est. Nam cum omnis iuventus, omnes etiam gravioris 2 
 aetatis, in quibus aliquid consili aut dignitatis fuit, eo convenerant, 
 turn navium quod ubique fuerat unum in locum coegerant ; quibus 3 
 amissis reliqui neque quo se reciperent neque quern ad modum op- 
 pida defenderent habebant. Itaque se suaque omnia Caesari dedi- 
 derunt. In quos eo gravius Caesar vindicandum statuit, quo dili- 4 
 gentius in reliquum tempus a barbaris ius legatorum conservaretur. 
 Itaque omni senatu necato reliquos sub corona vendidit. 
 
 17. Dum haec in Venetis geruntur, Q. Titurius Sabinus cum iis i 
 copiis quas a Caesare acceperat in fines Venellorum pervenit. His 2 
 praeerat Viridovix ac summam imperi tenebat earum omnium civi- 
 tatum quae defecerant, ex quibus exercitum rnagnasque copias 
 coegerat ; atque his panels diebus Aulerci, Eburovices, Lexobiique 3 
 senatu suo interfecto, quod auctores belli esse nolebant, portas
 
 132 LATIN TEXT 
 
 clauserunt seque cum Vii idovice coniunxerunt ; magnaque praeterea 
 multitude undique ex Gallia perditorum hominum latronumque con- 
 venerat, quos spes praedandi studiumque bellandi ab agri cultura et 
 
 5 cotidiano labore revocabat. Sabinus idoneo omnibus rebus loco 
 castris sese tenebat, cum Viridovix contra eum duorum rnilium 
 spatio consedisset cotidieque productis copiis pugnandi potestatem 
 faceret, ut iam non solum hostibus in contemptionem Sabinus veni- 
 
 6 ret, sed etiam nostrorum militum vocibus nonnihil carperetur ; tan- 
 tamque opinionem timoris praebuit ut iam ad vallum castrorum 
 
 7 hostes accedere auderent. Id ea de causa faciebat quod cum tanta 
 multitudine hostium, praesertim eo absente qui summam imperi 
 teneret, nisi aequo loco aut oportunitate aliqua data, legato dimi- 
 candum non existimabat. 
 
 1 18. Hac confirmata opinione timoris idoneum quendam hominem 
 et callidum delegit, Gallum, ex iis quos auxili causa secum habebat. 
 
 2 Huic magnis praemiis pollicitationibusque persuadet uti ad hostes 
 
 3 transeat, et quid fieri velit edocet. Qui ubi properfuga ad eos venit, 
 timorem Romanorum proponit ; quibus angustiis ipse Caesar a Ve- 
 
 4 netis prematur docet; neque longius abesse quin proxima nocte 
 Sabinus clam ex castris exercitum educat et ad Caesarem auxili 
 
 5 ferendi causa proficiscatur. Quod ubi auditum est, conclamant 
 omnes occasionem negoti bene gerendi amittendam non esse, ad 
 
 6 castra iri oportere. Multae res ad hoc consilium Gallos hortaban- 
 tur: superiorum dierum Sabini cunctalio, perfugae confirmatio, ino- 
 pia cibariorum, cui rei parum diligenter ab iis erat provisum, spes 
 Venetici belli, et quod fere libenter homines id quod volunt credunt. 
 
 7 His rebus adducti non prius Viridovicem reliquosque duces ex con- 
 cilio dimittunt, quam ab his sit concessum arma uti capiant et ad 
 castra contendant. Qua re concessa laeti ut explorata victoria, 
 sarmentis virgultisque collectis quibus fossas Romanorum com- 
 pleant, ad castra pergunt. 
 
 1 19. Locus erat castrorum editus et paulatim ab imo acclivjs cir- 
 citer pass.us mille. Hue magno cursu contenderunt, ut quam mini- 
 mum spati ad se colligendos armandosque Romanis daretur, exani- 
 
 2 matique pervenerunt. Sabinus suos hortatus cupientibus signum 
 dat. Impeditis hostibus propter ea quae ferebant onera, subito
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 133 
 
 duabus portis eruptionem fieri iubet. Factum est oportunitate loci, 3 
 hostium inscientia ac defatigatione, virtute militum et superiorum 
 pugnarum exercitatione, ut ne unum quidem nostrorum impetum 
 ferrent ac statim terga verterent. Quos impeditos integris viribus 4 
 milites nostri consecuti mngnum numerum eorum occiderunt; re- 
 liquos equites consectati paucos, qui ex fuga evaserant, reliquerunt. 
 Sic uno tempore et de navali pugna Sabinus et de Sabini victoria 5 
 Caesar est certior factus ; civitatesque omnes se statim Titurio 
 dediderunt. Nam ut ad bella suscipienda Gallorum alacer ac 6 
 promptus est animus, sic mollis ac minime resistens ad calamitates 
 perferendas mens eorum est. 
 
 20. Eodem fere tempore P. Crassus cum in Aquitaniam pervenis- i 
 set, quae pars, ut ante dictum est, et regionum latitudine et multi- 
 tudine hominum ex tertia parte Galliae est aestimanda, cum intel- 
 legeret in iis locis sibi belluin gerendum ubi paucis ante annis L. 
 Valerius Praeconinus legatus exercitu pulso interfectus esset, atque 
 unde L. Mallius proconsul impedimentis amissis profugisset, non 
 mediocrem sibi diligentiam adhibendam intellegebat. Itaque re 2 
 frumentaria provisa, auxiliis equitatuque comparato, multis prae- 
 terea viris fortibus Tolosa, Carcasone, Narbone, quae sunt civitates 
 Galliae provinciae finitimae his regionibus, nominatim evocatis, in 
 Sotiatium fines exercitum introduxit. Cuius adventu cognito Sotiates 3 
 magnis copiis coactis equitatuque, quo plurimum valebant, in itinere 
 agmen nostrum adorti primum equestre proelium commiserunt ; de- 4 
 inde equitatu suo pulso atque insequentibus nostris, subito pede- 
 stres copias, quas in convalle in insidiis conlocaverant, ostenderunt. 
 Hi nostros disiectos adorti proelium renovarunt. 
 
 21. Pugnatum est diu atque acriter, cum Sotiates superioribus i 
 victoriis freti in sua virtute totius Aquitaniae salutem positam puta- 
 rent ; nostri autem quid sine imperatore et sine reliquis legionibus 
 adulescentulo duce efficere possent perspici cuperent ; tandem con- 
 fecti vulneribus hostes terga vertere. Quorum magno numero in- 2 
 terfecto Crassus ex itinere oppidum Sotiatium oppugnare coepit. 
 Quibus fortiter resistentibus vineas turresque egit. Illi, alias erup- 3 
 tione temptata, alias cuniculis ad aggerem vineasque actis, cuius rei 
 sunt longe peritissimi Aquitani, propterea quod multis locis apud
 
 134 LATIN TEXT 
 
 eos aerariae secturaeque sunt, ubi diligentia nostrorum nihil his 
 rebus profici posse intellexerunt, legates ad Crassum mittunt, seque 
 in deciitionem ut recipiat petunt. Qua re impetrata, arma tradere 
 iussi, faciunt. 
 
 1 22. Atque in ea re omnium nostrorum intentis animis, alia ex 
 parte oppidi Adiatunnus, qui summam imperi tenebat, cum DC de- 
 
 2 votis, quos illi' soldurios appellant, quorum haec est condicio uti 
 omnibus in vita commodis una cum iis fruantur quorum se ami- 
 citiae dediderint; si quid his per vim accidat, aut eundem casum 
 
 3 una ferant aut sibi mortem consciscant ; neque adhuc hominum 
 memoria repertus est quisquam qui, eo interfecto cuius se amicitiae 
 
 4 devovisset, mortem recusaret, cum his Adiatunnus eruptionem 
 facere conatus, clamore ab ea parte munitionis sublato, cum ad 
 arma milites concurrissent vehementerque ibi pugnatum esset, re- 
 pulsus in oppidum tamen uti eadem deditionis condicione uteretur 
 a Crasso impetravit. 
 
 1 23. Armis obsidibusque acceptis Crassus in fines Vocatium et 
 
 2 Tarusatium profectus est. Turn vero barbari cominoti, quod op- 
 pidum et natura loci et manu munitum paucis diebus quibus eo 
 ventum erat expugnatum cognoverant, legates quoqueversus dimit- 
 tere, coniurare, obsides inter se dare, copias parare coeperunt. 
 
 3 Mittuntur etiam ad eas civitates legati quae sunt citerioris Hispaniae 
 
 4 finitimae Aquitaniae ; inde auxilia ducesque arcessuntur. Quorum 
 adventu magna cum auctoritate et magna cum hominum multitudine 
 
 5 bellum gerere conantur. Duces vero ii deliguntur qui una cum Q. 
 Sertorio omnes annos fuerant summamque scientiam rei militaris 
 
 6 habere existimabantur. Hi consuetudine populi Romani loca capere, 
 
 7 castra munire, commeatibus nostros intercludere instituunt. Quod 
 ubi Crassus animadvertit, suas copias propter exiguitatem non 
 facile diduci, hostem et vagari et vias obsidere et castris satis prae- 
 sidi relinquere, ob earn causam minus commode frumentum com- 
 meatumque sibi supportari, in dies hostium numerum augeri, non 
 
 8 cunctandum existimavit quin pugna decertaret. Hac re ad con- 
 silium delata, ubi omnes idem sentire intellexit, posterum diem 
 pugnae constituit. 
 
 i 24. Prima luce productis omnibus copiis, duplici acie instituta,
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK III 135 
 
 uuxiliis in inediam aciem coniectis, quid hostes cunsili caperuit ex 
 spectabat. Illi, etsi propter multitudinem et veterem belli gloriam 2 
 paucitatemque nostrorum se tuto dimicaturos existimabant, tamen 
 tutius esse arbitrabantur obsessis viis, commeatu intercluso, sine 
 ullo vulnere victoria potiri; et, si propter inopiam rei frumentariae 3 
 Romani sese recipere coepissent, impeditos in agmine et sub sarcinis 
 iam firmiore aniino adoriri cogitabant. Hoc consilio probato, ab du- 4 
 cibus productis Romanorum copiis, sese castris tenebant. Hac re 5 
 perspecta Crassus,cum sua cunctatione atque opinione timoris hostes 
 nostros milites alaciiores ad pugnandum effecissent, atque omnium 
 voces audirentur exspectari diutius non oportere quin ad castra iretur, 
 cohortatus suos omnibus cupientibus ad hostium castra contendit. 
 
 25. Ibi cum alii fossas complerent, alii multis telis coniectis de- i 
 fensores vallo munitionibusque depellerent, auxiliaresque, quibus ad 
 pugnam non multum Crassus confidebat, lapidibus telisque sub- 
 ministrandis et ad aggerem caespitibus comportandis speciem atque 
 opinionem pugnantium praeberent ; cum item ab hostibus constanter 
 ac non timide pugnaretur telaque ex loco superiore missa non fru- 
 stra acciderent, equites circumitis hostium castris Crasso renuntia- 2 
 verunt non eadem esse diligentia ab decumana porta castra munita 
 facilemque aditum habere. 
 
 26. Crassus equitum praefectos cohortatus ut magnis praemiis i 
 pollicitationibusque suos excitarent, quid fieri vellet ostendit. Illi, 2 
 ut erat imperatum, eductis iis cohortibus quae praesidio castris 
 relictae intritae ab labore erant et longiore itinere circumductis, ne 
 ex hostium castris conspici possent, omnium oculis mentibusque ad 
 pugnam intends, celeriter ad eas quas diximus munitiones pervene- 
 runt, atque his prorutis prius in hostium castris constiterunt quam -? 
 plane ab his videri aut quid rei gereretur cognosci posset. Turn 4 
 vero clamore ab ea parte audito nostri redintegratis viribus, quod 
 plerumque in spe victoriae accidere consuevit, acrius impugnare 
 coeperunt. Hostes undique circumventi, desperatis omnibus rebus, 5 
 se per munitiones deicere et fuga salutem petere contenderunt. 
 Quos equitatus apertissimis campis consectatus, ex milium L numero, 6 
 quae ex Aquitania Cantabrisque convenisse constabat, vix quarta 
 parte relicta, multa nocte se in castra recepit.
 
 136 LATIN TEXT 
 
 1 27. Hac audita pugna maxima pars Aquitaniae sese Crasso dedi- 
 dit obsidesque ultro misit; quo in numero fuerunt Tarbelli, Biger- 
 riones, Ptianii, Vocates, Tarusates, Elusates, Gates, Ausci, Garumni, 
 
 2 Sibuzates, Cocosates ; paucae ultimae nationes anni tempore con- 
 fisae, quod hiems suberat, hoc facere neglexerunt. 
 
 1 28. Eodem fere tempore Caesar, etsi prope exacta iam aestas 
 erat, tamen quod omni Gallia pacata Morini Menapiique supererant 
 qui in armis essent neque ad eum umquam legates de pace misis- 
 sent, arbitratus id bellum celeriter confici posse, eo exercitum duxit; 
 qui longe alia ratione ac reliqui Galli bellum gerere coeperunt. 
 
 2 Nam quod intellegebant maximas nationes quae proelio contendis- 
 sent pulsas superatasque esse, continentesque silvas ac paludes 
 
 3 habebant, eo se suaque omnia contulerunt. Ad quarum initium 
 silvarum cum Caesar pervenisset castraque munire instituisset, 
 neque hostis interim visus esset, dispersis in opere nostris subito ex 
 omnibus partibus silvae evolaverunt et in nostros impetum fecerunt. 
 
 4 Nostri celeriter arma ceperunt eosque in silvas reppulerunt, et com- 
 pluribus interfectis longius impeditioribus locis secuti paucos ex 
 suis deperdiderunt. 
 
 1 29. Reliquis deinceps diebus Caesar silvas caedere instituit et, ne 
 quis inermibus imprudentibusque militibus ab latere impetus fieri 
 posset, omnem earn materiam quae erat caesa conversam ad hostem 
 
 2 conlocabat et pro vallo ad utrumque latus exstruebat. Incredibili 
 celeritate magno spatio paucis diebus confecto, cum iam pecus 
 atque extrema impedimenta ab nostris tenerentur, ipsi densiores 
 silvas peterent, eius modi sunt tempestates consecutae uti opus 
 necessario intermitteretur et continuatione imbrium diutius sub 
 
 3 pellibus milites contineri non possent. Itaque vastatis omnibus 
 eorum agris, vicis aedificiisque incensis, Caesar exercitum reduxit et 
 in Aulercis Lexobiisque, reliquis item in civitatibus quae proxime 
 bellum fecerant, in hibernis conlocavit.
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR. BOOK IV 137 
 
 Caesar, Gallic War 
 
 BOOK IV 
 
 1. Ea quae secuta est hieme, qui fuit annus Cn. Pompeio, M. i 
 Crasso consulibus, Usipetes Germani et item Tencteri magna cum 
 multitudine hominum flumen Rhenum transierunt non longe a mari, 
 quo Rhenus influit. Causa transeundi fuit quod ab Suebis com- 2 
 plures annos exagitati bello premebantur et agri cultura prohibe- 
 bantur. Sueborum gens est longe maxima et bellicosissima 3 
 Germanorum omnium. Hi c pagos habere dicuntur, ex quibus 4 
 quotannis singula milia armatorum bellandi causa suis ex finibus 
 educunt. Reliqui, qui domi remanserunt, se atque illos alunt; hi 5 
 rursus invicem anno post in armis sunt, illi domi remanent. Sic 6 
 neque agri cultura nee ratio atque usus belli intermittitur. Sed 7 
 privati ac separati agri apud eos nihil est, neque longius anno re- 
 manere uno in loco colendi causa licet. Neque multum frumento, 8 
 sed maximam partem lacte atque pecore vivunt, multumque sunt in 
 venationibus ; quae res et cibi genere et cotidiana exercitatione et 9 
 libertate vitae, cum a pueris nullo officio aut disciplina adsuefacti 
 nihil omnino contra voluntatem faciant, et vires alit et immani cor- 
 porum magnitudine homines efficit. Atque in earn se consuetudi- 10 
 nem adduxerunt ut locis frigidissimis neque vestitus praeter pelles 
 haberent quicquam, quarum propter exiguitatem magna est corporis 
 pars aperta, et lavarentur in fluminibus. 
 
 2. Mercatoribus est aditus magis eo ut quae bello ceperint quibus i 
 vendant habeant, quam quo ullam rem ad se importari desiderent. 
 Quin etiam iumentis, quibus maxime Galli delectantur quaeque im- 2 
 penso parant pretio, Germani importatis non utuntur, sed quae sunt 
 apud eos nata, parva atque deformia, haec cotidiana exercitatione 
 summi ut sint laboris efficiunt. Equestribus proeliis saepe ex equis 3 
 desiliunt ac pedibus proeliantur, equosque eodem remanere vestigio 
 adsuefecerunt, ad quos se celeriter, cum usus est, recipiunt; neque 4 
 eorum moribus turpius quicquam aut inertius habetur quam ephip- 
 piis uti. Itaque ad quemvis numerum ephippiatorum equitum 5 
 quamvis pauci adire audent. Vinum ad se omnino importari non 6
 
 138 LATIN TEXT 
 
 patiuntur, quod ea re ad laborem ferendum remollescere homines 
 atqua effeminari arbitrantur. 
 
 r 3. Publice maximam putant esse laudem quam latissime ab suis 
 finibus vacate agros : hac re significari magnum numerum civitatum 
 
 2 suam vim sustinere non posse. Itaque una ex parte ab Suebis cir- 
 
 3 citer milia passum c agri vacare dicuntur. Ad alteram partem suc- 
 cedunt Ubii, quorum fuit civitas ampla atque florens, ut est captus 
 Germanorum. Hi paulo, quamquam sunt eiusdem generis, sunt 
 ceteris humaniores, propterea quod Rhenum attingunt, muliumque 
 ad eos mercatores ventitant, et ipsi propter propinquitatem Gallicis 
 
 4 sunt moribus adsuefacti. Hos cum Suebi multis saepe bellis ex- 
 perti propter amplitudinem gravitatemque civitatis finibus expellere 
 non potuissent, tamen vectigales sibi fecerunt ac multo humiliores 
 infirmioresque redegerunt. 
 
 1 4. In eadem causa fuerunt Usipetes et Tencteri, quos supra dixi- 
 mus, qui complures annos Sueborum vim sustinuerunt ; ad extre- 
 mum tamen agris expulsi et multis locis Germaniae triennium vagati 
 
 2 ad Rhenum pervenerunt. Quas regiones Menapii incolebant et ad 
 
 3 utr^mque ripam fluminis agros, aedificia, vicosque habebant; sed 
 tantae multitudinis adventu perterriti ex iis aedificiis quae trans 
 flumen habuerant demigraverunt et cis Rhenum dispositis praesidiis 
 
 4 Germanos transire prohibebant. Illi omnia experti, cum neque vi 
 contendere propter inopiam navium neque clam transire propter 
 
 5 custodias Menapiorum possent, reverti se in suas sedes regionesque 
 simulaverunt et tridui viam progress! rursus reverterunt, atque omni 
 hoc itinere una nocte equitatu confecto inscios inopinantesque 
 
 6 Menapios oppresserunt ; qui de Germanorum discessu per explora- 
 tores certiores facti sine metu trans Rhenum in suos vicos remi- 
 
 7 graverant. His interfectis navibusque eorum occupatis, priusquam 
 ea pars Menapiorum quae citra Rhenum ejat certior fieret, rlumen 
 transierunt atque omnibus eorum aedificiis occupatis reliquam par- 
 tem hiemis se eorum copiis aluerunt. 
 
 1 5. His de rebus Caesar certior factus et infirmitatem Gallorum 
 veritus, quod sunt in consiliis capiendis mobiles et novis plerumque 
 
 2 rebus student, nihil his committendum existimavit. Est enim hoc 
 Gallicae consuetudinis uti et viatores etiam invitos consistere
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 139 
 
 cogant, et quid quisque eorum de quaque re audierit aut cognoverit 
 quaerant; et mercatores in oppidis vulgus circumsistat, quibusque 
 ex regionibus veniant quasque ibi res cognoverint pronuntiare cogat. 
 His rumoribus atque auditionibus permoti de summis saepe rebus 3 
 consilia ineunt, quorum eos in vestigio paenitere necesse est, cum 
 incertis rumoribus serviant et plerique ad voluntatem eorum ficta 
 respondeant. 
 
 6. Qua consuetudine cognita Caesar, ne graviori bello occurreret, i 
 maturius quam consueverat ad exercitum proficiscitur. Eo cum 2 
 venisset, ea quae fore suspicatus erat facta cognovit : missas lega- 3 
 tiones ab nonnullis civitatibus ad Germanos invitatosque eos uti 
 ab Rheno discederent, omniaque quae postulassent ab se fore 
 parata. Qua spe adducti Germani latius iam vagabantur et in 4 
 fines Eburonum et .Condrusorum, qui sunt Treverorum clientes, 
 pervenerant. Principibus Galliae evocatis Caesar ea quae cogno- 5 
 verat dissimulanda sibi existimavit, eorumque animis permulsis 
 et confirmatis equitatuque imperato bellum cum Germanis gerere 
 constituit. 
 
 7. Re frumentaria comparata equitibusque delectis, iter in ea i 
 loca facere coepit quibus in locis esse Germanos audiebat. A qui- 2 
 bus cum paucorum dierum iter abesset, legati ab his venerunt, 
 quorum haec fuit oratio : Germanos neque priores populo Romano 3 
 bellum inferre neque tamen recusare, si lacessantur, quin armis con- 
 tendant, quod Germanorum consuetude sit a maioribus tradita, 
 quicumque bellum inferant, resistere neque deprecari. Haec tamen 4 
 dicere: venisse se invitos, eiectos domo ; si suam gratiam Romani 
 velint, posse iis utiles esse amicos ; vel sibi agros attribuant vel 
 patiantur eos tenere quos armis possederint; sese unis Suebis con- 5 
 cedere, quibus ne di quidem immortales pares esse possint; reliquum 
 quidem in terris esse neminem quern non superare possint. 
 
 8. Ad haec quae visum est Caesar respondit ; sed exitus fuit i 
 orationis : Sibi nullam cum his amicitiam esse posse si in Gallia 
 remanerent; neque verum esse qui suos fines tueri non potuerint 2 
 alienos occupare, neque ullos in Gallia vacare agros qui clari tantae 
 praesertim multitudini sine iniuria possint; sed licere, si velint, in 3 
 Ubiorum finibus considero, quorum sint logati apud se et de Sue-
 
 140 LATIN TEXT 
 
 borum iniuriis querantur et ab se auxilium petant: hoc se Ubiis im- 
 peraturum. 
 
 1 g. Legati haec se ad suos relaturos dixerunt et re deliberata post 
 diem tertium ad Caesarem reversuros; interea ne propius se castra 
 
 2 moveret petierunt. Ne id quidem Caesar ab se impetrari posse 
 
 3 dixit. Cognoverat enim magnam partem equitatus ab iis aliquot 
 diebus ante praedandi frumentandique causa ad Ambivaritos trans 
 Mosam missam ; hos exspectari equites atque eius rei causa moram 
 interponi arbitrabatur. 
 
 1 10. Mosa profluit ex monte Vosego, qui est in finibus Lingonum, 
 
 2 et parte quadam ex Rheno recepta quae appellatur Vacalus, insulam 
 efficit Batavorum, neque longius ab eo milibus passuum LXXX in 
 
 3 Oceanum influit. Rhenus autem oritur ex Lepontiis, qui Alpes in- 
 colunt, et longo spatio per fines Nantuatium, Helvetiorum, Sequano- 
 
 4 rum, Mediomatricorum, Tribocorum, Treverorum citatus fertur, et 
 ubi Oceano adpropinquat, in plures diffluit partes multis ingenti- 
 busque insulis effectis, quarum pars magna a feris barbarisque 
 
 5 nationibus incolitur, ex quibus sunt qui piscibus atque ovis avium 
 vivere existimantur, multisque capitibus in Oceanum influit. 
 
 1 II. Caesar cum ab hoste non amplius passuum xn milibus abes- 
 set, ut erat constitutum, ad eum legati revertuntur ; qui in itinere 
 
 2 congress! magnopere ne longius progrederetur orabant. Cum id 
 non impetrassent, petebant uti ad eos equites qui agmen antecessis- 
 sent praemitteret, eosque pugna prohiberet, sibique ut potestatem 
 
 3 faceret in Ubios legatos mittendi ; quorum si principes ac senatus 
 sibi iureiurando fidem fecisset, ea condicione quae a Caesare ferre 
 tur se usuros ostendebant : ad has res conficiendas sibi tridui spa- 
 
 4 tium daret. Haec omnia Caesar eodem illo pertinere arbitrabatur, 
 ut tridui mora interposita equites eorum qui abessent reverterentur ; 
 tamen sese non longius milibus passuum iv aquationis causa pro- 
 
 5 cessurum eo die dixit : hue postero die quam frequentissimi con- 
 
 venirent, ut de eorum postulatis cognosceret. Interim ad praefectos 
 qui cum omni equitatu antecesserant mittit qui nuntiarent ne hostes 
 proelio lacesserent ; et, si ipsi lacesserentur, sustinerent quoad ipse 
 cum exercitu propius accessisset. 
 
 1 12. At hostes ubi primum nostros equites conspexerunt, quorum
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 141 
 
 erat V milium numeius, cum ipsi non amplius DCCC equites haberent, 
 quod ii qui frumentandi causa erant trans Mosam profecti nondum 
 redierant, nihil timentibus nostris, quod legati eorum paulo ante a 
 Caesare discesserant atque is dies indutiis erat ab his petitus, im- 
 petu facto celeriter nostros perturbaverunt ; rursus iis resistentibus, 2 
 consuetudine sua ad pedes desiluerunt, subfossisque equis compluri- 
 busque nostris deiectis, reliquos in fugam coniecerunt atque ita 
 perterritos egerunt ut non prius fuga desisterent quam in conspec- 
 tum agminis nostri venissent. In eo proelio ex equitibus nostris 3 
 interficiuntur LXXIV, in his vir fortissimus, Piso Aquitanus, amplis- 4 
 simo genere natus, cuius avus in civitate sua regnum obtinuerat, 
 amicus ab senatu nostro appellatus. Hie cum fratri intercluso ab 5 
 hostibus auxilium ferret, ilium ex periculo eripuit; ipse equo vul- 
 nerato deiectus, quoad potuit fortissime restitit ; cum circumventus 6 
 multis vulneribus acceptis cecidisset, atque id frater, qui iam proelio 
 excesserat, procul animadvertisset, incitato equo se hostibus obtulit 
 atque interfectus est. 
 
 13. Hoc facto proelio Caesar neque iam sibi legates audiendos i 
 neque condiciones accipiendas arbitrabatur ab iis qui per dolum 
 atque insidias petita pace ultro bellum intulissent; exspectare vero, 2 
 dum hostium copiae augerentur equitatusque reverteretur, summae 
 dementiae esse iudicabat , et cognita Gallorum infirmitate, quantum 3 
 iam apud eos hostes uno proelio auctoritatis essent consecuti sen- 
 tiebat ; quibus ad consilia capienda nihil spati dandum existimabat. 
 His constitutis rebus et consilio cum legatis et quaestore communi- 4 
 cato, ne quern diem pugnae praetermitteret, oportunissima res ac- 
 cidit, quod postridie eius diei mane eadem et perfidia et simulatione 
 usi Germani frequentes, omnibus principibus maioribusque natu 
 adhibitis, ad eum in castra venerunt ; simul, ut dicebatur, sui pur- 5 
 gandi causa, quod contra atque esset dictum et ipsi petissent proe- 
 lium pridie commisissent, simul ut, si quid possent, de indutiis 
 fallendo impetrarent. Quos sibi Caesar oblatos gavisus illos reti- * 
 neri iussit; ipse omnes copias castris eduxit equitatumque, quod 
 recenti proelio perterritum esse existimabat, agmen subsequi iussit. 
 
 14. Acie triplici instituta et celeriter vin milium itinere confecto, i 
 prius ad hostium castra pervenit quam quid ageretur Germani sen-
 
 142 LATIN TEXT 
 
 2 tire possent. Qui omnibus rebus subito perterriti, et celeritate ad- 
 ventus nostri et discessu suorutn, neque consili habendi neque 
 arma capiendi spado dato perturbantur, copiasne adversus hostem 
 educere an castra defendere an fuga salutem petere praestaret. 
 
 3 Quorum timor cum fremitu et concursu significaretur, milites nostri 
 
 4 pristini diei perfidia incitati in castra inruperunt. Quo loco qui 
 celeriter arma capere potuerunt paulisper nostris restiterunt atque 
 
 5 inter carros impedimentaque proelium commiserunt ; at reliqua 
 multitude puerorum mulierumque (nam cum omnibus suis domo 
 excesserant Rhenumque transierant) passim fugere coepit ; ad quos 
 consectandos Caesar equitatum misit. 
 
 1 15. Germani post tergum clamore audito cum suos interfici vide- 
 rent, armis abiectis signisque militaribus relictis se ex castris eiece- 
 
 2 runt, et cum ad confluentem Mosae et Rheni pervenissent, reliqua 
 fuga desperata, magno numero interfecto, reliqui se in flumen prae- 
 cipitaverunt atque ibi timore, lassitudine, vi fluminis oppress! perie- 
 
 3 runt. Nostri ad unum omnes incolumes, perpaucis vulneratis, ex 
 tanti belli timore, cum hostium numerus capitum ccccxxx milium 
 
 4 fuisset, se in castra receperunt. Caesar iis quos in castris retinuerat 
 
 5 discedendi potestatem fecit. Illi supplicia cruciatusque Gallorum 
 veriti, quorum agros vexaverant, remanere se apud eum velle dixe- 
 runt. His Caesar libertatem concessit. 
 
 1 16. Germanico bello confecto multis de causis Caesar statuit sibi 
 Rhenum esse transeundum ; quarum ilia fuit iustissima, quod, cum 
 videret Germanos tam facile impelli ut in Galliam venirent, suis 
 quoque rebus eos timere voluit, cum intellegerent et posse et 
 
 2 audere populi Romani exercitum Rhenum transire. Accessit etiam 
 quod ilia pars equitatus Usipetum et Tencterorum quam supra com- 
 memoravi praedandi frumentandique causa Mosam transisse neque 
 proelio interfuisse post fugam suorum se trans Rhenum in fines 
 
 3 Sugambrorum receperat seque cum iis coniunxerat. Ad quos cum 
 Caesar nuntios misisset qui postularent eos qui sibi Galliaeque bel- 
 
 4 lutn intulissent sibi dederent, responderunt : Populi Romani impe- 
 rium Rhenum finire : si se invito Germanos in Galliam transire non 
 aequuin existimaret, cur sui quicquam esse imperi aut potestatis 
 
 5 trans Rhenum postularet? Ubii autem, qui uni ex Transrhenanis
 
 CAESAR, ^ALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 143 
 
 ad Caesarem legates miserant, amicitiam fecerant, obsides dede- 
 rant, magnopere orabant ut sibi auxilium ferret, quod graviter ab 
 Suebis premerentur; vel, si id facere occupationibus rei publicae 6 
 prohiberetur, exercitum modo Rhenum transportaret: id sibi ad 
 auxilium spemque reliqui temporis satis futurum. Tantum esse 7 
 nomen atque opinionem eius exercitus Ariovisto pulso et hoc novis- 
 simo proelio facto etiam ad ultimas Germanorum nationes, uti 
 opinione et amicitia populi Romani tuti esse possint. Navium 8 
 magnam copiam ad transportandum exercitum pollicebantur. 
 
 17. Caesar his de causis quas commemoravi Rhenum transire i 
 decreverat ; sed navibus transire neque satis tutum esse arbitraba- 
 tur, neque suae neque populi Romani dignitatis esse statuebat. 
 Itaque etsi summa difficultas faciendi pontis proponebatur propter 2 
 latitudinem, rapiditatem, altitudinemque fluminis, tamen id sibi 
 contendendum aut aliter non traducendum exercitum existimabat. 
 Rationem pontis hanc instituit. Tigna bina sesquipedalia paulum 3 
 ab imo praeacuta, dimensa ad altitudinem fluminis, intervallo pedum 
 duorum inter se iungebat. Haec cum machinationibus immissa in 4 
 ffumen defixerat festucisque adegerat, non sublicae modo derecte 
 ad perpendiculum, sed prone ac fastigate, ut secundum naturam 
 fluminis procumberent, his item contraria duo ad eundem modum 5 
 iuncta intervallo pedum quadragenum ab inferiore parte contra vim 
 atque impetum fluminis conversa statuebat. Haec utraque insuper 6 
 bipedalibus trabibus immissis, quantum eorum tignorum iunctura 
 distabat, binis utrimque fibulis ab extrema parte distinebantur ; qui- 
 bus disclusis atque in contrariam partem revinctis, tanta erat opens 7 
 firmitudo atque ea rerum natura ut, quo maior vis aquae se incitavis- 
 set, hoc artius inligata tenerentur. Haec derecta materi.a iniecta 8 
 contexebantur ac longuriis cratibusque consternebantur ; ac nihilo 9 
 setius sublicae et ad inferiorem partem fluminis oblique agebantur, 
 quae pro ariete subiectae et cum omni opere coniunctae vim fluminis 
 exciperent, et aliae item supra pontem mediocri spatio, ut, si arborum to 
 trunci sive naves deiciendi operis causa essent a barbaris missae, his 
 defensoribus eartun rerum vis minueretur, neu ponti nocerent. 
 
 18. Diebus decem quibus materia coepta erat comportari omni i 
 opere effecto exercitus traducitur. Caesar ad utramque partem 2
 
 144 LATIN TEXT, 
 
 3 pontis firmo praesidio relicto in fines Sugambrorum contendit. In- 
 terim a compluribus civitatibus ad eum legati veniunt ; quibus 
 pacem atque amicitiam petentibus liberaliter respondet obsidesque 
 
 4 ad se adduci iubet. At Sugambri ex eo tempore quo pons institui 
 coeptus est fuga comparata, hortantibus iis quos ex Tencteris atque 
 Usipetibus apud se habebant, finibus suis excesserant suaque omnia 
 exportaverant seque in solitudinem ac silvas abdiderant. 
 
 1 19. Caesar paucos dies in eorum finibus moratus, omnibus vicis 
 aedificiisque incensis frumentisque succisis, se in fines Ubiorum 
 recepit, atque iis auxilium suum pollicitus si ab Suebis premerentur, 
 
 2 haec ab iis cognovit : Suebos, posteaquam per exploratores pontem 
 fieri comperissent, more suo concilio habito nuntios in omnes partes 
 dimisisse, uti de oppidis demigrarent, liberos, uxores, suaque omnia 
 in silvis deponerent, atque omnes qui arma ferre possent unum in 
 
 3 locum convenirent : hunc esse delectum medium fere regionum 
 earum quas Suebi obtinerent ; hie Romanorum adventum exspectare 
 
 4 atque" ibi decertare constituisse. Quod ubi Caesar comperit, omni- 
 bus rebus iis confectis quarum rerum causa traducere exercitum 
 constituerat, ut Germanis metum iniceret, ut Sugambros ulcisceretur, 
 ut Ubios obsidione liberaret, diebus omnino xvm trans Rhenum 
 consumptis, satis et ad laudem et ad utilitatem profectum arbitratus 
 se in Galliam recepit pontemque rescidit. 
 
 1 20. Exigua parte aestatis reliqua Caesar, etsi in his locis, quod 
 omnis Gallia ad septentriones vergit, maturae sunt hiemes, tamen 
 in Britanniam proficisci contendit, quod omnibus fere Gallicis bellis 
 
 2 hostibus nostris inde subministrata auxilia intellegebat et, si tempus 
 anni ad bellum gerendum deficeret, tamen magno sibi usui fore 
 arbitrabatur, si modo insulam adisset, genus hominum perspexisset, 
 loca, portus, aditus cognovisset; quae omnia fere Gallis erant in- 
 
 3 cognita. Neque enim temere praeter mercatores illo adit quisquam, 
 neque iis ipsis quicquam praeter oram maritimam atque eas regiones 
 
 4 quae sunt contra Gallias notum est. Itaque evocatis ad se undique 
 mercatoribus, neque quanta esset insulae magnitudo, neque quae 
 aut quantae nationes incolerent, neque quern usum belli haberent 
 aut quibus institutis uterentur, neque qui essent ad maiorem navium 
 multitudinem idonei portus reperire poterat.
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 145 
 
 21. Ad haec cognoscenda, priusquam periculum faceret, idoneum i 
 esse arbitratus C. Volusenum cum navi longa praetnittit. Huic 2 
 mandat ut exploratjs omnibus rebus ad se quam primum revertatur. 
 Ipse cum omnibus copiis in Morinos proficiscitur, quod inde erat 3 
 brevissimus in Britanniam traiectus. Hue naves undique ex finiti- 4 
 mis regionibus, et quam superiore aestate ad Veneticum bellum 
 effecerat classem, iubet convenire. Interim consilio eius cognito et 5 
 per mercatores perlato ad Britannos, a compluribus eius insulae 
 civitatibus ad eum legati veniunt qui polliceantur obsides dare 
 atque imperio populi Romani obtemperare. Quibus auditis liberali- 6 
 ter pollicitus hortatusque ut in ea sententia permanerent, eos domum 
 remittit, et cum iis una Commium, quern ipse Atrebatibus superatis 7 
 regem ibi constituerat, cuius et virtutem et consilium probabat et 
 quern sibi fidelem esse arbitrabatur cuiusque auctoritas in his 
 regionibus magni habebatur, mittit. Huic imperat quas possit 8 
 adeat civitates, horteturque ut populi Romani fidem sequantur, 
 seque celeriter eo venturum nuntiet. Volusenus perspectis re^ioni- 9 
 bus omnibus quantum ei facultatis dari potuit, qui ex navi egredi ac 
 se barbaris committere non auderet, quinto die ad Caesarem rever- 
 titur quaeque ibi perspexisset renuntiat. 
 
 22. Dum in his locis Caesar navium parandarum causa moratur, i 
 ex magna parte Morinorum ad eum legati venerunt qui se de supe- 
 rioris temporis consilio excusarent, quod homines barbari et nostrae 
 consuetudinis imperiti bellum populo Romano fecissent, seque ea 
 quae imperasset facturos pollicerentur. Hoc sibi Caesar satis opor- 2 
 tune accidisse arbitratus, quod neque post tergum hostem relinquere 
 volebat neque belli gerendi propter anni tempus facultatem habebat 
 neque has tantularum rerum occupationes sibi Britanniae antepo- 
 nendas iudicabat, magnum iis numerum obsiclum imperat. Quibus 
 adductis eos in fidem recepit. Navibus circiter LXXX onerariis 3 
 coactis constratisque, quot satis esse ad duas transportandas legio- 
 nes existimabat, quidquicl praeterea navium longarum habebat, id 
 quaestori, legatis, praefectisque distribuit. Hue accedebant xvm 4 
 onerariae naves, quae ex eo loco a milibus passuum vm vento tene- 
 bantur quo minus in eundem portum venire possent; has equitibus 
 distribuit. Reliquum exercitum Q. Titurio S.ibino et L. Auruncu- 5
 
 146 . LATIN TEXT 
 
 leio Cottae legatis in Menapios atque in eos pages Morinorum a 
 6 quibus ad eum legati non venerant ducendum dedit ; P. Sulpicium 
 Rufum legatum cum eo praesidio quod satis esse arbitrabatur 
 portum tenere iussit. 
 
 1 23. His constitutis rebus nactus idoneam ad navigandum tempes- 
 tatem tertia fere vigilia naves solvit, equitesque in ulteriorem portum 
 
 2 progredi et naves conscendere et se sequi iussit. A quibus cum paulo 
 tardius esset administratum, ipse hora diei circiter quarta cum primis 
 navibus Britanniam attigit atque ibi in omnibus collibus expositas 
 
 3 hostium copias armatas conspexit. Cuius loci haec erat natura at- 
 que ita montibus angustis mare continebatur uti ex locis superiori- 
 
 4 bus in litus telum adigi posset. Hunc ad egrediendum nequaquam 
 idoneum locum arbitratus, dum reliquae naves eo convenirent ad 
 
 5 horam nonam in ancoris exspectavit. Interim legatis tribunisque 
 militum convocatis, et quae ex Voluseno cognovisset et quae fieri 
 vellet ostendit, monuitque, ut rei militaris ratio maximeque ut mari- 
 timae res postularent (ut quae celerem atque instabilem motuin 
 haberent), ad nutum et ad tempus omnes res ab iis administra- 
 
 6 rentur. His dimissis et ventum et aestum uno tempore nactus 
 secundum, dato signo et sublatis ancoris circiter milia passuum vn 
 ab eo loco progressus, aperto ac piano litore naves constituit. 
 
 1 24. At barbari consilio Romanorum cognito, praemisso equitatu 
 et essedariis, quo plerumque genere in proeliis uti consuerunt, reli- 
 
 2 quis copiis subsecuti nostros navibus egredi prohibebant. Erat ob 
 has causas summa difficultas quod naves propter magnitudinem nisi 
 in alto constitui non poterant, militibus autem, ignotis locis, impe- 
 ditis manibus, magno et gravi onere armorum oppressis, simul et de 
 navibus desiliendum et in fluctibus consistendum et cum hostibus 
 
 3 erat pugnandum ; cum illi aut ex arido aut paulum in aquam pro- 
 gressi omnibus membris expeditis, notissimis locis, audacter tela 
 
 4 coicerent et equos insuefactos incitarent. Quibus rebus nostri per- 
 territi atque huius omnino generis pugnae impend non eadem ala- 
 critate ac studio quo in pedestribus uti proeliis consuerant ute- 
 bantur. 
 
 i 25. Qu(.d ubi Caesar animadvertit, naves longas, quarum et 
 species erat barbaris inusitatior et motus ad usum expeclitior,
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, HOOK IV 147 
 
 paulum removed ab onerariis navibus et remis incitari et ad latus 
 apertum hostium constitui, atque inde fundis, sagittis, tormentis 
 hostes propelli ac submoveri iussit ; quae res magno usui nostris 
 fuit. Main et navium figura et remorum motu et inusitato genere 2 
 tormentorum permoti barbari constiterunt ac paulum modo pedem 
 rettulerunt. At nostris militibus cunctantibus maxime propter alti- 3 
 tudinem maris, qui decimae legionis aquilam ferebat obtestatus deos 
 ut ea res legioni feliciter eveniret, " Desilite," inquit, " commilitones, 
 nisi vultis aquilam hostibus prodere : ego certe meum rei publicae 
 ntque imperatori officium praestitero." Hoc cum voce magna dixis- 4 
 set, se ex navi proiecit atque in hostes aquilam ferre coepit. Turn 5 
 nostri cohortati inter se ne tantum dedecus admitteretur, universi 
 ex navi desiluerunt. Hos item ex proximis navibus cum conspexis- 6 
 sent, subsecuti hostibus adpropinquarunt. 
 
 26. Pugnatum est ab utrisque acriter. Nostri tamen, quod neque i 
 ordines servare neque firmiter insistere neque signa subsequi pote- 
 rant, atque alius alia ex navi quibuscuinque signis occurrerat se 
 adgregabat, magnopere perturbabantur ; hostes vero notis omnibus 2 
 vadis, ubi ex litore aliquos singulares ex navi egredientes conspexe- 
 rant, incitatis equis impeditos adoriebantur, plures paucos clrcum- 3 
 sistebant, alii ab latere aperto in universos tela coiciebant. Quod 4 
 cum animadvertisset Caesar, scaphas longarum navium, item specu- 
 latoria navigia militibus compleri iussit, et quos laborantes conspexe- 
 rat his subsidia submittebat. Nostri simul in arido constiterunt, 5 
 suis omnibus consecutis in hostes impecum fecerunt atque eos in 
 fugam dederunt; neque longius prosequi potuerunt, quod equites 
 cursum tenere atque insulam capere non potuerant. Hoc unum ad 
 pristinam fortunam Caesari defuit. 
 
 27. Hostes proelio superati, simul atque se ex fuga receperunt, i 
 stitim ad Caesarem legatos de pace miserunt ; obsides daturos 
 qn.ieque imperasset sese facturos polliciti sunt. Una cum his 2 
 legatis Commius Atrebas venit, quem supra demonstraveram a 
 Caesare in Britanniam praemissum. Hunc illi e navi fgressum, .; 
 cum ad eos oratoris modo Caesaris mandata deferret, comprehen- 
 derant atque in vincula coniecerant ; turn proelio facto remiserunt. 
 In petenda pace eius rei culpam in multitudinem contulerunt, et 4
 
 148 LATIN TEXT 
 
 5 propter imprudentiam ut ignosceretur petiverunt. Caesar questus 
 quod, cum ultro in continentem legatis missis pacem ab se petissent, 
 bellum sine causa intulissent, ignoscere imprudentiae dixit obsides- 
 
 6 que imperavit; quorum illi partem statim dederunt, partem ex 
 longinquioribus locis arcessitam paucis post diebus sese daturos 
 
 7 dixerunt. Interea suos remigrare in agros iusserunt, principesque 
 undique convenire et se civitatesque suas Caesari commendare 
 coeperunt. 
 
 1 28. His rebus pace confirmata, post diem quartum quam est in 
 Britanniam ventum, naves xvm de quibus supra demonstratum est, 
 quae equites sustulerant, ex superiore portu leni* vento solverunt. 
 
 2 Quae cum adpropinquarent Britanniae et ex castris viderentur, tanta 
 tempestas subito coorta est ut nulla earum cursum tenere posset, 
 sed aliae eodem unde erant profectae referrentur, aliae ad inferiorem 
 partem insulae, quae est propius solis occasum, magno suo cum 
 
 3 periculo deicerentur; quae tamen ancoris iactis cum fluctibus com- 
 plerentur, necessario adversa nocte in altum provectae continentem 
 petierunt. 
 
 1 29. Eadem nocte accidit ut esset luna plena, qui dies maritimos 
 aestus maximos in Oceano efficere consuevit, nostrisque id erat in- 
 
 2 cognitum. Ita uno tempore et longas naves, quibus Caesar exercitum 
 transportandum curaverat quasque in aridum subduxerat, aestus 
 complebat, et onerarias, quae ad ancoras erant deligatae, tempestas 
 adflictabat, neque ulla nostris facultas aut administrandi aut auxili- 
 
 3 andi dabatur. Compluribus navibus fractis reliquae cum essent 
 funibus, ancoris, reliquisque armamentis amissis ad navigandum 
 inutiles, magna, id quod necesse erat accidere, totius exercitus 
 
 4 perturbatio facta est. Neque enim naves erant aliae quibus repor- 
 tari possent; et omnia deerant quae ad reficiendas eas usui sunt ; 
 et, quod omnibus constabat hiemari in Gallia oportere, frumentum 
 his in locis in hiemem provisum non erat. 
 
 i 30. Quibus rebus cognitis principes Britanniae, qui post proelium 
 factum ad ea quae iusserat Caesar facienda convenerant, inter se 
 conlocuti, cum et equites et naves et frumentum Romanis deesse 
 intellegerent, et paucitatem militum ex castrorum exiguitate cogno- 
 scerent, quae hoc erant etiam angustiora quod sine impedimentis
 
 CAESAR, GALLIC WAR, BOOK IV 149 
 
 Caesar legiones transportaverat, optimum factu esse oluxerunt, 2 
 rebellione facta, frumento commeatuque nostros prohibere et rem in 
 hiemem producere, quod his superatis aut reditu interclusis nemi- 
 nem postea belli inferendi causa in Britanniam transiturum confide- 
 bant. Itaque rursus coniuratione facta paulatim ex castris disce- 3 
 dere et suos clam ex agris deducere coeperunt. 
 
 31. At Caesar etsi nondum eorum consilia cognoverat, tamen et i 
 ex eventu navium suarum et ex eo quod obsides dare intermiserant, 
 fore id quod accidit suspicabatur. Itaque ad omnes casus subsidia 2 
 comparabat. Nam et frumentum ex agris cotidie in castra confere- 
 bat, et quae gravissime adflictae erant naves, earum materia atque 
 acre ad reliquas reficiendas utebatur, et quae ad eas res erant usui 
 ex continenti comparari iubebat. Itaque cum summo studio a mili- 3 
 tibus administraretur, xn navibus amissis, reliquis ut navigari satis 
 commode posset effecit. 
 
 32. Dum ea geruntur, legione ex consuetudine una frumentatum i 
 missa, quae appellabatur septima, neque ulla ad id tempus belli su- 
 spicione interposita, cum pars hominum in agris remaneret, pars 
 etiam in castra ventitaret, ii qui pro portis castrorum in statione 
 erant Caesari nuntiaverunt pulverem maiorem quam consuetude 
 ferret in ea parte videri quam in partem legio iter fecisset. Caesar 2 
 id quod erat suspicatus, aliquid novi a barbaris initum consili, co- 
 hortes quae in stationibus erant secum in earn partem proficisci, ex 
 reliquis duas in stationem cohortes succedere, reliquas armari et 
 confestim sese subs'equi iussit. Cum paulo longius a castris pro- 3 
 cessisset, suos ab hostibus premi atque aegre sustinere et conferta 
 legione ex omnibus partibus tela coici animadvertit. Nam quod 4 
 omni ex reliquis partibus demesso frumento pars una erat reliqua, 
 suspicati hostes hue nostros esse ventures noctu in silvis delitue- 
 rant ; turn disperses depositis armis in metendo occupatos subito 5 
 adorti, paucis interfectis reliquos incertis ordinibus perturbaverant, 
 simul equitatu atque essedis circumdederant. 
 
 33. Genus hoc est ex essedis pugnae. Primo per omnes partes i 
 perequitant et tela coiciunt atque ipso terrore equorum et strepitu 
 rotarum ordines plerumque perturbant ; et cum se inter equitum 
 turmas insinuaverunt, ex essedis desiliunt et pedibus proeliantur.
 
 150 LATIN TEXT 
 
 2 Aurigae interim paulatim ex proelio excedunt atque ita currus con- 
 locant ut, si illi a multitudine hostium premantur, expeditum ad 
 
 3 suos receptum habeant. Ita mobilitatem equitum, stabilitatem pe- 
 ditum in proeliis praestant ; ac tantum usu cotidiano et exercitatione 
 efficiunt uti in declivi ac praecipiti loco incitatos equos sustinere et 
 brevi moderari ac flectere, et per temonem percurrere et in iugo in- 
 sistere et se inde in currus citissime recipere consuerint. 
 
 1 34. Quibus rebus perturbatis nostris [novitate pugnae] tempore 
 oportunissimo Caesar auxilium tulit; namque eius adventu hostes 
 
 2 constiterunt, nostri se ex timore receperunt. Quo facto ad laces- 
 sendum hostem et ad committendum proelium alienum esse tempus 
 arbitratus, suo se loco continuit et brevi tempore intermisso in ca- 
 
 3 stra legiones reduxit. Dum haec geruntur, nostris omnibus occu- 
 
 4 patis, hostes qui erant in agris reliqui discesserunt. Secutae sunt 
 continues complures dies tempestates, quae et nostros in castris 
 
 5 continerent et hostem a pugna prohiberent. Interim barbari nun. 
 tios in omnes partes dimiserunt paucitatemque nostrorum militum 
 suis praedicaverunt, et quanta praedae faciendae atque in perpe- 
 tuum sui liberandi facultas daretur, si Romanes castris expulissent, 
 
 6 demonstraverunt. His rebus celeriter magna multitudine peditatus 
 equitatusque coacta ad castra venerunt. 
 
 1 35. Caesar etsi idem quod superioribus diebus acciderat fore 
 videbat, ut, si essent hostes pulsi, celeritate periculum effugerent, 
 tamen nactus equites circiter xxx, quos Commius Atrebas, de 
 quo ante dictum est, secum transportaverat, legiones in acie pro 
 
 2 castris constituit. Commisso proelio diutius nostrorum militum 
 
 3 impetum hostes ferre non potuerunt ac terga verterunt. Quos 
 tanto spatio secuti quantum cursu et viribus efficere potuerunt, 
 complures ex iis occiderunt, deinde omnibus longe lateque aedificiis 
 incensis se in castra receperunt. 
 
 1 36. Eodem die legati ab hostibus missi ad Caesarem de pace 
 
 2 venerunt. His Caesar numerum obsidum quern ante imperaverat 
 duplicavit, eosque in continentem adduci iussit, quod propinqua die 
 aequinocti infirmis navibus hiemi navigationem subiciendam non 
 
 3 existimabat. Ipse idoneam tempestatem nactus paulo post mediam 
 noctem naves solvit; quae omnes incolumes ad continentem per
 
 NEPOS, ALCIBIADES 151 
 
 venerunt; sed ex iis onerariae duae eosdem quos reliqui portus 4 
 capere non potuerunt et paulo infra delatae sunt. 
 
 37. Quibus ex navibus cum essent expositi milites circiter ccc i 
 atque in cnstra contenderent, Morini, quos Caesar in Britanniam 
 proficiscens pacatos reliquerat, spe praedae adducti primo non ita 
 magno suorum numero circumsteterunt ac, si sese interfici nollent, 
 arma ponere iusserunt. Cum illi orbe facto sese defenderent, cele- 2 
 riter ad clamorem hominum circiter milia vi convenerunt. Qua re 
 nuntiata Caesar omnem ex castris equitatum suis auxilio misit. 
 Interim nostri milites impetum hostium sustinuerunt atque amplius 3 
 horis quattuor fortissime pugnaverunt et paucis vulneribus acceptis 
 complures ex his occiderunt. Postea vero quam equitatus noster 4 
 in conspectum venit, hostes abiectis armis terga verterunt magnus- 
 que eorum numerus est occisus. 
 
 38. Caesar postero die T. Labienum legatum cum iis legionibus i 
 quas ex Britannia reduxerat in Morinos, qui rebellionem fecerant, 
 misit. Qui cum propter siccitates paludum quo se reciperent non 2 
 haberent (quo perfugio superiore anno erant usi), omnes fere in 
 potestatem Labieni venerunt. At P. Titurius et L. Cotta legati, 3 
 qui in Menapiorum fines legiones duxerant, omnibus eorum agris 
 vastatis, frumentis succisis, aedificiis incensis, quod Menapii se 
 omnes in densissimas silvas abdiderant, se ad Caesarem receperunt. 
 Caesar in Belgis omnium legionum hiberna constituit. Eo duae 4 
 omnino civitates ex Britannia obsides miserunt, reliquae neglexerunt. 
 His rebus gestis ex litteris Caesaris dierum xx supplicatio ab se- 5 
 natu decreta est. 
 
 Nepos, Alcibiades 
 
 i. Alcibiades, Cliniae filius, Atheniensis. In hoc natura quid i 
 efficere possit videtur experta. Constat enim inter omnes qui de 
 eo memoriae prodiderunt, nihil illo fuisse excellentius vel in vitiis 
 vel in virtutibus. Natus in amplissima civitate summo genere, 2 
 omnium aetatis suae multo formosissimus, dives; ad omnes res 
 aptus consilique plenus (namque imperator fuit summus et mari et
 
 152 LATIN TEXT 
 
 terra) ; disertus, ut in primis dicendo valeret, quod tanta erat com- 
 
 3 mendatio oris atque orationis ut nemo ei posset resistere ; cum tern- 
 pus posceret, laboriosus, patiens ; liberalis, splendidus non minus in 
 vita quam victu; affabilis, blandus, temporibus callidissime serviens: 
 
 4 idem, simul ac se remiserat neque causa suberat quare animi labo- 
 rem perferret, luxuriosus, dissolutus, libidinosus, intemperans repe- 
 riebatur, ut omnes admirarentur in uno homine tantam esse dissi- 
 militudinem tamque diversam naturam. 
 
 i 2. Educatus est in domo Pericli (privignus enim eius fuisse 
 dicitur), eruditus a Socrate. Socerum habuit Hipponicum, omnium 
 Graeca lingua loquentium ditissimum, ut, si ipse fingere vellet, neque 
 plura bona eminisci neque maiora posset consequi quam vel natura 
 vel fortuna tribuerat. 
 
 1 3. Bello Peloponnesio huius consilio atque auctoritate Atheni- 
 enses bellum Syracusanis indixerunt. Ad quod gerendum ipse dux 
 
 2 delectus est, duo praeterea collegae dati, Nicia et Lamachus. Id 
 cum appararetur, prius quam classis exiret, accidit ut una nocte 
 omnes Hermae qui in oppido erant Athenis deicerentur praeter 
 unum, qui ante ianuam erat Andocidi (itaque ille postea Mercurius 
 
 3 Andocidi vocitatus est). Hoc cum appareret non sine magna mul- 
 torum consensione esse factum, quae non ad privatam, sed ad pu- 
 blicam rem pertineret, magnus multitudini timorest iniectus ne qua 
 repentina vis in civitate exsisteret quae libertatem opprimeret 
 
 4 populi. Hoc maxime convenire in Alcibiadem videbatur quod et 
 potentior et maior quam privatus existimabatur : multos enim libe- 
 
 5 ralitate devinxerat, plures etiam opera forensi suos reddiderat. Qua 
 re fiebat ut omnium oculos, quotienscumque in publicum prodisset, 
 ad se converteret neque ei parquisquam in civitate poneretur. Ita- 
 que non solum spem in eo habebant maximam, sed etiam timorem, 
 
 6 quod et obesse plurimum et prodesse poterat. Aspergebatur etiam 
 infamia quod in domo sua facere mysteria dicebatur (quod nefas 
 erat more Atheniensium) idque non ad religionem, sed ad coniura- 
 tionem pertinere existimabatur. 
 
 i 4. Hoc crimine in contione ab inimicis compellabatur. Sed in- 
 stabat tempus ad bellum proficiscendi. Id ille intuens neque 
 ignorans civium suorum consuetudinem postulabat, si quid de se
 
 NEPOS, ALCIBIADES 153 
 
 agi vellent, potius de praesente quaestio haberetur quam absens 
 invidiae crimine accusaretur. Inimici vero eius quiescendum in 2 
 praesenti, quia noceri ei non posse intellegebant, et illud tempus 
 exspectandum decreverunt quo classis exisset, ut absentem aggre- 
 derentur, itaque fecerunt. Nam postquam in Sicilian! eum per- 3 
 venisse crediderunt, absentem quod sacra violasset reum fecerunt. 
 Qua de re cum ei nuntius a magistrate in Sicilian! missus esset, ut 
 domum ad causam dicendam rediret, essetque in magna spe pro- 
 vinciae bene administrandae, non parere noluit et in triremem 
 quae ad eum erat deportandum missa ascendit. Hac Thurios in 4 
 Italiam pervectus, multa secum reputans de immoderata civium 
 suorum licentia crudelitateque erga nobiles, utilissimum ratus im- 
 pendentem evitare tempestatem, clam se ab custodibus subduxit et 
 inde primum Elidem, dein Thebas venit. Postquam autem se ca- 5 
 pitis damnatum bonis publicatis audivit, et, id quod ntimquam antea 
 usu venerat, Eumolpidas sacerdotes a populo coactos ut se devove- 
 rent, eiusque devotionis quo testatior esset memoria, exemplum in 
 pila lapidea incisum esse positum in publico, Lacedaemonem demi- 
 gravit. Ibi, ut ipse praedicare consuerat, non adversus patriam, 6 
 sed inimicos suos bellum gessit, qui eidem hostes essent civitati : 
 nam cum intellegerent se plurimum prodesse posse rei publicae, ex 
 ea eiecisse plusque irae suae quam utilitati communi paruisse. Ita- 7 
 que huius consilio Lacedaemonii cum Perse rege amicitiam fece- 
 runt, dein Deceleam in Attica munierunt praesidioque ibi perpetuo 
 posito in obsidione Athenas tenuerunt. Eiusdem opera loniam a 
 societate averterunt Atheniensium. Quo facto multo superiores 
 bello esse coeperunt. 
 
 5. Neque vero his rebus tarn amici Alcibiadi sunt facti quam ti- i 
 more ab eo alienati. Nam cum acerrimi viri praestantem prudentiam 
 in omnibus rebus cognosceren^ oertimuerunt ne caritate patriae 
 cluctus aliquando ab ipsis descisceret et cum suis in gratiam, icdiret. 
 Itaque tempus eius interfkiundi quaerere instituerunt. Id Alci- 2 
 blades diutius celari non potuit: erat enim ea sagacitate ut decipi 
 non posset, praesertim cum animum attendisset ad cavendum. Ita- 
 que ad Tissaphernem, praefectum regis Darii, se contulit. Cuius 
 cum in intimam amicitiam pervenisset, et Atheniensium male gestis 3
 
 154 LATIN TEXT 
 
 in Sicilia rebus opes senescere, contra Lacedaemoniorum crescere 
 videret, initio cum Pisandro praetore, qui apud Samum exercituni 
 habebat, per internuntios colloquitur et de reditu suo facit men- 
 tionem. Is erat enim eodem quo Alcibiades sensu, populi potentiae 
 
 4 non amicus et optimatium fautor. Ab hoc destitutus priinum per 
 Thrasybulum, Lyci filium, ab exercitu recipitur praetorque fit apucl 
 Samum, post suffragante Theramene populi scito restituitur parique 
 absens imperio praeficitur simul cum Thrasybulo et Theramenc. 
 
 5 Horum in imperio tanta commutatio rerum facta est ut Lacedae- 
 monii, qui paulo ante victores viguerant, perterriti pacem peterent. 
 Victi enim erant quinque proeliis terrestribus, tribus navalibus, in 
 quibus ducentas naves triremes amiserant quae captae in hostium 
 
 6 venerant potestatem. Alcibiades simul cum collegis receperat lo- 
 niam, Hellespontum, multas praeterea urbes Graecas quae in ora 
 sitae sunt Thraeciae, quarum expugnarant complures, in eis Byzan- 
 tium, neque minus multas consilio ad amicitiam adiunxerant quod 
 
 7 in captos dementia fuerant usi. Ita praeda onusti, locupletato 
 exercitu, maximis rebus gestis Athenas venerunt. 
 
 1 6. His cum obviam universa civitas in Piraeum descendisset, 
 tanta fuit omnium exspectatio visendi Alcibiadis. ut ad eius trire- 
 
 2 mem vulgus conflueret proinde ac si solus advenisset. Sic enim 
 populo erat persuasum et adversas superiores et praesentes se- 
 cundas res accidisse eius opera. Itaque et exerdtum in Sicilia amis- 
 sum et Lacedaemoniorum victorias culpae suae tribuebant, quod 
 talem virum e civitate expulissent. Neque id sine causa arbitrari 
 videbantur. Nam postquam exercitui praeesse coeperat, neque 
 
 3 terra neque mari hostes pares esse potuerant. Hie ut e navi egres- 
 sus est, quamquam Theramenes et Thrasybulus eisdem rebus prae- 
 fuerant simulque venerant in Piraeum, tamen unum omnes ilium 
 prosequebantur, et, id quod numquam antea usu venerat nisi Olym- 
 piae victoribus, coronis laureis taeniisque vulgo donabatur. Ille 
 lacrimans talem benivolentiam civium suorum accipiebat, remini- 
 
 4 scens pristini temporis acerbitatem. Postquam in astu venit, con- 
 done advocata sic verba fecit ut nemo tarn ferus fuerit quin eius 
 casui illacrimarit inimicumque iis se ostenderit quorum opera patria 
 pulsus fuerat, proinde ac si alius populus, non ille ipse qui turn fle-
 
 NEPOS, ALCIBIADES 155 
 
 bat, eum sacrilegi damnasset. Restituta ergo huic sunt publice 5 
 bona, eidemque illi Eumolpidae sacerdotes rursus resacrare sunt 
 coacti qui eum devoverant, pilaeque illae in quibus devotio fuerat 
 scripta in mare praecipitatae. 
 
 7. Haec Alcibiadi laetitia non nimis fuit diuturna. Nam cum ei i 
 omnes essent honores decreti totaque res publica domi bellique 
 tradita ut unius arbitrio gereretur, et ipse postulasset ut duo sibi 
 collegae darentur, Thrasybulus et Adimantus, neque id negatum 
 esset, classe in Asiam profectus quod apud Cymen minus ex sen- 
 tentia rem gesserat, in invidiam recidit: nihil enim eum non efficere 
 posse ducebant. Ex quo fiebat ut omnia minus prospere gesta 2 
 culpae tribuerent, cum aut eum neglegenter aut malitiose fecisse 
 loquerentur, sicut turn accidit: nam corruptum a rege capere Cymen 
 noluisse arguebant. Itaque huic maxime putamus malo fuisse ni- 3 
 miam opinionem ingeni atque virtutis: timebatur enim non minus 
 quam diligebatur, ne secunda fortuna magnisque opibus elatus 
 tyrannidem concupisceret. Quibus rebus fa'ctum est ut absenti 
 magistratum abrogarent et alium in eius locum substituerent. Id 4 
 ille ut audivit, domum reverti noluit et se Pactyen contulit ibique 
 tria castella communiit, Ornos, Bizanthen, Neontichos, manuque 
 collecta primus Graecae civitatis in Thraeciam introiit, gloriosius 
 existimans barbarorum praeda locupletari quam Graiorum. Qua ex 5 
 re creverat cum fama turn opibus, magnamque amicitiam sibi cum 
 quibusdam regibus Thraeciae pepererat. 
 
 8. Neque tamen a caritate patriae potuit recedere. Nam cum i 
 apud Aegos flumen Philocles, praetor Atheniensium, classem con- 
 stituisset suam neque longe abesset Lysander, praetor Lacedaemo- 
 niorum, qui in eo erat occupatus ut bellum quam diutissime duceret, 
 quod ipsis pecunia a rege suppeditabatur, contra Atheniensibus 
 exhaustis praeter arma et naves nihil erat super, Alcibiades ad 2 
 exercitum venit Atheniensium ibique praesente vulgo agere coepit: 
 
 si vellent, se coacturum Lysandrum dimicare aut pacem petere 
 [spopondit]; Laceclaemonios eo nolle classe con fligere quod pede- 
 stribus copiis plus quam navibus valerent; sibi autem esse facile j 
 Seuthem, regem Thraecum, adducere ut eum terra depelleret: quo 
 facto necessario aut classe conflicturum aut bellum compositurum.
 
 156 LATIN TEXT 
 
 4 Id etsi vere dictum Philocles animadvertebat, tamen postulata fa- 
 cere noluit, quod sentiebat se Alcibiade recepto nullius moment! 
 apud exercitum futurum, et, si quid secundi evenisset, nullam in ea 
 re suam partem fore, contra ea, si quid adversi accidisset, se unum 
 
 5 eius delicti futurum reum. Ab hoc discedens Alcibiades, " Quo- 
 niam," ihquit, " victoriae patriae repugnas, illud moneo, ne iuxta 
 hostem castra habeas nautica: periculum est enim ne immodestia 
 militum vestrorum occasio detur Lysandro vestri opprimendi exer- 
 
 6 citus." Neque ea res ilium fefellit. Nam Lysander, cum per 
 speculatores comperisset vulgum Atheniensium in terram praedatum 
 exisse navesque paene inanes rdictas, tempus rei gerendae non 
 dimisit eoque impetu bellum totum delevit. 
 
 1 9. At Alcibiades, victis Atheniensibus non satis tuta eadem loca 
 sibi arbitrans, penitus in Thraeciam se supra Propontidem abdidit, 
 
 2 sperans ibi facillime suam fortunam occuli posse. Falso. Nam 
 Thraeces, postquam eum cum magna pecunia venisse senserunt, in- 
 sidias fecerunt eaque quae apportarat abstulerunt, ipsum capere 
 
 3 non potuerunt. Ille cernens nullum locum sibi tutum in Graecia 
 propter potentiam Lacedaemoniorum ad Pharnabazum in Asiam 
 transiit ; quern quidem adeo sua cepit humanitate ut eum nemo in 
 amicitia antecederet. Namque ei Grynium dederat, in Phrygia ca- 
 
 4 strum, ex quo quinquagena talenta vectigalis capiebat. Qua fortuna 
 Alcibiades non erat contentus, neque Athenas victas Lacedaemoniis 
 servire poterat pati. Itaque ad patriam liberandam om'ni ferebatur 
 
 5 cogitatione. Sed videbat id sine rege Perse non posse fieri, ideoque 
 eum amicum sibi cupiebat adiungi, neque dubitabat facile se conse- 
 cuturum si modo eius conveniundi habuisset potestatem. Nam 
 Cyrum fratrem ei bellum clam parare Lacedaemoniis adiuvantibus 
 sciebat: id si aperuisset, magnam se initurum gratiam videbat. 
 
 1 10. Hoc cum moliretur peteretque a Pharnabazo ut ad regem 
 mitteretur, eodem tempore Critias ceterique tyranni Atheniensium 
 certos homines ad Lysandrum in Asia.n miserant qui eum certiorem 
 facerent, nisi Alcibiadem sustulisset, nihil earum rerum fore ratum 
 quas ipse Athenis constituisset: quare, si suas res gestas manere vel- 
 
 2 let, ilium persequeretur. His Laco rebus commotus statuit accura- 
 tius sibi agendum cum Pharnabazo. Huic ergo renuntiat quae regi
 
 NEPOS, ALCIBIADES 157 
 
 cum Lacedaemoniis'convenissent, nisi Alcibiadem vivum nut mor- 
 tuum sibi tradidisset. Non tulit hoc satrapes et violare clementiam 3 
 quam regis opes minui maluit. Itaque misit Susamithren et Bagae- 
 um ad Alcibiadem interficiendum cum ille esset in Phrygia iterque 
 ad regem compararet. Missi clam vicinitati in qua turn Alcibiades 4 
 erat dant negotium ut eum interficiant. Illi cum ferro aggredi non 
 auderent, noctu ligna contulerunt circa casam earn in qua quiesce- 
 bat, eaque succenderunt, ut incendio conficerent quern manu supe- 
 rari posse diffidebant. Ille autem ut sonitu flammae est excitatus, 5 
 etsi gladius ei erat subductus, familiaris sui subalare telum eripuit. 
 Namque erat cum eo quidam ex Arcadia hospes, qui numquam dis- 
 cedere voluerat. Hunc sequi se iubet et id quod in praesentia 
 vestimentorum fuit arripit. His in ignem coniectis flammae vim 
 transiit. Quern ut barbari incendium effugisse viderunt, telis eminus 6 
 missis interfecerunt capulque eius ad Pharnabazum rettulerunt. At 
 mulier, quae cum eo vivere consuerat, muliebri sua veste contectum 
 aeclifici incendio mortuum cremavit quod ad vivum interimendum 
 erat comparatum. Sic Alcibiades annos circiter quadraginta natus 
 diem obiit supremum. 
 
 II. Hunc infamatum a plerisque tres gravissimi historici summis i 
 laudibus extulerunt : Thucydides, qui eiusdem aetatis fuit, Theo- 
 pompus, post aliquanto natus, et Timaeus : qui quidem duo male- 
 dicentissimi nescio quo modo in illo uno laudando consentiunt. 
 Namque ea quae supra scripsimus de eo praedicarunt atque hoc 2 
 amplius: cum Athenis, splendidissima civitate, natus esset, omnes 
 splendore ac dignitate superasse vitae ; postquam inde expulsus 3 
 Thebas venerit, adeo studiis eorum inservisse ut nemo eum labore 
 corporisque viribus posset aequiperare (omnes enim Boeoti magis 
 firm/tati corporis quam ingeni acumini serviunt); eundem apud 
 Lacedaemonios, quorum moribus summa virtus in patientia pone- 4 
 batur, sic duritiae se dedisse ut parsimonia victus atque cultus 
 omnes Lacedaemonios vinceret; venisse ad Persas, apud quos sum- 5 
 ma laus esse^ fortiter venari, luxuriose vivere; horum sic imitatum 
 consuetudinem ut illi ipsi eum in his maxime admirarentur. Quibus 6 
 rebus effecisse ut, apud quoscumque esset, princeps poneretur habe- 
 returque carissimus. Sed satis de hoc: reliquos ord'.amur.
 
 158 LATIN TEXT 
 
 Nepos, Hannibal 
 
 1 I. Hannibal, Hamilcaris filius, Karthaginiensis. Si verum est. 
 quod nemo dubitat, ut popuhis Romanus omnes gentes virtute supe- 
 rarit, non est infitiandum Hannibalem tanto praestitisse ceteros im 
 peratores prudentia quanto populus Romanus antecedat fortitudine 
 
 2 cunctas nationes. Nam quotienscumque cum eo congressus est in 
 Italia, semper discessit superior. Quod nisi domi civium suorum 
 invidia debilitatus esset, Romanos videtur superare potuisse. Sed 
 multorum obtrectatio devicit unius virtutem. 
 
 3 Hie autem velut hereditate relictum odium paternum erga Ro- 
 manos sic conservavit ut prius animam quam id deposuerit, qui 
 quidem, cum patria pulsus esset et alienarum opum indigeret, num- 
 quam destiterit animo bellare cum Romanis. 
 
 1 2. Nam ut omittam Philippum, quem absens hostem reddidit Ro- 
 manis, omnium iis temporibus potentissimus rex Antiochus fuit. 
 Hunc tanta cupiditate incendit bellandi ut usque a rubro mari anna 
 
 2 conatus sit inferre Italiae. Ad quem cum legati venissent Romani, 
 qui de eius voluntate explorarent darentque operam consiliis clan- 
 destinis ut Hannibalem in suspicionem regi adducerent, tamquam 
 ab ipsis corruptus alia atque antea sentiret, neque id frustra fecis- 
 sent idque Hannibal comperisset seque ab interioribus consiliis 
 
 3 segregari vidisset, tempore dato adiit ad regem, eique cum multa de 
 fide sua et odio in Romanos commemorasset, hoc adiunxit: "Pater 
 meus," inquit, " Hamilcar puerulo me, Aitpote non amplius novem 
 annos nato, in Hispaniam imperator proficiscens Karthagine lovi 
 
 4 optimo maximo hostias immolavit. Quae divina res dum conficie- 
 batur, quaesivit a me vellemne secum in castra proficisci. Id cum 
 libenter accepissem atque ab eo petere coepissera ne dubitaret 
 ducere, turn ille, 'Faciam,' inquit, 'si mihi fidem quam postulo de- 
 deris.' Simul me ad aram adduxit apud quam sacrificare insti- 
 tuerat, eamque ceteris remotis tenentem iurare iussit numquam me 
 
 5 in amicitia cum Romanis fore. Id ego iusiurandum patri datum 
 usque ad hanc aetatem ita conservavi utnemini dubium esse debeat 
 
 6 quin reliquo tempore .eadem mente sim futurus. Quare si quid
 
 NEPOS, HANNIBAL 159 
 
 amice de Romanis cogitabis, non imprudenter feceris si me celaris ; 
 cum quidem bellum parabis, te ipsum frustraberis si non me in eo 
 principem posueris." 
 
 3. Hac igitur qua diximus aetate cum patre in Hispaniam pro- i 
 fectus est ; cuius post obitum, Hasdrubale imperatore suffecto, 
 equitatui omni praefuit. Hoc quoque interfecto exercitus sum- 
 mam imperi ad eum detulit. Id Karthaginem delatum publice 
 comprobatum est. Sic Hannibal minor quinque et viginti annis 2 
 natus imperator factus proximo triennio omnes gentes Hispaniae 
 bello subegit, Saguntum, foederatam civitatem, vi expugnavit, tres 
 exercitus maximos comparavit. Ex his unum in Africam misit, 3 
 alterum cum Hasdrubale fratre in Hispania reliquit, tertium in 
 Italiam secum duxit. Ut saltum Pyrenaeum transiit, quacumque 
 iter fecit, cum omnibus incolis conflixit; neminem nisi victum di- 
 misit. Ad Alpes posteaquam venit, qua Italiam ab Gallia se- 4 
 iungunt, quas nemo umquam cum exercitu ante eum praeter Hercu- 
 lem Graium transierat (quo facto is hodie saltus Graius appellatur), 
 Alpicos conantes prohibere transitu concidit, loca patefecit, itinera 
 muniit, effecit ut ea elephantus ornatus ire posset qua antea unus 
 homo inermis vix poterat repere. Hac copias traduxit in Italiam- 
 que pervenit. 
 
 4. Conflixerat apud Rhodanum cum P. Cornelio Scipione con- i 
 sule eumque pepulerat. Cum hoc eodem Clastidi apud Padum 
 decernit sauciumque inde ac fugatum dimittit. Tertio idem Scipio 2 
 cum collega Ti. Longo apud Trebiam adversus eum venit. Cum 
 iis manum conseruit, utrosque profligavit. Inde per Ligures Ap- 
 penninum transiit, petens Etruriam. Hoc in itinere adeo gravi 3 
 morbo afficitur oculorum ut postea numquam dextro aeque bene 
 usus sit. Qua valetudine cum etiamnum premeretur lecticaque 
 ferretur, C. Flaminium consulem apud Trasumennum cum exercitu 
 insidiis circumventum occidit, neque multo post C. Centenium 
 praetorem cum delecta marm saltus occupantem. Hinc in Apuliam 4 
 pervenit. Ibi obviam ei venerunt duo consules, C. Terentius et L. 
 Aemilius. Utriusque exercitus uno proelio fugavit, Paulum con- 
 sulem occidit et aliquot praeterea consulares, in eis Cn. Servihuin 
 Geminum, qui superiore anno fuerat consul.
 
 160 LATIN TEXT 
 
 1 5. Hac pugna pugnata Romain profectus, nullo resistente, in 
 propinquis urbi montibus moratus est. Cum aliquot ibi dies castra 
 habuisset et Capuam reverteretur, Q. Fabius Maximus, dictator 
 
 2 Romanus, in agro Falerno ei se obiecit. Hie clausus locorum 
 angustiis noctu sine ullo detrimento exercitus se expedivit Fabioque, 
 callidissimo imperatori, dedit verba. Namque obducta nocte sar- 
 menta in cornibus iuvencorum deligata incendit eiusque generis 
 multitudinem magnam dispalatam immisit. Quo repentino visu 
 obiecto tantum terrorem iniecit exercitui Romanorum ut egredi 
 
 3 extra vallum nemo sit ausus. Hanc post rem gestam non ita multis 
 diebus M. Minucium Rufum, magistrum equitum pari ac dictatorem 
 imperio, dolo productum in proelium fugavit. Ti. Sempronium 
 Gracchum, iterum consulem, in Lucanis absens in insidias inductum 
 sustulit. M. Claudium Marcellum, quinquiens consulem, apud 
 
 4 Venusiam pari modo interfecit. Longum est omnia enumerare 
 proelia. Quare hoc unum satis erit dictum, ex quo intellegi possit 
 quantus ille fuerit; quamdiu in Italia fuit, nemo ei in acie restitit, 
 nemo adversus eum post Cannensem pugnam in campo castra 
 posuit. 
 
 1 6. Hinc invictus patriam defensum revocatus bcllum gessit ad- 
 versus P. Scipionem, filium eius Scipionis, quem ipse primo apud 
 Rhodanum, iterum apud Padum, tertio apud Trebiam fugarat. 
 
 2 Cum hoc exhaustis iam patriae facultatibus cupivit impraesen- 
 tiarum bellum componere, quo valentior postea congrederetur. 
 
 3 Inde colloquium convenit, condiciones non convenerunt. Post id 
 factum paucis diebus apud Zamam cum eodem conflixit; pulsus 
 (incredibile dictu) biduo et duabus noctibus Hadrumetum pervenit, 
 
 4 quod abest ab Zama circiter milia passuum trecenta. In hac fuga 
 Numidae, qui simul cum eo ex acie excesserant, insidiati sunt ei ; 
 quos non solum effugit, sed etiam ipsos oppressit. Hadrumeti 
 reliquos e fuga collegit, novis dilectibus paucis diebus multos con- 
 traxit. 
 
 1 7. Cum in apparando acerrime esset occupatus, Karthaginienses 
 bellum cum Romanis composuerunt. Ille nihilo setius exercitui 
 postea praefuit resque in Africa gessit [itemque Mago frater eius] 
 
 2 usque ad P. Sulpicium C. Aurelium consules. His enim magistra-
 
 NEPOS, HANNIBAL l6l 
 
 tibus legati Karthaginienses Romam venerunt qui senatui populo- 
 que Romano gratias agerent quod cum iis pacern fecissent, ob 
 eamque rem corona aurea eos donarent simulque peterent ut obsides 
 eorum Fregellis essent captivique redderentur. His ex senatus 3 
 consulto responsum est : munus eorum gratum acceptumque esse ; 
 obsides, quo loco rogarent, futuros ; captives non remissuros, quod 
 Hannibalem, cuius opera susceptum belluin foret, inimicissimum 
 nomini Romano, etiamnum cum imperio apud exercitum haberent 
 itemque fratrem eius Magonem. Hoc responso Karthaginienses 4 
 cognito Hannibalem domum et Magonem revocarunt. Hue ut 
 rediit, rex factus est, postquam imperator fuerat anno secundo et 
 vicesimo : ut enim Romae consules, sic Karthagine quotannis 
 annui bini reges creabantur. In eo magistratu pari diligentia se 5 
 Hannibal praebuit ac fuerat in bello. Namque effecit ex novis 
 vectigalibus non solum ut esset pecunia quae Romanis ex foedere 
 penderetur, sed etiam superesset quae in aerario reponeretur. 
 Deinde [anno post praeturam] M. Claudio L. Furio consulibus 6 
 Roma legati Karthaginem venerunt. Hos Hannibal ratus sui ex- 
 poscendi gratia missos, priusquam iis senatus daretur, navem 
 ascendit clam atque in Syriam ad Antiochum perfugit. Hac re 7 
 palam facta Poeni naves duas quae eum comprehenderent, si pos- 
 sent consequi, miserunt, bona eius publicarunt, domum a funda- 
 mentis disiecerunt, ipsum exulem iudicarunt. 
 
 8. At Hannibal anno quarto postquam domo profugerat, L. Cor- i 
 nelio Q. Minucio consulibus, cum quinque navibas Africam accessit 
 in finibus Cyrenaeorum, si forte Karthaginienses ad belluin inducere 
 posset Antiochi spe fiduciaque, cui iam persuaserat ut cum exerciti- 
 bus in Italiam proficisceretur. Hue Magonem fratrem excivir. Id 2 
 ubi Poeni resciverunt, Magonem eadem, qua fratrem, absentem affe- 
 cerunt poena. Illi desperatis rebus cum solvissent naves ac vela 
 ventis dedissent, Hannibal ad Antiochum pervenit. De Magonis 
 interitu duplex memoria prodita est: namque alii naufragio, alii a 
 servulis ipsius interfectum eum scriptum reliquerunt. Antiochus 3 
 autem si tarn in gerendo bello consiliis eius parere voluisset quam 
 in suscipiendo instituerat, propius Tiberi quam in Thermopylis de 
 summa imperi dimicasset. Quern etsi multa stulte conari videbat, 
 ii
 
 l62 LATIN TEXT 
 
 4 tatnen nulla deseruil in re. Praefuit paucis navibus quas ex Syria 
 iussus erat in Asiam ducere, iisque adversus Rhocliorum classem in 
 Pamphylio mari conflixit. In quo cum multitudine adversariorum 
 sui superarentur, ipse quo cornu rem gessit fuit superior. 
 
 1 9. Antiocho fugato verens ne dederetur, quod sine dubio acci- 
 disset si sui fecisset potestatem, Cretam ad Gortynios venit, ut ibi, 
 
 2 quo se conferret, consideraret. Vidit autem vir omnium callidissi- 
 mus in magno se fore periculo, nisi quid providisset, propter ava- 
 ritiam Cretensium : magnam enim secum pecuniam portabat, de 
 
 3 qua sciebat exisse famam. Itaque capit tale consilium. Amphoras 
 complures complet plumbo, summas operit auro et argento. Has 
 praesentibus principibus deponit in templo Dianae, simulans se 
 suas fortunas illorum fidei credere. His in errorem inductis statuas 
 ae'neas quas secum portabat omni sua pecunia complet casque in 
 
 4 propatulo domi abicit. Gortynii templum magna cura custodiunt, 
 non tam a ceteris quam ab Hannibale, ne ille inscientibus iis tolleret 
 sua secumque duceret. 
 
 1 10. Sic conservatis suis rebus omnibus Poenus illusis Cretensibus 
 ad Prusiam in Pontum pervenit. Apud quern eodem animo fuit 
 erga Italian), neque aliud quicquam egit quam regem armavit et 
 
 2 exacuit adversus Romanos. Quern cum videret domesticis opibus 
 minus esse robustum, conciliabat ceteros reges, adiungebat bellico- 
 sas nationes. Dissidebat ab eo Pergamenus rex Eumenes, Romanis 
 
 3 amicissimus, bellumque inter eos gerebatur et mari et terra ; sed 
 utrobique Eumenes plus valebat propter Romanorum societatem. 
 Quo magis cupiebat eum Hannibal opprimi, quern si removisset. 
 faciliora sibi cetera fore arbitrabatur. Ad hunc interficiundum 
 
 4 talem iniit rationem. Classe paucis diebus erant decreturi. Su- 
 perabatur navium multitudine ; dolo erat pugnandum, cum par 
 non esset armis. Imperavit quam plurimas venenatas serpentes 
 
 5 vivas colligi casque in vasa fictilia conici. Harum cum effecis- 
 set magnam multitudinem, die ipso quo facturus erat navale 
 proelium classiarios convocat iisque praecipit omnes ut in unam 
 Eumenis regis concurrant navem, a ceteris tantum satis habeant se 
 defendere. Id illos facile serpentium multitudine consecuturos 
 
 6 Rex autem in qua nave veheretur ut scirent se facturum: quern
 
 NEPOS, HANNIBAL 163 
 
 si aut cepissent aut interfecissent, magno iis pollicetur praeiuio 
 fore. 
 
 n. Tali cohortatione militum facta classis ab utrisque in proe- i 
 Hum deducitur. Quarum acie constiluta, priusquam signum pugnae 
 daretur, Hannibal, ut palam faceret suis quo loco Eumenes esset, 
 tabellarium in scapha cum caduceo mittit. Qui ubi ad naves ad- 2 
 versariorum pervenit epistulamque ostendens se regem professus 
 est quaerere, statim ad Eumenem deductus est, quod nemo dubita- 
 bat quin aliquid de pace esset scriptum. Tabellarius, ducis nave 
 declarata suis, eodem unde erat egressus se recepit. At Eumenes 3 
 soluta epistula nihil in ea repperit nisi quae ad irridendum eum 
 pertinerent. Cuius rei etsi causam mirabatur neque reperiebat, 
 tamen proelium statim committere non dubitavit. Horum in con- 4 
 cursu Bithyni Hannibalis praecepto universi navem Eumenis ado- 
 riuntur. Quorum vim rex cum sustinere non posset, fuga salutem 
 petiit, quam consecutus non esset nisi intra sua praesidia se recepis- 
 set, quae in proximo litore erant collocata. Reliquae Pergamenae 5 
 naves cum adversaries premerent acrius, repente in eas vasa fictilia, 
 de quibus supra mentionem fecimus, conici coepta sunt. Quae 
 iacta initio risum pugnantibus concitarunt, neque quare id fieret 
 poterat intellegi. Postquam autem naves suas oppletas conspexe- 6 
 runt serpentibus, nova re perterriti, cum quid potissimum vitarent 
 non viderent, puppes verterunt seque ad sua castra nautica rettule- 
 runt. Sic Hannibal consilio arma Pergamenorum superavit, neque 7 
 turn solum, sed saepe alias pedestribus copiis pari prudentia pepulit 
 adversaries. 
 
 12. Quae dum in Asia geruntur, accidit casu ut legati Prusiae i 
 Romae apud T. Quintium Flamininum consularem cenarent, atquc 
 ibi de Hannibale mentione facta ex iis unus diceret eum in Prusiae 
 regno esse. Id postero die Flamininus senatui detulit. Patres con- 2 
 scripti, qui Hannibale vivo numquam se sine insidiis futures existi- 
 marent, legates in Bithyniam miserunt, in eis Flamininum, qui ab 
 rege peterent ne inimicissimum suum secum haberet sibique dederet. 
 His Prusia negare ausus non est; illud recusavit, ne id a se fieri 3 
 postularent, quod adversus ius hospiti esset: ipsi, si possent, com- 
 prehenderent ; locum ubi esset facile inventuros. Hannibal enim
 
 1 64 LATIN TEXT 
 
 uno loco se tenebat, in castello quod ei a rege datum erat muneri, 
 idque sic aedificarat ut in omnibus partibus aedifici exitus haberet, 
 
 \ scilicet verens ne usu veniret quod accidit. Hue cum legati Ro- 
 manorum venissent ac multitudine domum eius circumdedissent, 
 puer ab ianua prospiciens Hannibali dixit plures praeter consuetu 
 dinem armatos apparere. Qui imperavit ei ut omnes fores aedifici 
 circumiret ac propere sibi nuntiaret num eodem modo undique ob- 
 
 5 sideretur. Puer cum celeriter quid vidisset renuntiasset, omnesque 
 exitus occupatos ostendisset, sensit id non fortuito factum, sed se 
 
 , peti neque sibi diutius vitam essc retinendam. Quam ne alieno 
 arbitrio dimitteret, memor pristinarum virtutum venenum, quod 
 semper secum habere consuerat, sumpsit. 
 
 1 13. Sic vir fortissimus, multis variisque perfunctus laboribus, 
 anno acquievit septuagesimo. .Quibus consulibus ititerierit, non 
 convenit. Namque Atticus M. Claudio Marcello Q. Fabio Labeone 
 consulibus mortuum in annali suo scriptuin reliquit, at Polybius L. 
 Aemilio Paulo Cn. Baebio Tamphilo, Sulpicius autem Blitho P. 
 
 2 Cornelio Cethego M. Baebio Tamphilo. Atque hie tantus vir tan- 
 tisque beJlis districtus nonnihil temporis tribuit litteris. Namque 
 aliquot eius libri sunt, Graeco sermone confecti, in eis ad Rhodios 
 
 3 de Cn. Manli Volsonis in Asia rebus gestis. Huius belli gesta 
 multi memoriae prodiderunt, sed ex eis duo, qui cum eo in castris 
 fuerunt simulque vixerunt, quamdiu fortuna passa est, Silenus et 
 Sosylus Lacedaemonius. Atque hoc Sosylo Hannibal litterarum 
 Graecarum usus est doctore. 
 
 Sed nos tempus est huius libri facere finem et Romanorum ex- 
 plicare imperatores, quo facilius, collatis utrorumque factis, qui vii i 
 praeferendi sint possit iudicari. 
 
 Cicero, Manilian Law 
 
 i. Quamquam mihi semper frequens conspectus vester multo 
 iucundissimus, hie autem locus ad agendum amplissimus, ad dicen- 
 dum ornatissimus est visus, Quirites, tamen hoc aditu laudis, qui 
 semper optimo cuique maxiim- patuit, non mca me voluntas adhuc,
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 165 
 
 sed vitae meae rationes ab ineunte aetate susceptae -prohibuerunt. 
 Nam cum antea per aetatem nondum huius auctoritatem loci attin- 
 gere auderem, statueremque nihil hue nisi perfectum ingenio, elabo- 
 ^ratum industria afferri oportere, omne meum tempus amicorum 
 ttmporibus transmittendum putavi. Ita neque hie locus vacuus 
 umquam fuit ab iis qui vestram causam defenderent, et meus labor, 
 :n privatorum periculis caste integreque versatus, ex vestro iudicio 
 iructum est amplissimum consecutus. Nam cum propter dilationem 
 comitiorum ter praetor primus centuriis cunctis renuntiatus sum, 
 facile intellexi, Quirites, et quid de me iudicaretis et quid aliis 
 praescriberetis. Nunc cum et auctoritatis in me tantum sit quan- 
 tum vos honoribus mandandis esse voluistis, et ad agendum facul- 
 tatis tantum quantum homini vigilanti ex forensi usu prope cotidiana 
 dicendi exercitatio potuit afferre, certe et, si quid auctoritatis in me 
 est, apud eos utar qui earn mihi dederunt, et, si quid in dicendo 
 consequi possum, iis ostendam potissimum qui ei quoque rei fruc- 
 tum suo iudicio tribuendum esse duxerunt. Atque illud in prirnis 3 
 mihi laetandum iure esse video, quod in hac insolita mihi ex hoc 
 loco ratione dicendi causa tails oblata est in qua oratio deesse 
 nemini possit. Dicendum est enim de Cn. Pompei singular! eximia- 
 que virtute ; huius autem orationis difficilius est exitum quam 
 principium in venire. Ita mihi non tarn copia quam modus in 
 dicendo quaerendus est. 
 
 2. Atque, ut inde oratio mea proficiscatur unde haec omnis causa 4 
 ducitur, bellum grave et periculosum vestris vectigalibus ac sociis a 
 duobus potentissimis regibus infertur, Mithridate et Tigrane, quorum 
 alter relictus, alter lacessitus, occasionem sibi ad occupandam Asiam 
 oblatam esse arbitratur. Equitibus Romanis, honestissimis viris, 
 afferuntur ex Asia cotidie litterae, quorum magnae res aguntur in 
 vestris vectigalibus exercendis occupatae; qui ad me, pro necessi- 
 tudine quae mihi est cum illo ordine, causam rei publicae pericula- 
 que rerum suarum detulerunt: Bithyniae, quae nunc vestra provincia 5 
 est, vicos exustos esse complures ; regnum Ariobarzanis, quod fini- 
 timum est vestris vectigalibus, totum esse in hostium potestate; L. 
 Lucullum magnis rebus gestis ab eo bello discedere; huic qui suc- 
 cesserit non satis esse paratum ad tantum bellum administrandum ;
 
 1 66 LATIN TEXT 
 
 unuiii .ib umnibus sociis et civibus ad id bellum imperatorem 
 deposci atque expeti, eundem hunc unum ab hostibus metui, prae- 
 terea neminem. 
 
 Causa quae sit videtis; nunc quid agendum sit considerate. 
 Primum mihi videtur de genere belli, deinde de magnitudine, turn 
 de imperatore deligendo esse dicendum. Genus est enim belli eius 
 modi quod maxime vestros animos excitare atque inflammare ad 
 persequendi studium debeat: in quo agitur populi Romani gloria, 
 quae vobis a maioribus cum magna in omnibus rebus turn summa 
 in re militari tradita est; agitur salus sociorum atque amicorum, 
 pro qua multa maiores vestri magna et gravia bella gesserunt; 
 aguntur certissima populi Romani vectigalia et maxima, quibus 
 amissis et pacis ornamenta et subsidia belli requiretis; aguntur 
 bona multorum civium, quibus est a vobis et ipsorum et rei publicae 
 causa consulendum. 
 
 3. Et quoniam semper appetentes gloriae praeter ceteras gentes 
 atque avidi laudis fuistis, delenda est vobis ilia macula Mithridatico 
 bello superiore concepta, quae penitus iam insedit ac nimis inve- 
 teravit in populi Romani nomine, quod is, qui uno die, tola in 
 Asia, tot in civitatibus, uno nuntio atque una significatione littera- 
 rum cives Romanos omnes necandos trucidandosque denotavit, non 
 modo adliuc poenam nullam suo dignam scelere suscepit, sed ab 
 illo tempore annum iam tertium et vicesimum regnat, et ita regnat 
 ut se non Ponti neque Cappadociae latebris occultare velit, sed 
 emergere ex patrio regno atque in vestris vectigalibus, hoc est, in 
 Asiae luce versari. Etenim adhuc ita nostri cum illo rege conten- 
 derunt imperatores, ut ab illo insignia victoriae, non victoriam 
 reportarent. Triumphavit L. Sulla, triumphavit L. Murena de 
 Mithridate, duo fortissimi viri et summi imperatores; sed ita trium- 
 pharunt ut ille pulsus superatusque regnaret. Verum tamen illis 
 imperatoribus laus est tribuenda quod egerunt, venia danda quod 
 reliquerunt, propterea quod ab eo bello Sullam in Italiam res publica. 
 Murenam Sulla revocavit. 
 
 4. Mithridates autem omne reliquum tempus non ad oblivioneit] 
 veteris belli, sed ad comparationem novi contulit; qui postea, cum 
 maximas aedificasset ornassetque classes exercitusque permagnos
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 167 
 
 quibuscumque ex gentibus potuisset comparasset, et se Bosphoranis, 
 finitumis suis, bellum inferre simularet, usque in Hispaniam legates 
 ac litteras misit ad eos duces quibuscum turn bellum gerebamus, ut, 
 cum duobus in locis clisiunctissimis maximeque diversis uno consilio 
 a binis hostium copiis bellum terra marique gereretur, vos ancipiti 
 contentione districti de imperio dimicaretis. Sed tamen alterius 10 
 partis periculum, Sertorianae atque Hispaniensis, quae multo plus 
 firmamenti ac roboris habebat, Cn. Pompei divino consilio ac singu- 
 lari virtute depulsum est-; in altera parte ita res a L. Lucullo, sum- 
 mo viro, est administrata ut initia ilia rerum gestarum magna atque 
 praeclara non felicitati eius, sed virtuti, haec autem extrema, quae 
 nuper acciderunt, non culpae, sed fortunae tribuenda esse videantur. 
 Sed de Lucullo dicam alio loco, et ita dicam, Quirites, ut neque 
 vera laus ei detracta oratione mea neque falsa adficta esse videatur; 
 de vestri imperi dignitate atque gloria quoniam is est exorsus ora- 11 
 tionis meae videte quern vobis animum suscipiendum putetis. 
 
 5. Maiores nostri saepe mercatoribus aut naviculariis nostris 
 iniuriosius tractatis bella gesserunt; vos tot milibus civium Roma- 
 norum uno nuntio atque uno tempore necatis, quo tandem animo 
 esse debetis? Legati quod erant appellati superbius, Corinthum 
 patres vestri, totius Graeciae lumen, extinctum esse voluerunt; vos 
 eum regem inultum esse patiemini, qui legatum populi Romani 
 consularem vinculis ac verberibus atque omni supplicio excruciatum 
 necavit? llli libertatem inminutam civium Romanorum non tule- 
 runt; vos ereptam vitam neglegetis? lus legationis verbo violatum 
 illi persecuti sunt; vos legatum omni supplicio interfectum relin- 
 quetis? Videte ne, ut illis pulcherrimum fuit tantam vobis imperi 12 
 gloriam tradere, sic vobis turpissimum sit, id quod accepistis tueri 
 et conservare non posse. 
 
 Quid? quod salus sociorum summum in periculum ac discrimen 
 vocatur, quo tandem animo ferre debetis? Regno est expulsus 
 Ariobarzanes rex, socius populi Romani atque amicus; imminent 
 duo reges toti Asiae non solum vobis inimicissimi, sed etiam vestris 
 sociis atque amicis; civitates autem omnes cuncta Asia atque 
 Graecia vestrum auxilium exspectare propter periculi magnitudinem 
 coguntur; imperatorem a vobis certum deposcere, cum praesertim
 
 1 68 LATIN TEXT 
 
 vos aliuin miseritis, neque audent neque se id facere sine summo 
 
 13 periculo posse arbitrantur. Vident et sentiunt hoc idem quod vos, 
 unum virum esse in quo summa sint omnia, et eum propter esse, 
 quo eiiam carent aegrius; cuius adventu ipso atque nomine, tametsi 
 ille ad maritimum bellum venerit, tamen impetus hostium represses 
 esse intellegunt ac retardatos. Hi vos, quoniam libere loqui non 
 licet, tacite roganfr; ujUse quoque, sfest ceterarum provinciarum 
 socios, dignos existimetisquorum salutem tali viro commendetis : 
 atque hoc etiam magis, quod ceteros in provinciam eius modi 
 homines cum. imperio. .mittimus, ut, etiam si ab hoste defendant, 
 tamen ipsonfm adventus in urbes sociorum non multum ab hostili 
 expugnatione difFerant, hunc audiebant antea, nunc praesentem 
 vident, tanta temperantia, tanta mansuetudine, tanta humanitate, 
 ut ii beatissimi esse videantur apud quos ille diutissime commora- 
 tur. 
 
 14 6. Quare, si propter socios, nulla ipsi iniuria lacessiti, maiores 
 nostri cum Antiocho, cum Philippo, cum Aetolis, cum Poenis bella 
 gesserunt, quanto vos studio convenit iniuriis provocatos sociorum 
 salutem una cum imperi vestri dignitate defendere, praesertim cum 
 de maximis vestris vectigalibus agatur? Nam ceterarum provincia- 
 rum vectigalia, Quirites, tanta sunt ut iis ad ipsas provincias tutan- 
 das vix contend esse possimus; Asia vero tarn opima est ac fertilis 
 ut et ubertate agrorum et varietate fructuum et magnitudine pas- 
 tionis et multitudine earum rerum quae exportentur facile omnibus 
 terris antecellat. Itaque haec vobis provincia, Quirites, si et belli 
 
 . utilitatem et pacis dignitatem retinere vultis, non modo a calamitate. 
 
 15 sed etiam a metu calamitatis est defendenda. Nam in ceteris rebus 
 cum venit calamitas, turn detrimentum accipitur; at in vectigalibus 
 non solum adventus mali, sed etiam metus ipse affert calamitatem. 
 Nam cum hostium copiae non longe absunt, etiam si irruptio nulla 
 facta est, tamen pecuaria relinquitur, agri cultura deseritur, merca- 
 torum navigatio conquiescit. Ita neque ex portu neque ex decumis 
 neque ex scriptura vectigal conservari potest; quare saepe totius anni 
 
 16 fructus uno rumore periculi atque uno belli terrore amittitur. Quo 
 tandem [igitur] animo esse existimatis aut eos qui vectigalia nobis 
 pensitant, aut eos qui exercent atque exigunt, cum duo reges cum
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 169 
 
 maximis copiis propter adsint? cum una excursio equitatus perbrevi 
 tempore totius anni vectigal auferre possit? cum publicani familias 
 maximas, quas in saltibus habent, quas in agris, quas in portubus 
 atque custodiis, magno periculo se habere arbitrentur? Putatisne 
 vos illis rebus frui posse, nisi eos qui vobis fructui sunt conserve itis 
 non solum, ut ante dixi, calamitate, sed etiam calamitatis formidine 
 liberates? 
 
 7. Ac ne illud quidem vobis neglegendum est, quod mihi ego 17 
 extremum proposueram cum essein de belli genere dicturus, quod 
 ad multorum bona civium Romanorum pertinet ; quorum vobis pro 
 vestra sapientia, Quirites, habenda est ratio diligenter. Nam et 
 publicani, homines honestissimi atque ornatissimi, suas rationes et 
 copias in illam provinciam contulerunt, quorum ipsorum per se res 
 et fortunae vobis curae esse debent. Etenim, si vectigalia nervos 
 esse rei publicae semper duximus, eum certe ordinem, qui exercet 
 ilia, firmamentum ceterorum ordinutn recte esse dicemus. Deinde 18 
 ex ceteris ordinibus homines gnavi atque industrii partim ipsi in 
 Asia negotiantur, quibus vos absentibus consulere debetis, partim 
 eorum in ea provincia pecunias magnas coilocatas habent. Est 
 igitur humanitatis vestrae magnum numerum eorum civium calami- 
 tate prohibere, sapientiae videre multorum civium calamitatem a re 
 publica seiunctam esse non posse. Etenim primum illud parvi 
 refert, nos publicanis omissis vectigalia postea victoria recuperare; 
 neque enim isdem redimendi facultas erit propter calamitatem, 
 neque aliis voluntas propter timorem. Deinde, quod nos eadem 19 
 Asia atque idem iste Mithridates initio belli Asiatici docuit, id 
 quidem certe calamitate docti memoria retinere debemus. Nam 
 turn, cum in Asia res magnas permulti amiserant, scimus Romae 
 solutione impedita fidem concidisse. Non enim possunt una in 
 civitate multi rem ac fortunas amittere, ut non plures secum in 
 eanclem trahant calamitatem. A quo periculo prohibete rem publi- 
 cam, et mihi credite id quod ipsi videtis: haec fides atque haec 
 ratio pecuniarum, quae Romae, quae in foro versatur, inplicata 
 est cum illis pecuniis Asiaticis et cohaeret ; ruere ilia non possunt, 
 ut haec non eodem i;ibcf;icta motu concidant. Quare videte nc non 
 dubitandum vobis sit omni studio ad id bellum incumbere, in quo
 
 I 70 LATIN TEXT 
 
 gloria nominis vestri, salus sociorum, vectigalia maxima, fortunae 
 plurimorum civium coniunctae cum re publica defendantur. 
 
 20 8. Quoniam de genere belli dixi, nunc de magnitudine pauca di- 
 cam. Potest enim hoc dici, belli genus esse ita necessarium ut ?it 
 gerendum, non esse ita magnum ut sit pertimescendum. In quo 
 maxime laborandufn est ne forte ea vobis quae diligentissime pro- 
 videnda sunt, contemnenda esse videantur. Atque ut omnes intelle- 
 gant me L. Lucullo tantum impertire laudis quantum forti viro et 
 sapienti homini et mngno imperatori debeatur, dico eius adventu 
 maximas Mithridati copias omnibus rebus ornatas atque instructas 
 fuisse; urbemque, Asiae clarissimam nobisque amicissimam, Cyzice- 
 norum obsessam esse ab ipso rege maxima multitudine et oppugna- 
 tam vehementissime, quam L. Lucullus virtute, assiduitate. consilio 
 
 21 summis obsidionis periculis liberavit; ab eodem imperatore classem 
 magnam et ornatam, quae ducibus Sertorianis ad Italiam studio 
 [atque odio] inflammata raperetur, superatam esse atque depressam ; 
 magnas hostium praeterea copias multis proeliis esse deletas pate- 
 factumque nostris legionibus esse Pontum, qui antea populo Ro- 
 mano ex omni aditu clausus fuisset; Sinopen atque Amisum, qui- 
 bus in oppidis erant domicilia regis, omnibus rebus ornatas ac 
 refertas, ceterasque urbes Ponti et Cappadociae permultas, uno 
 aditu adventuque esse captas; regem, spoliatum regno patrio atque 
 avito, ad alios se reges atque ad alias gentes supplicem contulisse; 
 atque haec omnia salvis populi Romani sociis atque integris vecti- 
 galibus esse gesta. Satis opinor haec esse laudis, atque ita, Qui- 
 rites, ut hoc vos intellegatis, a nullo istorum, qui huic obtrectant 
 legi atque causae, L. Lucullum similiter ex hoc loco esse laudatum. 
 
 22 9. Requiretur fortasse nunc quern ad modum, cum haec ita sint, 
 reliquum. possit magnum .esse bellum. Cognoscite, Quirites; non 
 enim hoc sine causa quaeri videtur. Primum ex suo regno sic 
 Mithridates profugit ut ex eodem Ponto Medea ilia quondam pro- 
 fugisse dicitur, quam praedicant in fuga fratris sui membra in iis 
 locis qua se parens persequeretur dissipavisse, ut eorum collectio 
 dispersa maerorque patrius celeritatem persequendi retardaret. Sic 
 Mithridates fugiens maximam vim auri atque argenti pulcherrima- 
 rumque return omnium, quas et a maioribus acceperat et ipse bello
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 171 
 
 superiore ex tola Asia dire pi as in stuiin regnuni congcsserat, in 
 Ponto omnem reliquit. Haec dum nostri colligunt omnia diligen- 
 tius, rex ipse e manibus effugit. Ita ilium in persequendi studio 
 niaeror, hos laetitia tardavit. Hunc in illo timore et fuga Tigranes, 23 
 rex Armenius, excepit, diffidentemque rebus suis confirmavit, et 
 adflictum erexit, perditumque recreavit. Cuius in regnuni postea- 
 quam L. Lucullus cum exercitu venit, plures etiam gentes contra 
 imperatorem nostrum concitatae sum. Erat enim metus iniectus 
 iis nationibus, quas numquam populus Romanus neque lacessendas 
 bello neque temptandas putavit; erat etiam alia gravis atque vehe- 
 mens opinio, quae animos gentium barbararum pervaserat, fani 
 locupletissimi et religiosissimi diripiendi causa in eas oras nostrum 
 esse exercitum adductum. Ita nationes multae atque magnae novo 
 quodam terrore ac metu concitabantur. Noster autem exercitus, 
 tametsi urbem ex Tigranis regno ceperat et proeliis usus erat se- 
 cundis, tamen nimia longinquitate locorum ac desiderio suorum 
 commovebatur. Hie iam plura non dicam ; fuit enim illud extre- 24 
 mum, ut ex iis locis a militibus nostris reditus magis maturus quam 
 processio longior quaereretur. Mithridates autem et suam manum 
 iam confirmarat et eorum qui se ex ipsius regno collegerant, et mag- . 
 nis adventiciis auxiliis multorum regum et nationum iuvabatur. Nam 
 hoc fere sic fieri solere accepimus, ut regum adflictae fortunae facile 
 multorum opes adliciant ad misericordiam, maximeque eorum, qui 
 aut reges sunt aut vivunt in regno, ut iis nomen regale magnum et 
 sanctum esse videatur. Itaque tantum victus efficere potuit quan- 25 
 turn incolumis numquam est ausus optare. Nam, cum se in regnum 
 suum recepisset, non fuit eo contentus quod ei praeter spem accide- 
 rat, lit illam, posteaquam pulsus erat, terram umquam attingeret, 
 sed in exercitum nostrum clarum atque victorem impetum fecit. 
 Sinite hoc loco, Quirites, sicut poetae solent, qui res Romanas 
 scribunt, praeterire me nostram calamitatem, quae tanta fuit ut earn 
 ad aures [L. Luculli] imperatoris non ex proelio nuntius, sed ex 
 sermone rumor adferret. Hie in illo ipso malo gravissimaque belli 26 
 offensione L. Lucullus, qui tamen aliqua ex parte iis incommodis 
 mederi fortasse potuisset, vestro iussu coactus, quod imperi diu- 
 turnitati modum statuendum vetere exemplo putavistis, partem
 
 172 LATIN TEXT 
 
 militum, qui iam stipemliis confecti erant, dimisit, p^rtem M\ 
 Glabrioni tradidit. Multa praetereo consulto; sed ea vos coniec- 
 turn perspicite, quantum illud bellum factum putetis quod coniuu- 
 gant reges potentissimi, renovent agitatae nationes, suscipiant in- 
 tegrae gentes, novus imperator noster accipiat vetere exercitu pulso. 
 
 27 10. Satis mihi multa verba fecisse videor, quare esset hoc bellum 
 genere ipso necessarium, magnitudine periculosum ; restat, ut de 
 imperatore ad id bellum deligendo ac tantis rebus praeficiendo 
 dicendum esse videatur. Utinam, Quirites, virorum fortium atque 
 innocentium copiam tantam haberetis ut haec vobis deliberatio 
 difficilis esset, quemnam potissimum tantis rebus ac tanto bello 
 praeficiendum putaretis! Nunc vero cum sit unus Cn. Pompeius, 
 qui non modo eorum hominum qui nunc sunt gloriam, sed etiam 
 antiquitatis memoriam virtute superarit, quae res est quae cuius- 
 
 28 quam animum in hac causa dubium facere possit? Ego enim sic 
 existimo, in summo imperatore quattuor has res inesse oportere, 
 scientiam rei militaris, virtutem, auctoritatem, felicitatem. Quis 
 igitur hoc homine scientior umquam aut fuit aut esse debuit ? qui e 
 ludo atque pueritiae disciplinis bello maximo atque acerrimis hosti- 
 bus ad patris exercitum atque in militiae disciplinam profectus est ; 
 qui extrema pueritia miles in exercitu fuit summi imperatoris, ine- 
 unte adulescentia maximi ipse exercitus imperator; qui saepius cum 
 hoste conflixit, quam quisquam cum inimico concertavit, plura 
 bella gessit quam ceteri legerunt, plures provincias confecit quam 
 alii concupiverunt ; cuius adulescentia ad scientiam , rei militaris 
 non alienis praeceptis sed suis imperils, non offensionibus belli sed 
 victoriis, non stipendiis sed triumphis est erudita. Quod denique 
 genus esse belli potest, in quo ilium non exercuerit fortuna rei 
 publicae ? Civile, Africanum. Transalpinum, Hispaniense mixtum 
 ex civitatibus atque ex bellicosissimis n?tionibus, servile, navale 
 bellum, varia et diversa genera et bellorum et hostium, non solum 
 gesta ab hoc uno sed etiam confecta, nullam rem esse declarant in 
 usu positam militari, quae huius viri scientiam fugere possit. 
 
 29 II. Iam vero virtuti Cn. Pompei quae potest oratio par inveniri ? 
 Quid est quod quisquam aut illo dignum aut vobis novum aut cui- 
 quam inauclitum possit adferre? Neque enim illae sunt solae vir-
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW . 173 
 
 tutes imperatoriae, quae vulgo existimantur, labor in negotiis, 
 fortitude in periculis, industria in agendo, celeritas in conficiendo, 
 consilium in providendo; quae tanta sunt in hoc uno quanta in 
 omnibus reliquis imperatoribus quos aut vidimus aut audivimus non 
 fuerunt. Testis est Italia, quam ille ipse victor L. Sulla huius vir- 30 
 tute et subsidio confessus est liberatam ; testis est Sicilia, quam 
 multis undique cinctam periculis non terrore belli, sed consi'i cele- 
 ritate explicavit; testis est Africa, quae, magnis oppressa hostium 
 copiis, eorum ipsorum sanguine redundavit; testis est Gallia, per 
 quam legionibus nostris iter in Hispaniam Gallorum internicione 
 patefactum est; testis est Hispania, quae saepissime plurimos ho- 
 stes ab hoc superatos prostratosque conspexit; testis est iterum et 
 saepius Italia, quae cum servili bello taetro periculosoque premere- 
 tur, ab hoc auxilium absente expetivit; quod bellum exspectatione 
 eius attenuatum atque imminutum est, adventu sublatum ac sepul- 
 tum; testes nunc vero iam omnes sunt orae atque omnes exterae 31 
 gentes ac nationes. denique maria omnia cum universa, turn H sin- 
 gulis oris omnes sinus atque portus. Quis enim toto mari locus per 
 hos annos aut tarn firmum habuit praesidium ut tutus esset aut tarn 
 fuit abditus ut lateret? Quis navigavit qui non se aut mortis aut 
 servitutis periculo committeret, cum aut hieme aut referto prae- 
 donum mari navigaret? Hoc tantum bellum, tarn turpe, tain vetus, 
 tarn late divisum atque dispersum, quis umquani arbitraretur aut ab 
 omnibus imperatoribus uno anno aut omnibus annis ab uno impera- 
 tore confici posse? Quam provinciam tenuistis a praedonibus libe- 32 
 ram per hosce annos ? quod vectigal vobis tutum fuit ? quem socium 
 defendistis? cui praesidio classibus vestris fuistis? quam multas 
 existimatis insulas esse desertas? quam multas aut metu relictas 
 aut a praedonibus captas urbes esse sociorum? 
 
 12. Sed quid ego longinqua commemoro? Fuit hoc quondam, 
 fuit proprium populi Romani longe a domo bellare et propugnaculis 
 imperi sociorum fortunas, non sua tecta defendere. Sociis ego 
 nostris mare per hos annos clausum fuisse dicam, cum exercitus 
 vestri numquam a Brundisio nisi hieme summa transmiserint? Qui 
 ad vos ab exteris nationibus venirent captos querar, cum legati 
 populi Romani redempti sint? Mercatoribus tutum mare non fuisse
 
 174 LATIN TEXT 
 
 dicam, cum duodecim secures in praedonum potestatem pervene- 
 
 33 rint? Cnidum aut Colophonem aut Samum, nobilissimas urbes, 
 innumerabilesque alias captas esse commemorem, cum vestros por- 
 tus, atque eos portus quibus vitam ac spiritum ducitis, in prae- 
 donum fuisse potestate sciatis? An vero ignoratis portum Caietae 
 celeberrimum ac plenissimum navium inspectante praetore a prae- 
 donibus esse direptum, ex Miseno autem eius ipsius liberos, qui 
 cum praedonibus antea ibi bellum gesserat, a praedonibus esse 
 sublatos? Nam quid ego Ostiense incommodum atque illam labem 
 atque ignominiam rei publicae querar, cum, prope inspectantibus 
 vobis, classis ea, cui consul populi Romani praepositus esset, a 
 praedonibus capta atque oppressa est? Pro di immortales! tan- 
 tamne unius hominis incredibilis ac divina virtus tam brevi tempore 
 lucem adferre rei publicae potuit, ut vos, qui modo ante ostium 
 Tiberinum classem hostium videbatis, ii nunc nullam intra Oceani 
 
 34 ostium praedonum navem esse audiatis? Atque haec qua celeritate 
 gesta sint quamquam videtis, tamen a me in dicendo praetereunda 
 non sunt. Quis enim umquam aut obeundi negoti aut consequendi 
 quaestus studio tam brevi. tempore totloca adire, tantos cursus con- 
 ficere potuit, quam celeriter Cn. Pompeio duce tanti belli impetus 
 navigavit? qui nondum tempestivo ad navigandum mari Siciliam 
 adiit, Africam exploravit, in Sardiniam cum classe venit, atque haec 
 tria frumentaria subsidia rei publicae firmissimis praesidiis classic 
 
 35 busque munivit. Inde cum se in Italiam recepisset, duabus His- 
 paniis et Gallia Transalpina praesidiis ac navibus confirmata, missis 
 item in oram Illyrici maris et in Achaiam omnemque Graeciam 
 navibus, Italiae duo maria maximis classibus firmissimisque prae- 
 sidiis adornavit; ipse autem ut Brundisio profectus est, undequin- 
 quagesimo die totam ad imperium populi Romani Ciliciam adiunxit ; 
 omnes,quiubique praedones fuerunt, partim capti interfectique sunt, 
 partim unius huius se imperio ac potestati dediderunt. Idem Cre- 
 tensibus, cum ad eum usque in Pamphyljam legates deprecatoresque 
 misissent, spem deditionis non ademit, obsidesque imperavit. Ita 
 tantum bellum, tam diuturnum, tam longe lateque dispersum, quo 
 bello omnes gentes ac nationes premebantur, Cn. Pompeius extrema 
 hieme apparavit, ineunte vere suscepit, media aestate coi.fecit.
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 175 
 
 13. Est haec divina atque incredibilis virtus imperatoris. Quid? 3^ 
 ceterae, quas paulo ante commemorate coeperam, quantae atque 
 quam multae sunt! Non enim bellandi virtus solum in summo ac 
 perfecto imperatore quaerenda est, sed multae sunt artes eximiae 
 huius administrae comitesque virtutis. Ac primum, quanta inno- 
 centia debent esse imperatores, quanta deinde in omnibus rebus 
 temperantia, quanta fide, quanta facilitate, quanto ingenio, quanta 
 humanitate ! quae breviter qualia sint in Cn. Pompeio consideremus. 
 Summa enim omnia sunt, Quirites, sed ea magis ex aliorum conten- 
 tione quam ipsa per sese cognosci atque intellegi possunt. Quern 37 
 enim imperatorem possumus ullo in numero putare, cuius in exer- 
 citu centuriatus veneant atque venierint ? Quid hunc hominem 
 magnum aut amplum de re publica cogitare, qui pecuniam, ex aera- 
 rio depromptam ad bellum administrandum, aut propter cupidita- 
 tem provinciae magistratibus diviserit aut propter avaritiam Romae 
 
 in quaestu reliquerit ? Vestra admurmuratio facit, Quirites, ut ag- 
 noscere videamini qui haec fecerint: ego autem nomino neminem , 
 quare irasci mihi nemo poterit, nisi qui ante de se voluerit confiteri. 
 Itaque propter hanc avaritiam imperatorum quantas calamitates, 
 quocumque ventum sit, nostri exercitus ferant quis ignorat ? Itinera 38 
 quae per hosce annos in Italia per agros atque oppida civium Ro- 
 manorum nostri imperatores fecerint recordamini ; turn facilius sta- 
 tuetis quid apud exteras nationes fieri existimetis. Utrum plures 
 arbitramini per hosce annos militum vestrorum armis hostium urbes 
 an hibernis sociorum civitates esse deletas ? Neque enim potest 
 exercitum is continere imperator qui se ipse non continet, neque se- 
 verus esse in iudicandoqui alios in se severos esse iudices non vult. 
 Hie miramur hunc hominem tantum excellere ceteris, cuius legiones 3 
 sic in Asiam pervenerint ut non modo manus tanti exercitus, sed ne 
 vestigium quidem cuiquam pacato nocuisse dicatur?. lam vero 
 quem ad modum milites hibernent cotidie sermones ac litterae per- 
 feruntur; non modo ut sumptum facial in militem nemini vis adfer- 
 tur, sed ne cupienti quidem cuiquam permittitur. Hiemis enim, 
 non avaritiae perfu^ium maiores nostri in sociorum atque amicorum 
 tectis esse voluerunt. 
 
 14. Age vero, ceteris in rebus qua sit temperantia considerate. 40
 
 I 76 LATIN TEXT 
 
 Unde illani tantam celeritatem et tam incredibilem cursum inventum 
 putatis? Non enim ilium eximia vis remigum aut ars inaudita 
 quaedam gubernandi aut vend aliqui novi tam celeriter in ultimas 
 terras pertulerunt, sed eae res, quae ceteros remorari solent, non 
 retardarunt ; non avaritia ab institute cursu ad praedam aliquani 
 devocavit, non libido ad voluptatem, non amoenitas ad delecta- 
 tionem, non nobilitas urbis ad cognitionem, non denique labor ipse 
 ad quietem ; postremo signa et tabulas ceteraque ornamenta Grae- 
 corum oppidorum, quae ceteri tollenda esse arbitrantur, ea sibi ille 
 
 41 ne visenda quidem existimavit. Itaque omnes nunc in iis locis Cn. 
 Pompeium sicut aliquem non ex hac urbe missum, seel cle caelo 
 delapsum intuentur; nunc denique incipiunt credere fuisse homines 
 Romanos hac quondam continentia, quod iam nationibus exteris 
 incredibile ac falso memoriae proditum videbatur; nunc imperi ves- 
 tri splendor illis gentibus lucem adferre coepit; nunc intellegunt 
 non sine causa maiores suos, turn cum ea temperantia magistratus 
 habebamus, servire populo Romano quam imperare aliis maluisse. 
 Iam vero ita faciles aditus ad eum privatorum, ita liberae querimo- 
 niae de aliorum iniuriis esse dicuntur, ut is, qui dignitate principi- 
 
 42 bus excellit, facilitate infimis par esse videatur. Iam quantum 
 consilio, quantum dicendi gravitate et copia valeat, in quo ipso 
 inest quaedam dignitas imperatoria, vos, Quirites, hoc ipso ex 
 loco saepe cognovistis. Fidem vero eius quantam inter socios ex- 
 istimari putatis, quam hostes omnes omnium generum sanctissimam 
 iudicarint? Humanitate iam tanta est ut difficile dictu sit utrum 
 hostes magis virtutem eius pugnantes timuerint, an mansuetudinem 
 victi dilexerint. Et quisquam dubitabit quin huic hoc tantum bel- 
 lum transmittendum sit, qui ad omnia nostrae memoriae bella con- 
 ficienda divino quodam consilio natus esse videatur? 
 
 43 15. Et quoniam auctoritas quoque in bellis administrandis multum 
 atque in imperio militari valet, certe nemini dubium est quin ea re 
 idem ille imperator plurimum possit. Vehementer autem pertinere 
 ad bella administranda, quid hostes, quid socii de imperatoribus 
 nostris existiment quis ignorat, cum sciamus homines, in tantis 
 rebus ut aut contemnant aut metuant aut oderint aut ament, opi- 
 nione non minus et fama quam aliqua ratione certa commoven-'
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW 177 
 
 Quod igitur nomen umquam in orbe terrarum clarius fuit, cuius res 
 gestae pares? de quo homine vos, id quod maxime facit auctorita- 
 tem, tanta et tarn praeclara iudicia fecistis? An vero ullam usquam 44 
 esse oram tam desertam putatis, quo non illius die! fama pervaserit, 
 cum universus populus Romanus, referto foro completisque om- 
 nibus templis ex quibus hie locus conspici potest, unum sibi ad 
 commune omnium gentium bellum Cn. Pompeium imperatorem de- 
 poposcit? Itaque ut plura non dicam, neque aliorum exemplis 
 confirmem quantum [huius] auctoritas valeat in bello abeodem Cn. 
 Pompeio omnium rerum egregiarum exempla sumantur ; qui quo die 
 a vobis maritime bello praepositus est imperator, tanta repente vili- 
 tas annonae ex sum ma inopia et caritate rei frumentariae consecuta 
 est unius hominis spe ac nomine, quantam vix ex summa ubertate 
 arorum diiiturna pax efficere potuisset. lam accepta in Ponto ca- 45 
 lamitate ex eo proelio de quo vos paulo ante invitus admonui, cum 
 socii pertimuissent, hostium opes animique crevissent, satis firmum 
 praesidium provincia non haberet, amisissetis Asiam, Quirites, nisi 
 ad ipsum discrimen eius temporis divinitus Cn. Pompeium ad eas 
 regiones fortuna populi Romani attulisset. Huius adventus et 
 Mithridatem insolita inflammatum victoria continuit, et Tigranem 
 magnis copiis minitantem Asiae retardavit. Et quisquam dubitabit 
 quid virtute perfecturus sit, qui tantum auctoritate perfecerit, aut 
 quam facile imperio atque exercitu socios et vectigalia conserva- 
 turus sit, qui ipso nomine ac rumore defenderit? 
 
 16. Age vero ilia res quantam declarat eiusdem hominis apud 46 
 hostes populi Romani auctoritatem, quod ex locis tam longinquis 
 tamque diversis tam brevi tempore omnes huic se uni dediderunt ! 
 quod Cretensium legati, cum in eorum insula noster imperator exer- 
 citusque esset, ad Cn. Pompeium in ultimas prope terras venerunt, 
 eique se omnes Cretensium civitates dedere velle dixerunt ! Quid? 
 idem iste Mithridates nonne ad eundem Cn. Pompeium legatum 
 usque in Hispaniam misit ? eum quern Pompeius legatum semper 
 iudicavit, ii quibus erat [semper] molestum ad eum potissimum esse 
 missum, speculatorem quam legatum iudicari maluerunt. Potestis 
 igitur iam constituere, Quirites, hanc auctoritatem, multis postea 
 rebus gestis magnisque vestris iudiciis amplificatam, quantum apud
 
 178 LATIN TEXT 
 
 illos regts, quantum apud exteras naliones valiuir.un esse existu- 
 metis. 
 
 47 Reliquuiri est ut de felicitate (quam praestare de se ipso nemo 
 potest, nieminisse et commemorate de altero possumus, sicut aequum 
 est homines de potestate deorum) timide et pauca dicamus. Ego 
 eniin sic existimo : Maximo, Marcello, Scipioni, Mario, et ceteris 
 magnis imperatoribus non solum propter virtutem, sed etiam propter 
 fortuitnm saepius imperia mandata atque exercitus esse commissos. 
 Fuit eniin profecto quibusdam summis viris quaedam ad ampli- 
 tudiiK-m et ad gloriam et ad res magnas bene gerendas divinitus 
 adiuiicta fortuna. De huius autem hominis felicitate, de quo nunc 
 agimus, hac utar moderatione dicendi, non ut in illius potestate for- 
 tunam positam esse dicam, sed ut praeterita meminisse, reliqua 
 sperare videamur, ne aut invisa dis immortalibus oraiio nostra aut 
 
 48 ingrata esse videatur. Itaque non sum praedicaturus quantas ille 
 res clomi militiae, terra marique, quantaque felicitate gesserit; ut 
 eius semper voluntatibus non modo cives adsenserint, socii obtem- 
 pernrint, hostes oboedierint, sed etiam vend tempestatesque obse- 
 cundarint: hoc brevissime dicam, neminem umquam tarn impuden- 
 teii) fuisse qui ab dis immortalibus tot et tantas res tacitus auderet 
 optare, quot et quantas di immortales ad Cn. Pompeium detulerunt. 
 Quod ut illi proprium ac perpetuum sit, Quirites, cum communis sa- 
 lutis atque imperi turn ipsius hominis causa, sicuti facitis, velle et 
 op: are debetis. 
 
 49 Qjare, cum et bellum sit ita necessarium ut neglegi non possit, 
 iti magnum ut accuratissime sit administrandum ; et cum ei impe- 
 r rorein praeficere possitis, in quo sit eximia belli scientia, singularis 
 virtus, clarissima auctoritas, egregia fortuna, dubitatis, Quirites, 
 quin hoc tantum boni, quod vobis ab dis immortalibus oblatum et 
 datum est, in rem publicam conservandam atque amplificandam 
 conferatis ? 
 
 50 17. Quod si Romae Cn. Pompeius privatus esset hoc tempore, 
 tamen ad tantum bellum is erat deligendus atque mittendus; nunc 
 cum ad ceteras summas utilitates haec quoque oportunitas adiunga- 
 tur, ut in iis ipsis locis adsit, ut habeat exercitum, ut ab iis qui 
 habent accipere statim possit, quid expectamus ? aut cur non duci-
 
 CICERO, MAN1L1AN LAW 179 
 
 bus dis immortalibus eidera, cui cetera summa cum salute rei publi- 
 cae commissa sunt, hoc quoque bellum regium committamus ? 
 
 At enim vir clarissimus, amantissimus rei publicae, vestris bene- 5 
 ficiis amplissimis adfectus, Q. Catulus, itemque summis ornamentis 
 honoris, fortunae, virtutis, ingeni praeditus, Q. Hortensius, ab hac 
 ratione dissentiunt. Quorum ego auctoritatem apud vos multis 
 locis plurimum valuisse et valere oportere confiteor ; sed in hac 
 causa, tametsi cognoscetis auctoritates contrarias virorum fortissi- 
 morum et clarissimorum, tamen omissis auctoritatibus ipsa re ac ra- 
 tione exquirere possumus veritatem, atque hoc facilius, quod ea 
 omnia quae a me adhuc dicta sunt idem isti vera esse concedunt, 
 et necessarium bellum esse et magnum, et in uno Cn. Pompeio sum- 
 ma esse omnia. Quid igitur ait Hortensius ? Si uni omnia tribuen- 52 
 da sint, dignissimum esse Pompeium, sed ad unum tamen omnia 
 deferri non oportere. Obsolevit iam ista oratio, re multo magis 
 quam verbis refutata. Nam tu idem, Q. Hortensi, multa pro tua 
 summa copia ac singular} facultate diceridi et in senatu contra virum 
 fortem, A. Gabinium, graviter ornateque dixisti, cum is de uno im- 
 peratore contra praedones constituendo legem promulgasset, et ex 
 hoc ipso loco permulta item contra earn legem verba fecisti. Quid ? 53 
 turn, per deos immortales ! si plus apud populum Romanum auctori- 
 tas tua quAm ipsius populi Romani salus et vera causa valuisset, 
 hodie hanc gloriam atque hocorbis terrae imperium teneremus? An 
 tibi turn imperium hoc esse videbatur cum populi Romani legati, 
 quaestores, praetoresque capiebantur, cum ex omnibus provinciis 
 commeatu et privato et publico prohibebamur, cum ita clausa nobis 
 erant maria omnia ut neque privatam rem transmarinam neque pu- 
 blicam iam obire possemus? 
 
 18. Qtfae civitas antea umquam fuit, non dico Atheniensium, 54 
 quae satis late quondam mare tenuisse dicitur ; non Carthaginien- 
 sium, qui permultum classe ac maritimis rebus valuerunt; non 
 Rhodiorum, quorum usque ad nostram memoriam disciplina navalis 
 et gloria remansit, quae civitas, inquam, antea tarn tenuis, quae tam 
 parva insula fuit, quae non portus suos et agros et aliquam partem 
 vegionis atque orae maritimae per se ipsa clefenrleret ? At, lu-rrule, 
 aliquot annos continues ante legem Gabiniam ille populus Romanus,
 
 l8o LATIN TEXT 
 
 cuius usque ad nostram memoriam nomen invictum in navalibus 
 pugnis permanserit, magna ac multo maxima parte non modo utili 
 
 55 tatis, sed dignitatis atque imperi caruit; nos, quorum maiores An- 
 tiochum regem classe Persemque superarunt, omnibusque navalibus 
 pugnis Carthaginiensis, homines in maritimis rebus exercitatissumos 
 paratissumosque, vicerunt, ii nullo in loco iam praedonibus pares esse 
 poteramus ; nos, qui antea non modo Italiam tutam habebamus, sed 
 omnessocios inultimis oris auctorilate nostri imperi salvos praestare 
 poteramus. turn cum insula Delos, tarn procul a nobis in Aegaeo 
 mari posita, quo omnes undique cum mercibus atque oneribus com- 
 meabant, referta divitiis, parva, sine muro, nihil timebat, idem non 
 modo provinciis atque oris Italiae maritimis ac portubus nostris, sed 
 etiam Appia iam via carebamus; et iis temporibus non pudebat 
 magistratus populi Romani in hunc ipsum locum escendere, cum 
 eum nobis maiores nostri exuviis nauticis et classium spoliis orna- 
 tum reliquissent! 
 
 56 19. Bono te anirno turn, Q. Hortensi, populus Romanus et cete- 
 ros qui erant in eadem sententia dicere existimavit ea quae sentie- 
 batis; sed tamen in salute communi idem populus Romanus dolori 
 suo maluit quam auctoritati vestrae optemperare. Itaque una lex, 
 unus vir, unus annus non modo nos ilia miseria ac turpitudine libe- 
 ravit, sed etiam effecit ut aliquando vere videremur omnibus genti- 
 
 57 bus ac nationibus terra marique imperare. Quo mihi etiam indig- 
 nius videtur obtrectatum esse adhuc, Gabinio dicam anne Pompeio 
 an utrique, id quod est veiius ? ne legaretur A. Gabinius Cn. Pom- 
 peio expetenti ac postulanti. Utrum ille, qui postulat ad tantum 
 bellum legatum quern velit, idoneus non est qui impetret, cum ceteri 
 ad expilandos socios diripiendasque provincias quos voluerunt lega- 
 tes eduxerint ; an ipse, cuius lege salus ac dignitas populo Romano 
 
 atque omnibus gentibus constituta est, expers esse debet gloriae 
 eius imperatoris atque eius exercitus qui consilio ipsius ac periculo 
 
 58 est constitutus ? An C. Falcidius, Q. Metellus, Q. Caelius Latinien- 
 sis, Cn. Lentulus, quos omnes honoris causa nomino, cum tribuni 
 plebi fuissent, anno proximo legati esse potuerunt; in uno Gabinio 
 sunt tam diligentes, qui in hoc bello, quod lege Gabinia geritur, in 
 hoc imperatore atque exercitu, quem per vos ipse constituit, etiam
 
 CICERO, MANILIAN LAW l8l 
 
 praecipuo iure esse deberet ? De quo legando consules spero ad 
 senatum relaturos. Qui si dubitabunt aut gravabuntur, ego me 
 profiteer relatururh; neque me impediet cuiusquam inimicum edic- 
 tum quo minus vobis fretus vestrum ius beneficiumque defendam ; 
 neque praeter intercessionem quicquam audiam, de qua, ut arbiiror, 
 isti ipsi qui minantur etiam atque etiam quid liceat considerabunt. 
 Mea quidem sententia, Quirites, unus A. Gabinius belli maritimi 
 rerumque gestarum Cn. Pompeio socius ascribitur, propterea quod 
 alter uni illud bellum suscipiendum vestris suffrages detulit, alter 
 delatum susceptumqtie confecit. 
 
 20. Reliquum est ut de Q. Catuli auctoritate et sententia dicen- 59 
 dum esse videatur. Qui cum ex vobis quaereret, si in uno Cn. 
 Pompeio omnia poneretis, si quid eo factum esset, in quo spem 
 essetis habituri, cepit magnum suae virtutis fructum ac dignitatis, 
 cum omnes una prope voce in eo ipso vos spem habituros esse 
 dixistis. Etenim talis est vir ut nulla res tanta sit ac tarn difficilis 
 quam ille non et consilio regere et integritate tueri et virtute confi- 
 cere possit. Sed in hoc ipso ab eo vehementissime dissentio, quod, 
 quo minus certa est hominum ac minus diuturna vita, hoc magis 
 res publica, dum per deos immortales licet, frui debet summi viri 
 vita atque virtute. " At enim ne quid novi fiat contra exempla atque 60 
 instituta maiorum.'' Non dicam hoc loco maiores nostros semper in 
 pace consuetudini, in bello utilitati paruisse; semper ad novos casus 
 temporum novorum consiliorum rationes accommodasse : non dicam 
 duo bella maxima, Punicum atque Hispaniense, ab uno imperatore 
 esse confecta, duasque urbes potentissimas, quae huic imperio 
 maxime minitabantur, Karthaginem atque Numantiam, ab eodem 
 Scipione esse deletas : non commemorabo nuper ita vobis patribus- 
 que vestris esse visum, ut in uno C. Mario spes imperi poneretur, 
 ut idem cum lugurtha, idem cum Cimbris, idem cum Teutonis bel- 
 lum administraret. in ipso Cn. Pompeio, in quo novi constitui (n 
 nihil vult Q. Catulus, quam multa sint nova summa Q. Catuli vo- 
 luntate constituta recordamini. 
 
 21. Quid tarn novum quam adulescentulum privatum exercitum 
 difficili rei publicae tempore conficere? Confecit. Huic praeesse? 
 Praefuit. Rem optime ductu suo gerere? Gessit. Quid tarn praeter
 
 182 LATIN TEXT 
 
 consuetudinem quam homini peradulescenti, cuius aetas a senatorio 
 gradu longe abesset, imperium atque exercitum dari, Sicilian! per- 
 mitti, atque Africam bellumque in ea provincia administrandum ? 
 Fuit-in his provinciis singular! innocentia, gravitate, virtute ; bellum 
 in Africa maximum confecit, victorem exercitum deportavit. Quid 
 vero tarn inauditum quam equitem Romanum triumphare? At earn 
 quoque rem populus Romanus non modo vidit, sed omnium etiam 
 52 studio visendam et concelebrandam putavit. Quid tarn inusitatum 
 quam ut, cum duo consules clarissimi fortissimique essent, eques 
 Romanus ad bellum maximum formidolosissimumque pro consule 
 mitteretur? Missus est. Quo quidem tempore cum esset non 
 nemo in senatu qui diceret " non oportere mitti hominem privatum 
 pro consule," L. Philippus dixisse dicitur " non se ilium sua senten- 
 tia pro consule, sed pro consulibus mittere." Tanta in eo rei 
 publicae bene gerendae spes constituebatur, ut duorum consulum 
 munus unius adulescentis virtuti committeretur. Quid tarn singu- 
 lare quam ut ex senatus consulto legibus solutus consul ante fieret 
 quam ullum alium magistratum per leges capere licuisset ? quid 
 tarn incredibile quam ut iterum eques Romanus ex senatus consulto 
 triumpharet ? Quae in omnibus hominibus nova post hominum 
 memoriam constituta sunt, ea tarn multa non sunt quam haec quae 
 
 63 in hoc uno homine videmus. Atque haec tot exempla, tanta ac 
 tarn nova, profecta sunt in eundem hominem a Q. Catuli atque a 
 ceterorum eiusdem dignitatis amplissimorum hominum auctoritate. 
 
 22. Quare videant ne sit periniquum et non ferundum illorum 
 auctoritatem de Cn. Pompei dignitate a vobis comprobatam sem- 
 per esse, vestrum ab illis de eodem homine iudicium populique 
 Romani auctoritatem improbari; praesertim cum iam suo iure popu- 
 lus Romanus in hoc homine suam auctoritatem vel contra omnes 
 qui dissentiunt possit defendere, propterea quod, isdem istis recla- 
 mantibus, vos unum ilium ex omnibus delegistis quern bello prae- 
 
 64 donum praeponeretis. Hoc si vos temere fecistis, et rei publicae 
 parum consuluistis, recte isti studia vestra suis consiliis regere co- 
 nantur; sin autem vos plus turn in re publica vidistis, vos iis repug- 
 nantibus per vosmet ipsos dignitatem huic imperio, salutem orbi 
 terrarum attulistis, aliquando isti principes et sibi et ceteris populi
 
 CICERO, MANILJAN LAW 183 
 
 Roniani universi auctoritati parendum esse fateantur. Atque in 
 hoc bello Asiatico et regio non solum militaris ilia virtus, quae est 
 in Cn. Pompeio singularis, sed aliae quoque virtutes animi magnae 
 et multae requiruntur. Difficile est in Asia, Cilicia, Syria, regnis- 
 que interiorum nationum ita versari nostrum imperatorem ut nihil 
 aliud nisi de hoste ac de laude cogitet. Deinde, etiam si qui sunt 
 pudore ac temperantia moderatiores, tamen eos esse tales propter 
 multitudinem cupidorum hominum nemo arbitratur. Difficile est 6 5 
 dictu, Quirites, quanto in odio simus apud exteras nationes propter 
 eorum quos ad eas per hos annos cum imperio tnisimus libidines et 
 iniurias. Quod enim fanum putatis in illis terris nostris magistrati- 
 bus religiosum, quam civitatem sanctam, quam domum satis clausam 
 ac munitam fuisse? Urbes iam locupletes et copiosae requiruntur 
 quibus causa belli propter diripiendi cupiditatem infera.tur. Liben- 66 
 ter haec coram cum Q. Catulo et Q. Hortensio, summis et claris- 
 simis viris, disputarem; noverunt enim sociorum vulnera, vident 
 eorum calamitates, querimonias audiunt. Pro sociis vos contra 
 hostes exercitum mittere putatis, an hostium simulatione contra 
 socios atque amicos ? Quae civitas es.t in Asia quae non modo im- 
 peratoris aut legati, sed unius tribuni militum animos ac spiritus 
 capere possit? 
 
 23. Quare, etiam si quem habetis qui collatis signis exercitus re- 
 gios superare posse videatur, tamen, nisi erit idem qui se a pecuniis 
 sociorum, qui ab eorum coniugibus ac liberis [qui ab ornamentis 
 fanorum atque oppidorum], qui ab auro gazaque regia manus, ocu- 
 los, animum cohibere possit, non erit idoneus qui ad bellum Asiati- 
 cum regiumque mittatur. Ecquam putatis civitatem pacatam fuisse 67 
 quae locuples sit, ecquam esse locupletem quae istis pacata esse 
 videatur? Ora maritime, Quirites, Cn. Pompeium non solum prop- 
 ter rei militaris gloriam, sed etiam propter animi continentiam re- 
 quisivit. Videbat enim imperatores locupletari quotannis pecunia 
 publica praeter paucos, neque eos quicquam aliud adsequi classium 
 nomine, nisi ut detrimentis accipiendis maiore adfici turpitudine 
 videremur. Nunc qua cupiditate homines in provincias et quibus 
 iacturis, quibus condicionibus proficiscantur, ignorant videlicet isti 
 qui ad unum deferenda omnia esse non arbitrantur. Quasi vero
 
 184 LATIN TEXT 
 
 Cn. Pompeium non cum suis virtutibus tuni etiam alienis vitiis 
 
 68 magnum esse videamus. Quare nolite dubitare quin huic uui cre- 
 datis omnia, qui inter tot annos unus inventus sit quern socii in 
 urbes suas cum exercitu venisse gaudeant. 
 
 Quod si auctoritatibus hanc causam, Quirites, confirmandam 
 putatis, est vobis auctor vir bellorum omnium maximarumque rerum 
 peritissimus, P. Servilius, cuius tantae res gestae terra marique ex- 
 titerunt, ut, cum de bello deliberetis, auctor vobis gravior esse nemo 
 debeat ; est C. Curio, summis vestris beneficiis maximisque rebus 
 gestis, summo ingenio et prudentia praeditus ; est Cn. Lentulus, in 
 quo omnes pro amplissimis vestris honoribus summum consilium, 
 summam gravitatem esse cognovistis ; est C. Cassius, integritate, 
 virtute, constantia singulari. Quare videte horum auctoritatibus 
 illorum orationi, qui dissentiunt, responderew posse videamur. 
 
 69 24. Quae cum ita sint, C. Manili, primum istam tuam et legem et 
 voluntatem et sententiam laudo vehementissimeque comprobo; de- 
 inde te hortor ut auctore populo Romano maneas in sententia, neve 
 cuiusquam vim aut minas pertimescas. Primum, in te satis esse 
 animi perseverantiaeque arbitror; deinde, cum tantam multitudinem 
 cum tanto studio adesse videamus, quantam iterum nunc in eodem 
 homine praeficiendo videmus, quid est quod aut de re aut de per- 
 ficiendi facultate dubitemus ? Ego autem, quicquid est in me studi, 
 consili, laboris, ingeni, quicquid hoc beneficio populi Romani atque 
 hac potestate praetoria, quicquid auctoritate, fide, constantia pos- 
 sum, id omne ad hanc rem conficiendam tibi et populo Romano 
 
 70 polliceor ac defero ; testorque omnes deos, et eos maxime qui huic 
 loco temploque praesident, qui omnium mentes eorum qui ad rem 
 publicam adeunt maxime perspiciunt, me hoc neque rogatu facere 
 cuiusquam, neque quo Cn. Pompei gratiam mihi per hanc causam 
 conciliari putem, neque quo mihi ex cuiusquam amplitudine aut 
 praesidia periculis aut adiumenta honoribus quaeram ; propterea 
 quod pericula facile, ut hominem praestare oportet, innocentia tecti 
 repellemus, honorem autem neque ab uno neque ex hoc loco, sed 
 eadem ilia nostra laboriosissima ratione vitae, si vestra voluntas 
 
 71 feret, consequemur. Quam ob rem, quicquid in hac causa mihi sus- 
 ceptum est, Quirites, id ego omne me rei publicae causa suscepisse
 
 CICERO, ARCH IAS 185 
 
 confirmo ; tantumque abest ut aliquam mihi botiam gratiam quae- 
 sisse videar, ut multas me etiam simultates partim obscuras, partim 
 apertas intellegam mihi non necessarias, vobis non inutiles sus- 
 cepisse. Sed ego me hoc honore praeditum, tantis vestris beneficiis 
 adfectum statui, Quirites, vestram voluntatem et rei pubiicae digni- 
 tatem et salutem provinciarum atque sociorum meis omnibus com- 
 modis et rationibus praeferre oportere. 
 
 Cicero, Archias 
 
 1. Si quid est in me ingeni, indices, quod sentio quam sit exi- i 
 guum, aut si qua exercitatio dicendi, in qua me non infitior medio- 
 criter esse versatum, aut si huiusce rei ratio aliqua ab optimarum 
 artium studiis ac disciplina profecta, a qua ego nulluin confiteor 
 aetatis meae tempus abhorruisse, earum rerum omnium vel in 
 primis hie A. Licinius fructum a me repetere prope suo iure debet. 
 Nam quoad longissime potest mens inea respicere spatium praete- 
 riti temporis, et pueritiae memoriam recordari ultimam, inde usque 
 repetens hunc video mihi principem et ad suscipiendam et ad in- 
 grediendam rationem horum sturliorum extitisse. Quod si haec 
 vox, huius hortatu praeceptisque conformata, non nullis aliquando 
 saluti fuit, a quo id accepimus quo ceteris opitulari et alios servare 
 possemus, huic profecto ipsi, quantum est situm in nobis, et opem 
 et salutem ferre debemus. Ac ne quis a nobis hoc ita dici forte 2 
 miretur, quod alia quaedam in hoc facultas sit ingeni, neque haec 
 dicendi ratio aut disciplina, ne nos quidem huic uni studio penitus 
 umquam dediti fuimus. Etenim omnes artes, quae ad humanitatem 
 pertinent, habent quoddam commune vinclum, et quasi cognatione 
 quadam inter se continentur. 
 
 2. Sed ne cui vestrum mirum essevideatur me in quaestione legi- 3 
 tima et in iudicio publico, cum res agatur apud praetorem populi 
 Romani, lectissimum virum, et apud severissimos iudices, tanto con- 
 ventu hominum ac frequentia, hoc uti genere dicendi, quod non 
 modo a consuetudine iudiciorum, verum etiam a forensi sermone 
 abhorreat ; quaeso a vobis ut in hac causa mihi cletis hanc veniam,
 
 1 86 LATIN TEXT 
 
 accummodatam huic reo, vobis, quern ad modum spero, non molt 
 stam, ut me pro summo poeta atque eruditissimo huiniue dicentem. 
 hoc concursu hominum litteratissimorum, hac vestra humanitate, 
 hoc denique praetore exercente iudicium, patiamini de studiis hu- 
 manitatis ac litterarum paulo loqui liberius, et in eius modi personn, 
 quae propter otium ac studium minime in iudiciis periculisque trac- 
 
 4 tata est, uti prope novo quodam et inusitato genere dicendi. Quod 
 si mihi a vobis tribui concedique sentiam, perficiam profecto ut 
 hunc A. Licinium non modo non segregandum, cum sit civis, a nu 
 mero civium, verum etiam, si non esset, putetis asciscendum fuisse. 
 
 3. Nam, ut primum ex pueris excessit Archias atque ab iis arti- 
 bus quibus aetas puerilis ad humanitatem informari solet se ad 
 scribendi studium contulit, primum Antiochiae (nam ibi natus est 
 loco nobili), celebri quondam urbe et copiosa atque eruditissimis 
 hominibus liberalissimisque studiis affluent!, celeriter antecellere 
 omnibus ingeni gloria coepit. Post in ceteris Asiae partibus cunc- 
 taque Graecia sic eius adventus celebrabrantur ut famam ingeni 
 expectatio hominis/expectationem ipsius adventus admiratioque su- 
 
 5 peraret. Erat Italia turn plena Graecarum artium ac disciplinarum, 
 studiaque haec et in Latio vehementius turn colebantur quam nunc 
 isdem in oppidis, et hie Romae propter tranquillitatem rei publicae 
 non neglegebantur. Itaque hunc et Tarentini et Locrenses et Regini 
 et Neapolitani civitate ceterisque praemiis donarunt; et omnes, qui 
 aliquid de ingeniis poterant iudicare, cognitione atque hospitio dig- 
 num existimarunt. Hac tanta celebritate famae cum esset iam 
 absentibus notus, Romam venit Mario consule et Catulo. Nactus 
 est primum consules eos, quorum alter res ad scribendum maxumas, 
 alter cum res gestas turn etiam studium atque aures adhibere posset. 
 Statim Luculli, cum praetextatus etiam turn Archias esset, eum do- 
 mum suam receperunt. Et erat hoc non solum ingeni ac litterarum. 
 verum etiam naturae atque virtutis, ut domus, quae huius adulescen- 
 
 6 tiae prima favit, eadem esset familiarissima senectuti. Erat tem- 
 poribus illis iucundus Q. Metello illi Numidico et eius Pio filio ; 
 audiebatur a M. Aemilio ; vivebat cum Q. Catulo et patre et filio ; 
 a L. Crasso colebatur; Lucullos vero et Drusum et Octavios et 
 Catonem et totam Hortensiorum domum devinctam consuetudine
 
 CICERO, ARCHIAS 187 
 
 cum teneret, afficiebatur summo honore, quod eum non solum cole- 
 bant qui aliquid percipere atque audire studebant, verum etiam si 
 qui forte simulabant. 
 
 4. Interim satis longo intervallo, cum esset cum M. Lucullo in 
 Siciliam profectus, et cum ex ea provincia cum eodem Lucullo de- 
 cederet, venit Heracleam. Quae cum esset civitas aequissimo Jure 
 ac foedere, adscribi se in earn civitatem voluit; idque, cum ipse per 
 se dignus putaretur, turn auctoritate et gratia Luculli ab Heracli- 
 ensibus impetravit. Data est civitas Silvani lege et Carbonis : Si 7 
 
 QUI FOEDERATIS CIVITATIBUS ADSCRIPTI FUISSENT ; SI TUM, CUM LEX 
 FEREBATUR, IN ITALIA DOMICILIUM HABUISSENT; ET SI SEXAGINTA 
 
 DIEBUS APUD PRAETOREM ESSENT PROFESSI. Cum hie domicilium 
 Romae multos iam annos haberet, professus est apud praetorem Q. 
 Metellum, familiarissimum suum. Si nihil aliud nisi de civitate ac s 
 lege dicimus, nihil dico amplius ; causa dicta est. Quid enim horu-m 
 infirmari, Gratti, potest? Heracleaene esse eum adscriptum ne- 
 gabis ? Adest vir summa auctoritate et religione et fide, M. Lucul- 
 lus ; qui se non opinari sed scire, non audivisse sed vidisse, non 
 interfuisse sed egisse dicit. Adsunt Heraclienses legati, nobilis- 
 simi homines ; huius iudici causa cum mandatis et cum publico 
 testimonio venerunt; qui hunc adscriptum Heracliensem dicunt. 
 Hie tu tabulas desideras Heracliensium publicas, quas Italico bello 
 incenso tabulario interisse scimus omnes? Est ridiculum ad ea 
 quae habemus nihil dicere, quaerere quae habere non possumus ; et 
 de hominum memoria tacere, litterarum memoriam flagitare; et, 
 cum habeas amplissimi viri religionem, integerrimi municipi ius 
 iurandum fidemque, ea quae depravari nullo modo possunt re- 
 pudiare, tabulas, quas idem dicis solere corrumpi, clesiderare. An (j 
 domicilium Romae non habuit is, qui tot annis ante civitatem datam 
 sedem omnium rerum ac fortunarum suarum Romae collocavit? An 
 non est professus ? Immo vero iis tabulis professus, quae solae ex ilia 
 professione collegioque praetorum optinent publicarum tabularum 
 auctoritatem. 5. Nam cum Appi tabulae neglegentius adservatae 
 clicerentur; Gabini, quamdiu- incolumis fuit, levitas, post damnatio- 
 nem calamitas omnem tabularum fidem resignasset Metellus, homo 
 sanctissimus modestissimusque omnium, tanta cliligentia fuit ut ad
 
 1 88 LATIN TEXT 
 
 L. Lentulum praetorem et ad iudices venerit, et unius nominis litura 
 se commotum esse dixerit. His igitur in tabulis nullam lituram in 
 
 11 nomine A. Licini videtis. Quae cum ita sint, quid est quod de eius 
 civitate dubitetis, praesertim cum aliis quoque in civitatibus fuerit 
 adscriptus? Etenim, cum mediocribus multis et aut nulla aut humili 
 aliqua arte praeditis gratuito civitatem in Graecia homines inpertie- 
 bant, Reginos credo aut Locrenses aut Neapolitanos aut Tarentinos, 
 quod scaenicis artificibus largiri solebant, id huic summa ingeni 
 praedito gloria noluisse ! Quid ? [cum] ceteri non modo post civi- 
 tatem datam, sed etiain post legem Papiam aliquo modo in eorum 
 municipiorum tabulas inrepserunt; hie, qui ne utitur quidem illis in 
 quibus est scriptus, quod semper se Heracliensem esse voluit, 
 
 i, reicietur? Census nostros requiris. Scilicet; est enim obscurum 
 proximis censoribus hunc cum clarissimo imperatore, L. Lucullo, 
 apud exercitum fuisse ; superioribus cum eodem quaestore fuisse 
 in Asia; primis, lulio et Crasso, nullam populi partem esse censam. 
 Sed quoniam census non ius civitatis confirmat, ac tantum modo 
 indicat eum qui sit census ita se iam turn gessisse pro cive iis 
 temporibus, quern tu criminaris ne ipsius quidem iudicio in civium 
 Romanorum iure esse versatum, et testamentum saepe fecit nostris 
 legibus, et adiit hereditates civium Romanorum, et in beneficiis ad 
 aerarium delatus est a L. Lucullo pro consule. 6. Quaere argu- 
 menta, si quae potes; numquam enim hie neque suo neque amico- 
 rum iudicio revincetur. 
 
 12 Quaeres a nobis, Gratti, cur tanto opere hoc homine delectemur. 
 Quia suppeditat nobis ubi et animus ex hoc forensi strepitu reficia- 
 tur et aures convicio defessae conquiescant. An tu existimas aut 
 suppetere nobis posse quod cotidie dicamus in tanta varietate rerum, 
 nisi animos nostros doctrina excolamus ; aut ferre animos tantam 
 posse contentionem, nisi eos doctrina eadem relaxemus ? Ego vero 
 fateor me his studiis esse deditum. Ceteros pudeat, si qui ita se 
 litteris abdiderunt ut nihil possint ex iis neque ad communem ad- 
 ferre fructum neque in aspectum lucemque proferre ; me autem quid 
 pudeat, qui tot annos ita vivo, iudices, ut a nullius umquam me 
 tempore aut commodo aut otium meum abstraxerit, aut voluptas 
 
 13 avocarit, aut denique somnus retardarit ? Quare quis tandem me
 
 CICERO, ARCHIAS 189 
 
 reprehendat, aut quis niihi iure suscenseat, si, quantum ceteris ad 
 suas res obeundas, quantum ad festos dies ludorum celebrandos, 
 quantum ad alias voluptates et ad ipsam requiem animi et corporis 
 conceditur temporum, quantum alii tribuunt tempestivis conviviis, 
 quantum denique alveolo, quantum pilae, tantum mihi egomet ad 
 haec studia recolenda sumpsero ? Atque hoc eo mihi concedendum 
 est magis, quod ex his studiis haec quoque crescit oratio et facultas; 
 quae quantacumque in me est, numquam amicorum periculis defuit. 
 Quae si cui levior videtur, ilia quidem certe, quae summa sunt, ex 
 quo fonte hauriam sentio. Nam, nisi multorum praeceptis multis- 14 
 que litteris mihi ab adulescentia suasissem nihil esse in vita magno. 
 opere expetendum nisi laudem atque honestatem, in ea autem per- 
 sequenda omnes cruciatus corporis, omnia pericula mortis atque exili 
 parvi esse ducenda, numquam me pro salute vestra in tot ac tantas 
 dimicationes atque in hos profligatorum hominum cotidianos im- 
 petus obiecissem. Sed pleni omnes sunt libri, plenae sapientium 
 voces, plena exemplorum vetustas; quae iacerent in tenebris omnia, 
 nisi litterarum lumen accederet. Quam multas nobis imagines 
 non solum ad intuendum, verum etiam ad imitandum fortissimorum 
 virorum expressas scriptores et Graeci et Latini reliquerunt ! quas 
 ego mihi semper in administranda re publica proponens, animum et 
 mentem meam ipsa cogitatione hominum excellentium conformabam. 
 
 7. Quaeret quispiam : " Quid ? illi ipsi summi viri, quorum vir- 15 
 tutes litteris proditae sunt, istane doctrina, quam tu effers laudibus, 
 eruditi fuerunt ?" Difficile est hoc de omnibus confirmare, sed 
 tamen est certum quid respondeam. Ego multos homines excellenti 
 animo ac virtwte fuisse sine doctrina, et naturae ipsius habitu prope 
 divino per se ipsos et moderates et graves extitisse fateor; etiam 
 illud adiungo, saepius ad laudem atque virtutem naturam sine doc- 
 trina quam sine natura valuisse doctrinam. Atque idem ego hoc 
 contendo, cum ad naturam eximiam et inlustrem accesserit ratio 
 quaedam conformatioque doctrinae, turn illud nescio quid prae- 
 clarum ac singulare solere existere. Ex hoc esse hunc numero, 16 
 quern patres nostri viderunt, divinum hominem Africanum ; ex hoc 
 C.Laelium, L. Furium, moderatissimos homines et continentissimos ; 
 ex hoc. fortissimnm virum et illis temporibus doctissimum, M.
 
 190 LATIN TEXT 
 
 Catonem ilium senem : qui profecto si nihil ad percipiendam colen- 
 damgue virtutem litteris adiuvarentur, numquam se ad earum studium 
 contulissent. Quod si non hie tantus fructus ostenderetur, et si ex 
 his studiis delectatio sola peteretur, tamen, ut opinor, hanc animi 
 remissionem humanissimam ac liberalissimam iudicaretis. Nam 
 ceterae neque temporum sunt neque aetatum omnium neque lo- 
 corum ; at haec studia adulescentiam alunt, senectutem oblectant, 
 secundas res ornant, adversis perfugium ac solacium praebent, de- 
 lectant domi, non impediunt foris, pernoctant nobiscum, peregri- 
 nantur, rusticantur. 
 
 17 Quod si ipsi haec neque attingere neque sensu nostro gustare 
 possemus, tamen ea mirari deberemus, etiam cum in aliis videremus. 
 8. Quis nostrum tarn animo agresti ac duro fuit, ut Rosci morte 
 nuper non commoveretur? qui cum esset senex mortuus, tamen 
 propter excellentem artem ac venustatem videbatur omnino mori 
 non debuisse. Ergo ille corporis motu tantum amorem sibi con- 
 ciliarat a nobis omnibus; nos animorum incredibiles motus celeri.- 
 
 rS tatemque ingeniorum neglegemus? Quotiens ego hunc Archiam 
 vidi, iudices (utar enim vestra benignitate, quoniam me in hoc novo 
 genere dicendi tarn diligenter attenditis), quotiens ego hunc vidi, 
 cum litteram scripsisset nullam, magnum numerum optimorum ver- 
 suum de iis ipsis rebus quae turn agerentur dicere ex tempore, quo- 
 tiens revocatum eandem rem dicere, commutatis verbis atque sen- 
 tentiis! Quae vero accurate cogitateque scripsisset, ea sic vidi 
 probari ut ad veterum scriptorum laudem perveniret. Hunc ego 
 non diligam, non admirer, non omni ratione defendendum putem? 
 Atque sic a summis hominibus eruclitissimisque accepimus, cetera- 
 rum rerum studia ex doctrina et praeceptis et arte constare ; poe- 
 tam natura ipsa valere, et mentis viribus excitari, et quasi divino 
 quodam spiritu inflari. Quare suo iure noster ille Ennius "sanctos" 
 appellat poetas, quod quasi deorum aliquo dono atque munere com- 
 
 9 mendati nobis esse videantur. Sit igitur, iudices, sanctum apud vos, 
 humanissimos homines, hoc poe'tae nomen, quod nulla umquam bar- 
 baria violavit. Saxa et solitudines voci respondent, bestiae saepe 
 immanes cantu flectuntur atque consistunt; nos instituti rebus opti- 
 mis non poetarum voce moveamur? Homerum Colophonii civem
 
 CICERO, ARCHIAS 191 
 
 esse dicunt suum, Chii suum vindicant. Salaminii repetunt, Smyrnaei 
 vero suum esse confirmant, itaque etiam delubrum eius in opoido 
 dedicaverunt ; permulti alii praeterea pugnant inter se atque con- 
 tendunt. 9. Ergo illi alienum, quia poeta fuit, post mortem etiam 
 expetunt; nos hunc vivum, qui et voluntate et legibus tioster est, 
 repudiabimus praesertim cum omne olim studium atque omne in- 
 genium contulerit Archias ad populi Romani gloriam laudemque 
 celebrandam? Nam et Cimbricas res adulescens attigit, et ipsi illi 
 C. Mario, qui durior ad haec studia videbatur, iucundus fuit. Neque a.,- 
 enim quisquam est tarn aversus a Musis qui non mandari versibus 
 aeternum suorum laborum facile praeconium patiatur. Themisto- 
 clem ilium, summum Athenis virum, dixisse aiunt, cum ex eo quae- 
 reretur, quod acroama aut cuius vocem iibentissime audiret: "Eius 
 a quo sua virtus optime praeclicaretur." Itaque ille Marius item 
 eximie L. Plotium dilexit, cuius ingenio putabat ea quae gesserat 
 posse celebrari. Mithridaticum vero helium, magnum atque dim- 21 
 cile et in multa varietate terra marique versatum, totum ab hoc ex- 
 pressum est; qui libri non modo L. Lucullum, fortissimum et claris- 
 simum virum, verum etiam populi Romani nomen illustrant. Popu- 
 lus enim Romanus aperuit Lucullo imperante Pontum, et regiis 
 quondam opibus et ipsa natura et regione vallatum ; populi Ro- 
 mani exercitus eodem duce non maxima manu innumerabilis Arme- 
 niorum copias fudit; populi Romani laus es^ urbem amicissimam 
 Cyzicenorum eiusdem consilio ex omni impetu regio atque totius 
 belli ore ac faucibus ereptam esse atque servatam ; nostra semper 
 feretur et praedicabitur, L. Lucullo dimicante, cum interfectis duci- 
 bus depressa hostium classis est, incredibilis apud Tenedum pugna 
 ilia navalis; nostra sunt tropaea, nostra monumenta, nostri tri- 
 umphi. Quae quorum ingeniis ecferuntur, ab iis populi Romani 
 fama celebratur. Carus fuit Africano superior! noster Ennius, ita- 22 
 que etiam in sepulcro Scipionum putatur is esse constitutus ex mar- 
 more ; cuius laudibus certe non solum ipse qui laudatur, sed etiam 
 populi Romani nomen ornatur. In caelum huius proavus Cato 
 tollitur ; magnus honos populi Romani rebus adiungitur. Omnes 
 denique illi Maximi. Marcelli, Fulvii, non sine communi omnium 
 nostrum laude decorarrtur. 10. Ergo ilium qui haec fecerat, Rudi-
 
 192 LATIN TEXT 
 
 num hominem, maiores nostri in civitatem receperunt ; nos hunc 
 Heracliensem, multis tivitatibus expetitum, in hac autem legibus 
 constitutum, de nostra civitate eiciemus ? 
 
 23 Nam, si quis minorem gloriae fructum putat ex Graecis versibus 
 percipi quam ex Latinis, vehementer errat; propterea quod Graeca 
 leguntur in omnibus fere gentibus, Latina suis finibus, exiguis sane, 
 continentur. Quare, si res eae quas gessimus orbis terrae regi- 
 onibus definiuntur, cupere debemus, quo manuum nostrarum tela 
 pervenerint, eodem gloriam famamque penetrare; quod cum ipsis 
 populis de quorum rebus scribitur haec ampla sunt, turn iis certe 
 qui de vita gloriae causa dimicant hoc maximum et periculorum in- 
 
 24 citamentum est et laborum. Quam multos scriptores rerum suarum 
 magnus ille Alexander secum habuisse dicitur! Atque is tamen, 
 cum in Sigeo ad Achillis tumulum adstitisset: " O fortunate," inquit, 
 "adulescens, qui tuae virtutis Homerum praeconem inveneris !" Et 
 vere. Nam, nisi Ilias ilia extitisset, idem tumulus qui corpus eius 
 contexerat nomen etiam obruisset. Quid? noster hie Magnus, qui 
 cum virtute fortunam adaequavit, nonne Theophanem Mytilenaeum, 
 scriptorem rerum suarum, in contione militum civitate donavit; et 
 nostri illi fortes viri, sed rustici ac milites, dulcedine quadam 
 gloriae commoti, quasi participes eiusdem laudis, magno illud cla- 
 
 25 more approbaverunt? Itaque, credo, si civis Romanus Archias 
 legibus non esset, ut ab aliquo imperatore civitate donaretur per- 
 ficere non potuit. Sulla cum Hispanos et Gallos donaret, credo, 
 hunc petentem repudiasset ; quern nos in contione vidimus, cum ei 
 libellum malus poeta de populo subiecisset, quod epigramma in 
 eum fecisset tantum modo alternis versibus longiusculis, statim ex 
 iis rebus quas turn vendebat iubere ei praemium tribui, sed ea con- 
 dicione, ne quid postea scriberet. Qui sedulitatem mali poe'tae 
 duxerit aliquo tamen praemio dignam, huius ingenium et virtutem 
 
 26 in scribendo et copiam non expetisset? Quid? a Q. Metello Pio, 
 familiarissimo suo, qui civitate multos donavit, neque per se neque 
 per Lucullos impetravisset? qui praesertim usque eo de suis rebus 
 scribi cuperet ut etiam Cordubae natis poe'tis, pingue quiddam so- 
 nantibus atque peregrinum, tamen aures suas dederet. II. Neque 
 enim est hoc dissimulandum, quod obscurari non potest, sed prae
 
 CICERO, ARCI1IAS 193 
 
 nobis ferendum: tra'himur omnes studio laudis, et optimus quisque 
 maxime gloria ducitur. Ipsi illi philosophi, etiam in iis libellis 
 quos de contemnenda gloria scribunt, nomen suum inscribunt; in 
 eo ipso, in quo praedicationem nobilitatemque despiciunt, praedicari 
 de se ac nominari volunt. Decimus quidem Brutus, summus vir et 27 
 imperator, Acci, amicissimi sui, carminibus templorum ac moni- 
 mentorum aditus exornavit suorum. lam vero ille, qui cum Aetolis 
 Ennio comite bellavit, Fulvius, non dubitavit Martis manubias 
 Musis consecrare. Quare, in qua urbe imperatores prope armati 
 poetarum nomen et Musarum delubra coluerunt, in ea non debent 
 togati iudices a Musarum honore et a poetarum salute abhorrere. 
 
 Atque ut id libentius faciatis, iam me vobis, iudices, indicabo, et 28 
 de meo quodam amore gloriae, nimis acri fortasse verum tamen 
 honesto, vobis confitebor. Nam, quas res nos in consulatu nostro 
 vobiscum simul pro salute huius urbis atque imperi et pro vi-ta 
 civium proque universa re publica gessimus, attigit hie versibus 
 atque inchoavit. Quibus auditis, quod mihi magna res et iucunda 
 visa est, hunc ad perficiendum adhortatus sum. Nullam enim vir- 
 tus aliam mercedem laborum periculorumque desiderat praeter hanc 
 laudis et gloriae; qua quidem detracta, iudices, quid est quod In 
 hoc tarn exiguo vitae curriculo et tam brevi tantis nos in laboribus 
 exerceamus? Certe, si nihil animus praesentiret in posterum, et si, 29 
 quibus regionibus vitae spatium circumscriptum est, eisdem omnes 
 cogitationes terminaret suas, nee tantis se laboribus frangeret, 
 neque tot curis vigiliisque angeretur, nee totiens de ipsa vita dimi- 
 caret. Nunc insidet quaedam in optimo quoque virtus, quae 
 noctes ac dies animum gloriae stimulis concitat, atque aclmonet 
 non cum vitae tempore esse dimittendam commemorationem no- 
 minis nostri, sed cum omni posteritate adaequandam. 12. An vero 3 
 tam parvi animi videamur esse omnes, qui in re publica atque in 
 his vitae periculis laboribusque versamur, ut, cum usque ad extre- 
 mum spatium nullum tranquillum atque otiosum spiritum duxeri- 
 mus, nobiscum simul moritura omnia arbitremur ? An statuas et 
 imagines, non animorum simulacra sed corporum, studiose multi 
 summi homines reliquerunt; consiliorum relinquere ac virtutum 
 nostrarum effigiem nonne multo malle debemus, summis ingeniis 
 '3
 
 194 LATIN TEXT 
 
 expressam et politam ? Ego vero omnia quae gerebam, iam turn in 
 gerendo, spargere me ac disseminare arbitrabar in orbis terrae 
 memoriam sempiternam. Haec vero sive a meo sensu post mortem 
 afutura est sive, ut sapientissimi homines putaverunt, ad aliquam 
 animi mei partem pertinebit, nunc quidem certe cogitatione quadam 
 speque delector. 
 
 31 Quare conservate, iudices, hominem pudore eo, quern amicorum 
 videtis comprobari cum dignitate turn etiam vetustate; ingenio 
 autem tanto quantum id convenit existimari, quod summorum homi- 
 num ingeniis expetitum esse videatis, causa vero eius modi, quae 
 beneficio legis, auctoritate municipi, testimonio Luculli, tabulis 
 Metelli comprobetur. Quae cum ita sint, petimus a vobis iudices, 
 si qua non modo humana, verum etiam divina in tantis ingeniis 
 commendatio debet esse, ut eum qui vos, qui vestros imperatores, 
 qui populi Romani res gestas semper ornavit, qui etiam his re- 
 centibus nostris vestrisque domesticis periculis aeternum se testi- 
 monium laudis daturum esse profitetur, estque ex eo numero qui 
 semper apud omnes sancti sunt habiti itaque dicti, sic in vestram 
 accipiatis fidem, ut humanitate vestra levatus potius quam acerbitate 
 vfolatus esse videatur. 
 
 32 Quae de causa pro mea consuetudine breviter simpliciterque dixi, 
 iudices, ea confido probata esse omnibus; quae a forensi aliera 
 iudicialique consuetudine, et de hominis ingenio et communiter de 
 ipso studio locutus sum, ea, iudices, a vobis spero esse in bonam 
 partem accepta; ab eo qui iudicium exercet, certo scio.
 
 INDEX OF WORDS AND CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 NOTE. The numerical references are to sections and subsections of the Notes 
 on Idiom, letters referring to subsections. Abbreviations : abl. ablative ; ace. 
 = accusative ; adj. = adjective ; adv. = adverb ; constr. = construction ; dat. 
 dative ; gen. = genitive ; ind. disc. = indirect discourse ; infin. infinitive ; prep. 
 = preposition. Other abbreviations are easily understood. 
 
 a distinguished in use from ab and abs, 
 264. 
 
 abhinc = ogv, constr., 129. 
 
 Ablative, syntax of, 101-127; abl. of 
 accompaniment, 107; of cause, 123- 
 124; of degree of difference, 116; of 
 indefinite value, 120; of manner, 121- 
 122; of material, 103; of means, 
 108, no ; of origin or source, 102 ; of 
 place from which, 137 ; of place in 
 which (where), 137 ; of price, iig; of 
 quality, 117-118; of quality with a 
 proper noun, 118; of separation, 101 ; 
 of specification, 106; of time, 128; 
 to express distance from, 136 ; with 
 adjectives (fretus, etc.), in; with a 
 comparative, 104 ; with deponents, 
 (utor, fruor, etc.), 115; with ex or 
 de for partitive gen., 71; with opus 
 est, 114; with verbs of plenty, etc., 
 112; with verbs of reminding, etc., 
 78; ablative absolute, 125-127; abla- 
 tive absolute, relation to subject of 
 main clause, 127; ablative absolute 
 without a participle, 126; ablative 
 absolute representing perf. active par- 
 ticiple, 244; ablative absolute repre- 
 senting English coordination, 310. 
 
 ac (atque) with idem, 32. 
 
 Accompaniment, expressed by cum and 
 abl., 107. 
 
 Accusative, syntax of, 53-58; ace. or 
 cut. with some verbs (ccnsulo, etc.), 
 
 90; double ace., 54-55; of duration 
 of time, 128; with abhinc, 129; to 
 express distance from, 136; of ex- 
 clamation, 58 ; of extent of space, 
 135, 66 ;-acc. of neuter pronouns and 
 adjectives with verbs, 53 ; ace. of 
 person and abl. of thing with dono, 
 etc., 86; of place to which, 137 ; with 
 per = agent through whom, 109 ; with 
 verbs of aiding, pleasing, etc., 88; 
 with verbs of pitying, repenting, etc., 
 80-8 1 ; with verbs of remembering, 
 etc., 76-77. 
 
 Accusing, etc., verbs of, with gen., 82. 
 
 ac si, 217. 
 
 Action, nouns of, 60-61. 
 
 Adjectives, in general, i-io; as sub- 
 stantives, 3-4 ; agreement of attribu- 
 tive adjectives, r ; agreement of predi- 
 cate adj., 2; agreement with natural 
 gender, 2 N. ; comparative of, 5-7 ; 
 denoting a part (medius, totus, etc.), 
 10 ; adjectives* of friendliness, with 
 gen., 93; of friendlintsi with dat., 
 92; adj. use of participles, 245-248; 
 with abl., ill, 113; with gen., 74; 
 stylistic notes, 305-306; Latin adj.= 
 English noun, 301; English gen., 
 63-64; omitted in Latin, 306; order, 
 292. 
 
 adiuvo, 88. 
 
 Adverbs, negative, 275-279; order, 294; 
 pronominal, 21.
 
 196 
 
 INDEX OF 
 
 After, with phrases of lime, 131. 
 
 Agent, expressed In dut. , 95 ; !>y a, ab, 
 with abl., 96. 
 
 Agreement, of adjectives, i - 2 ; of ap- 
 positives, 46-48 ; of predicate nouns, 
 51 ; of collective noun and a verb. 
 149; of subject and predicate, 145- 
 149; of verb, 145-149. 
 
 aliquis, 36-38. 
 
 alius, 45 ; distinction from alter, 45. 
 
 alter, 45. 
 
 Although, 218. 
 
 an in indirect questions, 220 footnote ; 
 indirect questions, 281 N. 
 
 Anaphora, 287 (b). 
 
 Answers, 283. 
 
 antequam, 209-210. 
 
 Apposition, 46-50; to a locative, etc., 
 140; to a possessive pronoun, 48; to 
 two or more nouns, 47 ; with gen. of 
 quality, 67 ; clauses of, introduced by 
 ut, ne, ut non, 192, 199; appositive 
 = English clause of time, etc., 49; 
 = English gen., 62; order, 290. 
 
 As if, 217. 
 
 As long as, 206. 
 
 As soon as, 203. 
 
 Attraction, subjunctive by, 232. 
 
 Auxiliary verbs, English, omitted in 
 Latin, 308. 
 
 Before, with phrases of time, 131 ; with 
 clauses, 209-210. 
 
 -bit, English adjectives in, how ren- 
 dered, 305. 
 
 Caesar, reform of calendar, 133 foot- 
 note. . 
 
 Calendar, 133. 
 
 causa with gen. of gerund, etc , 253. 
 
 Causal clauses, 185-187; with cum, 
 186 ; with quod, quia, quoniam, 
 185; expressed by attributive parti- 
 ciple, 246. 
 
 Causal relatives, 187. 
 
 Cause, abl. of, 123-124. 
 
 ("haracter, gen. of, 65-68. 
 
 Characteristic, clauses of, 182-184. 
 
 Chiasmus, 2hy (<.) 
 
 circumdo, constr. with, S6. 
 
 Clause, English subordinate, expressed 
 by abl. absolute, 125; by participles, 
 246 ; arrangement of, 296-297. 
 
 coepi, constr. of, in passive, 152. 
 
 Collective noun with singular verb, 149. 
 
 Comparative of ' adjectives, 5-7; two 
 comparatives with one noun, 6; ways 
 of strengthening, 7; governing abl., 
 104. 
 
 Comparison, conditional clauses of, 217. 
 
 Conative imperfect, 158. 
 
 Concession, expressed by attributive 
 participle, 246. 
 
 Concessive clauses, 218. 
 
 Conditional clauses of comparison, 217. 
 
 Conditions, 211-216; contrar; to fact, 
 215-216; contrary to fact in ind. 
 disc., 230; apodosis in indicative, 
 216; future ("less vivid"), 214; fu- 
 ture ("more vivid"), 213; future in 
 ind. disc., 229; simple (where apo- 
 dosis states a fact), 211; simple in 
 ind. disc., 229; with apodosis in im- 
 perative, hortatory subjunctive, etc., 
 212 ; expressed by attributive par- 
 ticiple, 246. 
 
 Conjunctions, list of and uses, 266-274 ; 
 adversative, 270 ; causal, 274 ; copu- 
 lative, 266-269 correlative, 272 ; dis- 
 junctive. 271 ; disjunctive correlative, 
 272 ; inferential, 273 ; illative, 273 ; 
 illative and copulative, 273 ; replaced 
 by phrases, 273. 
 
 Connection indicated by order, 288. 
 
 Copulative verbs, 51. 
 
 cum, causal, 186-187; concessive, 218; 
 temporal, 203-205; clauses with, = 
 English perf. active participle, 244; 
 = English present passive participle, 
 244 ; with idem, 32. 
 
 cum primum = as soon us, 203. 
 
 cupio, constr. w\th, 236 N. 
 
 Dates, 132-133. 
 
 Dative, syntax of, 85-100; or ace. with 
 consulo, etc., 90; of advantage, 98;
 
 WORDS AND CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 >97 
 
 of agent, 95 ; of indirect object, 85- 
 86 ; of interest, 97-98 ; of person and 
 ace. of thing with dono, etc., 86 ; of 
 possessor, 94 ; of purpose or end, 99 ; 
 with verbs compounded with preposi- 
 tions (ad, ante, etc.), 91 ; with in- 
 transitives (favor, kelp, etc.), 87; 
 with adjectives, 92 ; of purpose, repre- 
 sented by predicate nominative, 100; 
 retained with passive of intransitives, 
 89. 
 
 Days of the month, 133; division into 
 hours, 134. 
 
 Declaratory sentences in ind. disc., 221, 
 224. 
 
 Degree of difference, abl. of, 116. 
 
 Deliberative subjunctive, 177. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns, 15-24; of 
 first person, 15; of second person, 
 17; of third person, 19; order of, 
 
 293- 
 
 Deponents, with abl., 115; passive 
 missing, how represented, 307. 
 
 Descriptive genitive, 65-68. 
 
 desino, constr. of, in passive, 152. 
 
 Direct reflexive, 25-26. 
 
 Discourse, indirect (see Indirect Dis- 
 course). 
 
 Disjunctive questions (see Double Ques- 
 tions). 
 
 Distance from, how expressed, 136. 
 
 domus, constr., 138. 
 
 dono, constr., 86. 
 
 Double dative, 99 and N. 
 
 Double negative, 276-277. 
 
 Double questions, direct, 282 ; indirect, 
 220 N. 
 
 Doubting, verbs of, constr. , 201. 
 
 dum = as long as, 206; in proviso, 219 ; 
 representing present passive partici- 
 ple, 244; until, 207-208; = while, 
 204. 
 
 dum modo, in proviso, 219. 
 
 dum ne, in proviso,.2ig. 
 
 Duration of time, ace. of, 128. 
 
 e, distinguished in use from ex, 264. 
 Epistolary tenses, 167. 
 
 erga, with ace. = objective gen., 61. 
 
 esse, position, 291 (b). 
 
 et, how avoided in Latin, 310. 
 
 etsi = although, 2 1 8. 
 
 Euphony, 289. 
 
 Exclamation, in the ace., 58. 
 
 Extent of space, ace. of, 135. 
 
 fearing, verbs of constr., 195. 
 Feeling, nouns of, 60-6 1. 
 For, with temporal expressions, 131. 
 Forgetting, verbs of constr. with, 75-76. 
 Future time, in the subjunctive, 172. 
 
 Genitive, syntax of, 59-84; with ad- 
 jectives, 74 ; with nouns of action or 
 feeling, 60 ; of charge or penalty, 82 ; 
 of indefinite value, 84 ; objective. 60- 
 61 ; partitive, 70-73; predicate, 69; 
 of quality, 65-68 ; with verbs, 75-84 ; 
 with verbs of accusing, etc., 82 ; with 
 impersonal verbs, 80 ; with interest, 
 83; with verbs of pity, etc., 7980; 
 with verbs of reminding, 78 ; with 
 potior, 115 N. ; of personal pro- 
 nouns, 12-13. 
 
 Gerund and gerundive, syntax of, 251- 
 260; gerund and gerundive distin- 
 guished, 251 ; genitive, 253 ; dative, 
 255-256 ; dative after words of fitness, 
 256; accusative, 257-258; gerund 
 with ace. represented by gerundive, 
 252; ace. of gerundive with euro, 
 loco, etc., 258; ablative, 259; ge- 
 rundive denoting necessity or obliga- 
 tion, 260; gerundive = English adj. 
 in -ble, 305 ; gerundive of intransi- 
 tive verbs used impersonally, 260; ge- 
 rundive of utor, fruor, etc., 260 N. ; 
 gerundive with mei, tui, sui, etc., 
 254 ; nominative of gerund repre- 
 sented by infin., 253 footnote; phrase 
 with gerund English adj. in -ble, 
 305. 
 
 gratia, with gen. of gerund, etc., 253. 
 
 baud, 275 X. 
 
 haud scio an, 220 footnote.
 
 198 
 
 INDEX OF 
 
 hi;, 15-16; = the folliwing, 16; = the 
 Litter, 15 ;= tke preceding, 16. 
 
 Hindering, verbs of, constr., 194; fol- 
 lowed by quin when negative, etc., 
 200. 
 
 Historical present, 154. 
 
 Historical tenses, 168. 
 
 Hortatory subjunctive, 174 ; in ind. 
 disc., 222. 
 
 Hours, Roman reckoning of, 134. 
 
 idem, 31-32. 
 
 ille, 19-20 ; ille . . . hie = the former 
 . . . the latter, 15; =. the well-known, 
 20 (cf. 68). 
 
 Imperative, 233-234; present, 234; fu- 
 ture, 234; in ind. disc., 222. 
 
 Impersonal expressions with infin. as 
 subject, 235. 
 
 Impersonal verbs with gen., So. 
 
 in with ace. = objective gen., 61. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns, 36-45; order of, 
 293- 
 
 Indicative mode, 173; in apodosis of 
 conditions contrary to fact, 216; in 
 rhetorical questions, 178 
 
 Indirect discourse, 221-232 ; tense of in- 
 fin. in, 224-227; tenses of subjunc- 
 tive in, 225-226; after verbs of 
 promising, etc., 227; with passive 
 verb of saying, 228 ; simple and fu- 
 ture conditions in, 229; conditions 
 contrary to fact in, 230; hortatory 
 subjunctive in, 222; imperative in, 
 222; questions in, 223; wishes in, 
 222; implied, 231. 
 
 Indirect questions, 220. 
 
 Indirect reflexive, 27. 
 
 Infinitive, syntax of, 235-241 ; as object, 
 236; as object of volo, etc., 193; as 
 subject, 235; with video, etc , distin- 
 guished from participle, 248 ; future 
 infin. with verbs of promising, etc., 
 227; in ind. disc., 224; sequence 
 after. 226; tenses of, 240; with sub- 
 ject ace. as object of volo, etc., 238; 
 with subject ace. as subject of par 
 est, etc., 237. 
 
 inquam, order, 291 N. 
 
 Instrument (see Means). 
 
 "Integral part," subjunctive of (see 
 
 Attraction). 
 inter nos, se, etc., 28. 
 Interest, expressed by dat., 97. 
 interest, constr. with, 83. 
 Interrogative pronouns, order of, 293. 
 Interrogative sentences, 280-283. 
 Intransitive verbs, with dative, 87; used 
 
 impersonally in the passive, 89, 150. 
 ipse, 29-30. 
 is, 22-24. 
 Islands, names of small, in constr. of 
 
 place, 138-140 
 iste, 17-18. 
 iubeo, with ace., 88; with infinitive. 
 
 193- 
 
 less, English adjectives in, rendered 
 
 by a phrase, 305 N. 
 \ic.tt = ftlthotig/i, 218. 
 longe, with superlative, 7. 
 
 malim, with subjunctive, 239. 
 Manner, abl. of, 1-21-122; expressed by 
 
 attributive participle, 246. 
 Material, abl. of, with ex, 103. 
 Means, abl. of, 108; means and agent 
 
 distinguished, 108 ; expressed by at- 
 tributive participle, 246. 
 Measure, gen. of, 65-66 ; gen. of, and 
 
 ace. of extent, 66. 
 Measure of difference (see Degree), 
 medius, and other adjectives denoting 
 
 'a part, 10. 
 
 Middle sense of the passive voice, 151. 
 mille, and millia with the gen., 73. 
 miseror, constr. with, 81. 
 Modes, in independent clauses, 173- 
 
 179; in dependent clauses, 180 ff. 
 modo, in proviso, 219. 
 Months, 133. 
 Motion to or from which with several 
 
 nouns, 141. 
 multo with comparative, 7. 
 
 natus, with abl. of origin or source, 102.
 
 WORDS AND CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 199 
 
 ne,' uses, 279; in subject clauses, 191; 
 in object clauses, 190; with verbs of 
 hindering, 194; in clauses of 'pro- 
 viso, 219. 
 
 -ne, in direct questions, 280 (b), 281 ; 
 in indirect questions, 220. 
 
 -ne . . . an, in double questions, 282, 
 220 N. 
 
 Necessity, expressed by the gerundive, 
 260. 
 
 Negative command (see Prohibition). 
 
 Negatives, 275-279; ne, 279; neque, 
 278 ; two negatives = affirmative, 276. 
 
 Neighborhood, idea of, how expressed, 
 
 J39- 
 
 neque, 278. 
 
 No, 283 and Note. 
 
 nomen est, constr. with, 50. 
 
 non, 275 ; position of, causes difference 
 in meaning, 277; represented by ne- 
 que, 278. 
 
 non dubito = <?/ to hesitate, 202. 
 
 n^nne, in questions, 280 (b), 281. 
 
 Nouns, 46-144. 
 
 num, in direct questions, 280 (b), 281 ; 
 in indirect questions, 220. 
 
 Numerals, order of, 292 (c). 
 
 O, interjection, with vocative, 52. 
 
 Object clauses, withutorne, 190; with 
 ut or ut non, 197 ; of the infin., 236, 
 193; of the infin. with subject ace., 
 238. 
 
 Objective genitive, 60-61. 
 
 Obligation, expressed by gerundive, 260. 
 
 omnis, contrasted with quisque, 41. 
 
 opto, constr. with, 236 N. 
 
 opus est, with dat. of person and abl. 
 of thing, 114. 
 
 Order of words, 284-297; flexible in 
 Latin, 284; two types of, 284 ; gram- 
 matical, 284-285; rhetorical, 284, 
 286 ; influenced by emphasis, 287 ; 
 influenced by desire to indicate con- 
 nection, 288; influenced by desire for 
 euphony or rhythm, 289; of adjec- 
 tives, 292; of adverbs, 294; of nu- 
 merals, 292 (c) ; of prepositions, 295 ; 
 
 of pronouns, 14, 293 ; of substantives, 
 
 290; of verbs, 291; of vocative, 52; 
 
 of clauses in a period, 296-297. 
 Ordinals, in dates, 132 footnote; with 
 
 quisque, 43. 
 Origin or source, abl. of, 102. 
 
 Part, adjectives denoting, 10 ; nouns 
 denoting (see Partitive). 
 
 Participles, syntax of, 242-250; defini- 
 tion and temporal force of, 242 ; Eng- 
 lish present = Latin perf . of some de- 
 ponent verbs, 243 ; perfect, of some 
 deponents, 243; attributive, 245-250; 
 attributive, carries main idea, 247 ; 
 attributive, expresses time, cause, 
 manner, etc., 246; present and per- 
 fect, as substantives, 249 ; future, with 
 substantives, 250; perf. passive = Eng- 
 lish adj. in -ble, 305 ; perf. active, 
 how represented in Latin, 244; 
 present passive, how represented in 
 Latin, 244; with video, etc., distin- 
 guished from infin., 248. 
 
 Partitive genitive, 70-73; substitutes 
 for, 71. 
 
 Passive, of intransitive verbs, 89, 150; 
 Latin and English compared in use, 
 
 309- 
 
 per, with ace. to express agent through 
 whom, 109. 
 
 Perfect definite, sequence with, 169. 
 
 Perfect infinitive, sequence with, 171, 
 226. 
 
 Period, definition of and prevalence of 
 in Latin, 296; analysis of, into types, 
 296 N. 
 
 Periphrastic conjugation, 165-166. 
 
 Personal pronouns, 11-14; use of geni- 
 tive of, 12-13; order of, 14. 
 
 Pity, verbs of, constr., 79-80 
 
 Place, constr. of, 135-144; from which, 
 137; to which, 137; in which, 137; 
 in which without in, 144 ; with towns, 
 etc., 138; several nouns of, with a 
 verb of motion, 141 ; with verbs of 
 calling together, etc., 142; with verbs 
 of placing, etc., 143.
 
 2OO 
 
 INDEX OF 
 
 ricnly, verbs of, constr. with, 112. 
 
 1'olite subjunctive, 179. 
 
 Possessive pronouns, 33-35; for gen. 
 of personal pronouns, 13; instead of 
 subjective gen. , 34; order of , 293. 
 
 Possessor, dat. of, 94. 
 
 possum, etc., order, 291 (a). 
 
 postquam, posteaquam, constr. with, 
 203 ; clauses with, to represent perf . 
 active participle, 244. 
 
 "Potential" subjunctive, 179. 
 
 Predicate genitive, 69. 
 
 Predicate nominative, representing dat. 
 of purpose, 100; expressions made 
 up of est with, 237. 
 
 Predicate nouns, 51. 
 
 Prepositions, 263-265 ; in composition 
 with verbs, 91 ; with ace. or abl., or 
 both, 263 ; when repeated, 265 ; 
 order, 295. 
 
 Present, historical, 154; sequence with, 
 170. 
 
 Present passive participle, how repre- 
 sented, 244. 
 
 Price, abl. of, 119. 
 
 Primary tenses (see Principal Tenses). 
 
 Principal tenses, 168. 
 
 priusquam, 209-210. 
 
 Prohibition, 175. 
 
 Pronominal adverbs, 21. 
 
 Pronouns, syntax, etc., 11-45; demon- 
 stratives, 15-24; indefinites, 36-45; 
 personal, 11-14; possessives, 33-35; 
 reflexives, 2527; representing Eng- 
 lish nouns, 303-304; order, 393. 
 
 Proper nouns, not repeated often in 
 Latin, 304. 
 
 Provided that (proviso), 219. 
 
 Proviso, 219. 
 
 Purpose, clauses of, 188-189; contain- 
 ing a comparative, 189; expressed by 
 ad and a gerundive, 257, expressed 
 by supine, 261 ; purpose or end, dat. 
 of, 99. 
 
 Quality, gen. of, 65-68 ; abl. of, 117- 
 118; gen. and abl. of, compared, 65 
 N. 
 
 quam, with superlative, 8; : u compari- 
 sons, 104; omitted with expressions 
 of number or measure, 105. 
 
 quam diu = as long as, 206. 
 
 quamquam, 218. 
 
 quamvis, 218. 
 
 quasi, 217. 
 
 Questions, 280-283; direct, 281; direct, 
 double or disjunctive, 282 ; emphatic, 
 281 N. ; indirect, 220; of doubt, in- 
 dignation, etc., 177; rhetorical, 178; 
 sentence, 280 (b) ; word, 280 (a). 
 
 qui, preceded by is, 22-23; with 
 idem, 32; in result clauses, 196; in 
 purpose clauses, 188. 
 
 quia, 185. 
 
 quidam, 36, 40; quidam ex instead of 
 partitive gen., 71. 
 
 quilibet, 36. 
 
 quin with verbs of hindering, 200; with 
 verbs of doubting, 2OI. 
 
 quis (indefinite), 36-38. 
 
 quispiam, 36. 
 
 quisquam, 36, 39. 
 
 quisque, 36, 41-44; distinguished from 
 uterque, 41 N. ; follows suus, 42; 
 with a superlative, 44. 
 
 quivis, 36. 
 
 quo, in purpose clauses, 189. 
 
 quoad = as long as, 206 ; = until, 207- 
 208. 
 
 quod (causal), 185. 
 
 quominus, with verbs of hindering, 194. 
 
 quoniam, 185. 
 
 Reciprocals, 28, 45. 
 
 recordor, constr. with, 77. 
 
 refert=/V concerns, 83 N. 
 
 Reflexive pronouns, 25-27; direct, 25- 
 26; indirect, 27; with ipse, 29; with 
 quisque, 42. 
 
 Reflexive sense of passive voice, 151. 
 
 Relative clauses, in general, i8c; stat- 
 ing definite facts, 181 ; characteristic, 
 182-184; of cause, 187; of conces- 
 sion, 218; of purpose, 188; of result, 
 196 ; = English adjectives in -bit 
 305-
 
 WORDS AND CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 201 
 
 Relatives, order of, 293 (a). 
 Remembering, verbs of, constr. with, 
 
 Reminding, verbs of, constr. with, 78. 
 res, use of, 299 N. 
 Result, clauses of, 196. 
 Khythm, 289. 
 rus, constr., 138. 
 
 se, 26-27. 
 
 Secondary tenses (see Historical Tenses). 
 
 Sentences, interrogative, 280-283. 
 
 Separation, abl. of, 101. 
 
 Sequence of tenses, 168-171. 
 
 sirnul^=^'.f soon as, 203. 
 
 simul atque (a.c) = as soon as, 203. 
 
 Specification, abl. of, 106. 
 
 Style, remarks on, 298-310. 
 
 Subject clauses with ut or ne, 191 ; with 
 ut or ut non, 198 ; of the infin., 235. 
 
 Subjunctive, deliberative, 177; horta- 
 tory, 174; of polite or modest asser- 
 tion, 179 (a); "potential," 179; in 
 prohibitions, 175 N. ; in wishes (opta- 
 tive), 176; after volo, velim, etc., 
 239; of characteristic, 182, 184; in 
 causal clauses, 185-187; in purpose 
 clauses, 188-189; in result clauses, 
 196; in object clauses, 190, 197; in sub- 
 ject clauses, 191, 198; in appositive 
 clauses, 192, 199 ; in temporal clauses, 
 203-204, 208, 210; in conditions, 214 
 -215; in conditional clauses of com- 
 parison, 217; in concessive clauses, 
 218; in clauses of proviso, 219; tenses 
 of, in ind. disc., 225; by attraction, 
 232; future time in, 172. 
 
 Substantive use of adjectives, 3-4; of 
 participles, 249 ; stylistic remarks on 
 substantives, 298-304. 
 
 sui with gerundive, 254 
 
 Superlative, of adjectives, 7 - 10; 
 strengthened, 7-9; with quam, 8: 
 denoting a part, 10; with quisque, 
 
 44- 
 Supine, syntax of, 261-262; in -urn, 
 
 261 ; in -u, 262. 
 suus, 35. 
 
 talis, use of is like, 23. 
 
 tametsi = although, 218. 
 
 camquam, 217. 
 
 tamquam si, 217. 
 
 Temporal clauses, 203-210; with dum, 
 etc., 206-208; with antequam and 
 priusquam, 209-210; of a definite 
 time in the past, 205 ; of present or 
 future time, 205 ; contemporaneous 
 with main clause, 204; preceding 
 time of main clause, 203. 
 
 Temporal expressions seemingly loca- 
 tive, 130. 
 
 Tenses, 153-172; table of uses, 153; 
 future and future perf., 153, 161 ; fu- 
 ture, how expressed in subjunctive, 
 172; historical, defined, 168; imper- 
 fect, 153, 157-160; imperfect, in 
 descriptive passages, 160; imperfect, 
 of attempted action (conative), 158; 
 imperfect, of customary past action, 
 157 ; imperfect, with iam, etc., 159; 
 of infin., 240; of infin. in ind. disc., 
 224,226; of subjunctive in ind. disc., 
 225; perfect, 153, 162-163; perfect, 
 historical, 153, 162; perfect, definite, 
 153; perfect, indefinite, 153; perfect 
 of verbs of inceptive meaning, 163; 
 periphrastic, 165-166; present, 153- 
 156; present, historical, 154; pres- 
 ent, not used for future in Latin, 
 155; present, with iam, etc., 156; 
 pluperfect, 153, 164; principal, de- 
 fined, 168; sequence of, 168-171; 
 compound tenses of verbs of saying, 
 etc. , 228 ; tenses in letters, 167. 
 
 That, 221 footnote. . 
 
 Time, constructions of, 128-134; how 
 long, 128; when or within what pe- 
 riod, 128 ; how reckoned by Romans, 
 132-134; clauses of, expressed by at 
 tributive participle, 246. 
 
 Towards, with words of time, 131. 
 
 Towns, in constructions of place, 138- 
 139- 
 
 ubi, in clauses of purpose, 1 88 ; of re- 
 sult, 196; of time, 203.
 
 202 
 
 INDEX OF WORDS AND CONbTRUCTlONS 
 
 ullus, 39. 
 
 Until, 207-208. 
 
 usus est, 114 N. 
 
 ut, in clauses of result, 196; of purpose, 
 188 ; -=as, ivhfn, in temporal clauses, 
 203 ; with idem, 32 ; with verbs of 
 fearing, 195; with volo, 239; in 
 object clauses, 190 ; in subject 
 clauses, 191 ; in appositional clauses, 
 192. 
 
 ut primum=rt.r soon as, 203. 
 
 ut si, 217. 
 
 utor, etc., constr. with, 115. 
 
 utrum . . . an, in double questions, 
 282, 220 N. 
 
 Value, indefinite, gen. of, 84. 
 vel, with superlative, 9; as a conjunc- 
 tion, 271. 
 velim, constr. with, 239. 
 
 7Clut, 217. 
 
 velut si, 217. 
 
 Verbs, in general, 145-262 ; agreement 
 with subject, 145-149; with two ace., 
 
 list, 54-55; with gen., list, 75-83; 
 with dat., list, 87, 91 ; with abl., list, 
 IOI-FO2, 112, 115, 143; with infin. 
 as object, list, 193 ; taking infin. as 
 object, list, 236; taking infin. and 
 subject ace. as object, list, 238 ; tak- 
 ing infinitive as subject, 235; imper- 
 sonal, taking infin. and subject ace. 
 as subject, list, 237 ; taking object 
 clauses, list, 190, 197; order of, 285- 
 286, 291 ; of promising, hoping, etc. , 
 with ind. disc., 227 ; of saying, think- 
 ing, etc., personal in passive, 228. 
 
 videor, 228 N. 
 
 Vocative, 52. 
 
 Voice, 150-152. 
 
 volo, constr. with, 193, 238-239. 
 
 IVnnt, verbs of, with abl., 112. 
 Watches, Roman reckoning by, 134. 
 Wishes, 176; in ind. disc., 222. 
 
 Year, how expressed in Latin, 132, 
 Yes, 283 and Note.
 
 INDEX OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 
 
 References are to sections of the Notes on Idiom. Words enclosed in paren- 
 theses are merely illustrative ; any other words in the same construction might be 
 substituted for them. 
 
 About to (go), 165. 
 
 Accuse of (treason), 82. 
 
 Accustomed, am accustomed, 163; was 
 
 accustomed to (get), 157; to (duty), 
 
 no. 
 
 Acquit of, 82. 
 After (five years), 131; (he had), 203; 
 
 (learning these things), 125. 
 Afterwards, not long afterwards, 131. 
 Age, (twenty years) old, 128. 
 Ago, (ten years) ago, 129. 
 All men, 3 ; (good men, the best men), 
 
 44 ; of (these men), 72 ; things, 4. 
 Alone of all, 71. 
 Also, 31. 
 
 Although (I see), 218; 125, 246. 
 Am going (to-morrow), 155. 
 And, 266-269; he left his horse and 
 
 hastened, etc., 310; cf. 296. 
 Any one, 36-39. 
 Appoint, 54. 
 As (a youth), 48, 49 ; as (expensive) as, 
 
 84; as (great, greatly) as possible, 8, 
 
 154; as follows, 16 ; as=since, 186, 
 
 187; as if (they had), 217; as long as, 
 
 206; as soon as (he could), 203. 
 Ashamed of, 80. 
 Ask about, 57 ; (you) for (a book), 55 ; 
 
 (aid) from, 56; (them) to go, 190; 
 
 what (you are reading), 168 ; why (he 
 
 came), 171 ; whether ^1 wish), 220. 
 At home, (Rome), 138; the (Roman) 
 
 games, 130; the same time, 31. 
 Attempt to (hold), 158. 
 Aware, 74. 
 
 Battle of (Marathon), 63, 130. 
 Because (they believed), 185; of (anger), 
 
 123, 124. 
 Before (they reached), 209; (they should 
 
 recover), 210; (five years) before, 131 ; 
 
 two days before, 133 ; before the eyes 
 
 of, 97. 
 
 Begin to be (hurled), 152. 
 Being (the case), 186. 
 Believe, 87; am believed, 89, 228. 
 Born of (an influential family), 102. 
 Both . . . and, 272. 
 Bring under (Roman) rule, 69. 
 By (chance, design), 122, (led on) by 
 
 (hope), 123; (learning), 259; (a sword, 
 
 a soldier), 108; far (the noblest), 7; 
 
 land and sea, 144. 
 
 Call, 54. 
 
 Can, if I can, 161 ; can it be that, etc.? 
 
 281 N. 
 Care a straw, 84; care for, have a bridge 
 
 built (i. e., care for its building), 
 
 258. 
 
 Cease to be (hurled), 152. 
 Commissioner for (repairing), 255 
 Conceal, 55. 
 Concerns (the public welfare, me), 83 
 
 and N., 167. 
 Condemn to death, 82. 
 Consider (it praiseworthy), 99 N. 
 Consult (some one), 90 ; for (someone), 
 
 87, 90. 
 
 Contented with, in. 
 Convict of (inconstancy), 82.
 
 204 
 
 INDEX OF 
 
 Dates, 132, 133. 
 Dear me, 58. 
 Depart for (Cilicia), 167. 
 Desirous of, 74. 
 Disgusted with, 80. 
 Distant, (700 paces) distant, 136. 
 Do not (think), 175, 179 b. 
 Doubt, not doubt that (he will), 201 ; 
 what (he will), 172. 
 
 Each one, 41-44; other, 28, 45. 
 
 Eager for, 74. 
 
 Either ... or, 272. 
 
 Elect (him consul), 54. 
 
 Enjoy, 115, 260 N. 
 
 Enough (defence), 70. 
 
 Equidistant from, 136. 
 
 Every (five years), 43; (good man), 44; 
 
 body, 3 ; thing, 4. 
 Exist, there did exist, 291 b. 
 
 Fear that, that not, 195. 
 
 Feet, twenty feet wide, 65, 66, 135. 
 
 Fellow, 18 ; your fellows, 234. 
 
 Few of, 71. 
 
 Following, 16. 
 
 For, eager for, 74 ; love for (you), 34, 
 60, 61 ; for (a definite day), 131 ; 
 (6000 sesterces), 119; (no large 
 sum), more, less, 120; these reasons, 
 124 ; (transporting an army), 257 ; for 
 the sake of (plundering), 252-254. 
 
 Forget (Epicurus), 75 ; (the affront), 76. 
 
 Forgetful, 74. 
 
 Former, 15 
 
 From, descended from, 102 ; prevent 
 from, 101, 194, 200; refrain from, 
 IOI, 287 (a); from (Italy), 137; 
 (Rome), 138, cf. 140 ; each side, 217 ; 
 the founding of the city, 247. 
 
 Full of, 74, 287 (b). 
 
 Grateful, feel grateful to, 87. 
 
 Happen that, 198. 
 
 Hate, 163. 
 
 Have, I have (a friendship), 94. 
 
 Hesitate, not hesitate to, 202. 
 
 Hinder from (crossing), 101, 194; not 
 
 hinder from, 200. 
 Hope to (be present), 227. 
 However, 31, 270. 
 
 If I can, may, 161 ; (you succeed), 211 
 -213; (you should succeed), 214; 
 (you were succeeding or had suc- 
 ceeded), 215, 216; if only (it maybe), 
 219. 
 
 Ignorant, 74. 
 
 Important for (preserving), 83. 
 
 In, abound in, in need of, 112 ; expert 
 in, sharing in, 74 ; in (reputation), 
 106; (order, silence), 122; (the read- 
 ing), 251, 259; the battle of (Mara- 
 thon), 130; the (consulship) of, 126; 
 (Italy), 137, 141; (Rome), 138, 140, 
 141 ; an (unfavorable) place, the 
 whole (camp), 144. 
 
 Inexperienced, 74. 
 
 Interest of, 83. 
 
 Is he here? isn't he here? 281. 
 
 Know, = be acquainted with, 163; that 
 (he gives), 221, 224; not know but, 
 p. 47, footnote I ; know thou, 234 ; 
 known, = famous, 20. 
 
 Lament, 81. 
 
 Latin, teach you Latin, 55. 
 
 Latter, 15. 
 
 Less (hesitation), 70. 
 
 Let (him come), 174. 
 
 Like, 74, 92, 93. 
 
 Make (the camp safe), 54, footnote , 
 (the departure seem), 197. 
 
 May (ask), 179; (he come), 176; (who- 
 ever he) may (be), 181 ; if I may, 161. 
 
 Midst of, 10. 
 
 Might (say), 173; have (done), 241. 
 
 More (brave) than (prudent), 6. 
 
 Much (danger), -10, 70; (nobler), 7, 116. 
 
 Must (run), 166, 260. 
 
 Name, (his) name (was Marcus), 50; 
 = a verb, 54.
 
 ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 
 
 205 
 
 Near (Rome), 139. 
 
 Neither . . . nor, 272. 
 
 No, 283. 
 
 Not only . . . but also, 272. 
 
 Now for a long time, 156, 159. 
 
 O'clock, (he came at nine) o'clock, 128, 
 
 134- 
 
 Of, be full of, be in need of, 112-114 ; 
 be of the same state, 69 ; become 
 master of, 115; desirous of, full of, 
 74 ; midst of, top of, 10 ; worthy 
 of, in; all of, 72 ; only one of, some 
 of, 71 ; that of, 24 ; battle of (Mara- 
 thon), 63, 130; (Cato) of (Rome), 
 64 ; city of (Rome), 62 ; (man) of (dis- 
 cretion, great discretion), 65, cf. 67 
 and 68 ; (inarch) of (three days), 65 ; 
 (trench) of (twenty feet), 65, cf. 66 ; 
 (great extent), 117 ; one's own accord, 
 30; (silver), 103 ; because of, 123, 124. 
 
 On, put on board, 143 ; on land and 
 sea, the (right, left), 144. 
 
 One another, 28, 45 ; one . . . the 
 other, another, 45 ; one in (ten), 43. 
 
 Only (case), which, 184. 
 
 Or not, 220 N., 282. 
 
 Order (him), 87, 88; to (throw), 193, 
 238 (with infinitive); 190, 154, 170 
 (with subjunctive). 
 
 Ought, 235, 169 ; to be (loved), 166, 
 260; to have (done), 241. 
 
 Pardon, 87, 97. 
 
 Perform (a task), 115, 260 N. 
 
 Permit, 190, 193, 238 ; it is permitted 
 
 to (remain), 235, 193. 
 Person, in person, 30. 
 Persuade, 87; am persuaded, 89; to 
 
 (set out), 190. 
 Pity, 79, 80. 
 Please, 87, 88. 
 Possession, gain possession of, 115, 
 
 260 N. 
 Possible, as (great, greatly) as possible, 
 
 8, cf. 154. 
 Preceding, 16. 
 Present (in person), 30; (times), 15. 
 
 Present (soldiers) with, (booty) to, 86. 
 Prevent from (crossing), 194; not pre- 
 vent from, 200. 
 Promise to (come), 227. 
 Provided (it could be), 219. 
 Punishment, inflict punishment on, 201. 
 Put on board, 143. 
 
 Rain (stones), no. 
 
 Rather too (talkative), 5. 
 
 Reason for, no reason for, 182. 
 
 Recollect, 75-77. 
 
 Refuse, etc., 194; not refuse, etc., 200. 
 
 Regard, out of regard for, 97. 
 
 Relying on, in. 
 
 Remember, 163, 234; (the living), 75; 
 
 (that fact), 76; remembering, = an 
 
 adjective, 74. 
 Remind of, 78. 
 Repent of, 80. 
 
 Represent (him saying), 248. 
 River (Rhine), 62. 
 Ruling, 74. 
 
 Sacrifice (victims), no. 
 
 Same, at the same time, 31 ; same as, 32. 
 
 Say that (he is giving), 221, 224 ; (he 
 
 gives what they ask), 171, 225 ; (he 
 
 gave what they asked), 171, 226 ; say 
 
 that if, etc., 229, 230; is said (to 
 
 have), 171, 228. 
 Seems (to me), 228. 
 Self, 25-27, 29; I enjoy myself, 151. 
 Sharing in, 74. 
 Should (like), 179; (not venture to 
 
 say), 291; (I invite you?), 178; (be 
 
 avoided), 260. 
 Show himself (brave), 54. 
 Shut the door, 170. 
 Since (it is night), 185-187. 
 Skilled in, 74. 
 So (foolish) as to, 196; so large (a 
 
 crowd), 149; so much (danger), 70; 
 
 so much the (more), 116. 
 Some one, 36 - 38 ; some who, 1 82 ; 
 
 something, 36-38, 70. 
 Source, be a source of (glory) to, 99, 
 
 100.
 
 206 INDEX OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 
 
 Such, 23. 
 
 Suitable for, 92 and N". ; (disembarking), 
 256; suitable to (be sent), 184. 
 
 Tell to (send), 222. 
 
 Than, 104, 105; more (brave) than 
 (prudent), 6. 
 
 Thank, 87. 
 
 That (conspiracy) of yours, 17, 18; of 
 his, 1 8, 19; that of Crassus, 24 ; that 
 notorious eagle, 20 ; say that (he is), 
 221; that (he could, = result), 196- 
 199 ; that (he might, = purpose), 188- 
 192 ; that the (more easily), 189. 
 
 The (prudent Volusenus), 68 ; the well- 
 known (Romulus), 20. 
 
 Themselves, of preserving themselves, 
 
 254. 
 
 There are (some) who, 182 ; there is 
 (running), 150. 
 
 Think that (he gives), 221, 224. 
 
 Thousand, 73 
 
 Through the agency of, 109. 
 
 Tired of, 80. 
 
 To, belong to (the same state), 69 ; grant 
 to (them), 85 ; be (an honor) to (him), 
 99, 100 ; go to (Caesar), 137; (Delos), 
 138, cf. 140; (Italy), 137; to the vi- 
 cinity of (Rome), 139. 
 
 Together, come together in one place, 
 142. 
 
 Too (severe), 5. 
 
 Towards (Rome), 139; (evening, win- 
 ter), 131. 
 Try to (hold), 158. 
 
 Until (they drove), 207 ; (he should 
 
 come), 208. 
 Use (horses), 115, 260 N. 
 
 Value, of (great, small) value, 84. 
 Very, 9, 30. 
 
 War, (Punic) war, 63, 130. 
 
 Warn of, 78 ; warn to, 190. 
 
 What, tell what he has done, 220; what 
 
 am I (to do?), 177. 
 When (he had), 203 ; (he was), 204 ; (he 
 
 has had), 205. 
 
 While (he was), 204, 242, 246. 
 Whoever he may be, 18 1. 
 Wish, I should like (you to go), 179 a, 
 
 239- 
 
 Wish to (forget), 193, 236, 238, 239. 
 With, contented with, in ; filled with, 
 
 112, 113; (fight) with (spirit). 121 , 
 
 with (all the cavalry), 107. 
 Worthy of, nr; to (obtain), 184. 
 Would be fair, 173; would have (said), 
 
 179; would that (he were here). 
 
 176. 
 
 Yes or no, 283. 
 You and I, 14, 147. 
 
 THE END
 
 LATIN GRAMMARS 
 
 By ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL.D., Professor 
 Emeritus in Brown University 
 
 Complete Latin Grammar, $1.25 
 
 Short Latin Grammar . . $0.80 
 
 THESE text-books represent the latest advances in philo- 
 logical science, and embody the results of the author's 
 large experience in teaching, and of his own linguistic 
 studies, together with the suggestions and advice of eminent 
 German specialists in the field of historical and comparative 
 grammar. 
 
 ^j Throughout each volume the instruction has been adapted 
 to present methods and present needs. A special effort has 
 been made to develop the practical side of grammar, to make 
 it as helpful as possible to the teacher in explaining the force 
 of involved constructions in Latin authors, and to the learner 
 in understanding and appreciating the thought in a compli- 
 cated Latin sentence. 
 
 ^j The COMPLETE LATIN GRAMMAR is designed to 
 meet the needs of Latin students in both schools and colleges. 
 Simplicity and clearness of presentation, as well as of language, 
 form leading characteristics of the work. Attention is directed 
 particularly to the arrangement of material, and to the treat- 
 ment of etymology, syntax, moods and tenses, subjunctive, 
 indirect discourse, and hidden quantity. 
 ^[ The SHORT LATIN GRAMMAR is intended for 
 those who prefer to begin with a more elementary manual, 
 or for those who do not contemplate a collegiate course. In 
 its preparation the convenience and interest of the student have 
 been carefully consulted. The paradigms, rules, and dis- 
 cussions have in general been introduced in the exact form 
 and language of the Complete Latin Grammar, by which it 
 may at any time be supplemented. The numbering of the 
 sections in the two books is also alike. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
 
 ESSENTIALS OF LATIN FOR 
 BEGINNERS 
 
 By HENRY C. PEARSON, Horace Mann School, 
 Teachers College, New York. Author of Latin Prose 
 Composition, Greek Prose Composition 
 
 $0.90 
 
 THIS book is designed to prepare pupils in a thorough 
 fashion to read Caesar's Gallic War. It contains 
 seventy lessons, including ten that are devoted exclu- 
 sively to reading, and six supplementary lessons. The first 
 seventy lessons contain the minimum of what a pupil should 
 know before he 'is ready to read Latin with any degree of 
 intelligence and satisfaction. The supplementary lessons deal 
 largely with certain principles of syntax that may be taken up 
 or omitted, according to the desire of the teacher. 
 ^[ The vocabularies have been carefully selected, and contain, 
 with very few exceptions, only those words that occur with 
 the greatest frequency in Caesar's Gallic War. About five 
 hundred words are presented in the first seventy lessons. 
 There is a constant comparison of English and Latin usage, 
 but not much knowledge of English grammar on the part of 
 the pupil is taken for granted. The more difficult construc- 
 tions are first considered from the English point of view. 
 ^[ The topics, such as nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, 
 are not treated in a piecemeal fashion, but four or five con- 
 secutive lessons are devoted to one topic before passing on to 
 another. Sufficient change, however, is introduced to avoid 
 monotony. The work is provided with ample reviews ; the 
 regular exercises review the vocabulary and constructions of 
 the preceding lessons, and these are supplemented by review 
 exercises. The last twenty pages are devoted to carefully 
 graded material for reading, composed of selections from Viri 
 Romae and the first twenty chapters of Caesar's Gallic War, 
 Book II., in simplified form. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
 
 EPISODES FROM CAESAR'S 
 GALLIC AND CIVIL WARS 
 
 Edited by MAURICE W. MATHER, Ph.D., formerly 
 Instructor in Latin, Harvard University 
 
 THIS volume presents interesting and important parts 
 of both the Gallic and Civil Wars, and for this 
 reason differs from all other editions of Caesar. The 
 selections from the Gallic War are equivalent in amount to 
 the first four books, and include the account of the Helvetian 
 War in the first book, the conflict with the Nervii in the 
 second, the entire third and fourth books, the description 
 of Britain and the Britons in the fifth book, the comparison 
 of the Gauls and the Germans in the sixth, the failure at 
 Gergovia and the grand success at Alesia in the seventh. 
 From the Civil War about two-thirds as much is taken, 
 including Curio's disastrous African campaign in the 
 second book, and the struggle between Caesar and Pompey, 
 ending with the latter's overthrow and death, in the third 
 book. 
 
 ^[ The notes on the first and second books of the Gallic War 
 are adapted to the needs of classes which begin their study of 
 Caesar wuh either book. Long vowels are marked, and sum- 
 maries and frequent topical headings supply the thread of the 
 narrative. The introduction contains the lives of Caesar and 
 Pompey, a brief description of Caesar's army, and a list 
 of books useful in the study of Caesar. 
 
 ^[ An innovation which will meet with general approval is 
 the printing in full in the vocabulary of the principal parts of 
 verbs and of the genitive of nouns, except in the first conjuga- 
 tion of verbs, and in such nouns of the first, second, and 
 fourth declensions as offer no possibility of mistake. Deriva- 
 tions are adequately explained. The book is abundantly 
 supplied with illustrations, maps, and plans. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
 
 VIRGIL'S AENEID 
 
 Edited by HENRY S. FRIEZE, late Professor of Latin, Uni- 
 versity of Michigan. Revised by WALTER H. DEN- 
 NISON, Professor of Latin, University of Michigan 
 
 First Six Books .... $1.30 Complete $1.50 
 
 Complete Text Edition . . $0.50 
 
 IN its present form this well-known work has been thor- 
 oughly revised and modernized. It is published in two 
 volumes : one containing the first six books, the other the 
 entire twelve books an arrangement especially convenient for 
 students who read more than the minimum College Entrance 
 Requirements in Latin. Both volumes are printed on very 
 thin opaque paper, thus making each an extraordinarily 
 compact and usable book. 
 
 ^[ The introduction has been enlarged by the addition of 
 sections on the life and writings of Virgil, the plan of the 
 Aeneid, the meter, manuscripts, editions, and helpful books 
 of reference. 
 
 ^[ The text has been corrected to conform to the readings that 
 have become established, and the spellings are in accord with 
 the evidence of inscriptions of the first century A.D. To meet 
 the need of early assistance in reading the verse metrically, 
 the long vowels in the first two books are folly indicated. 
 ^f The notes have been thoroughly revised, and largely added 
 to. The old grammar : eferences are corrected, and new ones 
 added. The literary appreciation of the poet is increased by 
 parallel quotations from English literature. The irregularities 
 of scansion in each book are given with sufficient explanations. 
 ^[ The vocabulary has been made as simple as possible, and 
 includes only those words occurring in the Aeneid. The 
 illustrations and maps, for the most part, are new and fresh, 
 and have been selected with great care, with a view to assist- 
 ing directly in the interpretation of the text. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 (256)
 
 A NEW CICERO 
 
 Edited by ALBERT HARKNESS, Ph.D., LL.D., Pro- 
 fessor Emeritus in Brown University ; assisted by J. C. 
 KIRTLAND, Jr., Professor in Phillips Exeter Academy; 
 and G. H. WILLIAMS, Professor in Kalamazoo Col- 
 lege, late Instructor in Phillips Exeter Academy 
 
 Nine Oration Edition . . $1.25 
 
 Six Oration Edition 
 
 FOR convenience this edition of Cicero has been pub- 
 lished in two forms. The larger edition includes the 
 four orations against Catiline, the Manilian Law, Archias, 
 Marcellus, Ligarius, and the Fourteenth Philippic. The 
 smaller edition contains the first six of these orations, which 
 are those required by the College Entrance Examination 
 Board, and by the New York State Education Department. 
 ^[ Before the text of each oration is a special introduction, 
 which is intended to awaken the interest of the student by 
 furnishing him with information in regard to the oration. 
 ^[ The general introduction presents an outline of the life of 
 Cicero, a brief history of Roman oratory, a chronological table 
 of contemporaneous Roman history, a short account of the 
 main divisions of the Roman people, the powers and the 
 duties of magistrates, of the senate, of the popular assemblies, 
 and of the courts of justice. 
 
 ^[ The notes give the student the key to all really difficult pas- 
 sages, and at the same time furnish him with such collateral 
 information upon Roman manners and customs, upon Roman 
 history and life, as will enable him to understand, appreciate, 
 and enjoy these masterpieces of Roman oratory. The gram- 
 matical references are to all the standard Latin grammars. 
 ^[ The vocabulary gives the primary meanings of words, with 
 such other meanings as the student will need in translating 
 the orations. Special attention is devoted to the important 
 subject of etymology. There are many maps and illustrations. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
 
 A TERM OF OVID 
 
 $0.75 
 
 Edited by CLARENCE W. GLEASON, A.M. 
 (Harvard), of the Volkmann School, Boston 
 
 BY THE SAME AUTHOR 
 
 Greek Primer $1.00 
 
 Greek Prose Composition for Schools 80 
 
 Story of Cyrus 75 
 
 Xenophon's Cyropaedia 1.25 
 
 THE ten stories from the Metamorphoses included in 
 this book are: Atalanta's Last Race ; Pyramus and 
 Thisbe ; Apollo's Unrequited Love for Daphne ; 
 How Phaeton Drove his Father's Chariot ; The Death of 
 Orpheus ; The Touch of Gold ; Philemon and Baucis ; 
 The Impiety and Punishment of Niobe ; The Flood ; 
 Perseus and Andromeda. 
 
 *f[ There is a distinct advantage in using these selections 
 from Ovid as a stepping-stone from Caesar to Virgil. 
 Written in an entertaining manner, they net only make the 
 student acquainted with the legends of the gods and heroes, 
 but also lessen the greatest gap in a continuous Latin course by 
 familiarizing him with the vocabulary of Virgil in easier verse. 
 In the present volume are all but 300 of the words found in 
 the first book of the Aeneid. 
 
 ^j The work contains about 1,420 lines of text, with full 
 notes on the text and on scansion, and a vocabulary. The 
 first hundred lines are divided into feet for scansion, with the 
 accents and caesuras marked. The first three stories are 
 accompanied by a parallel, version in the order of ordinary 
 Latin prose, with the quantities indicated. There are also 
 synonyms of words not usual in prose, and of common 
 words in extraordinary uses. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 i 
 
 (264) .
 
 LATIN DICTIONARIES 
 
 HARPER'S LATIN DICTIONARY 
 
 Founded on the translation of Freund's Latin-German 
 Lexicon. Edited by K. A. ANDREWS, I.1..I). Revised, 
 Enlarged, and in great part Rewritten by CHARLTON T. 
 LEWIS, Ph.D., and CHARLES SHORT, LL.D. 
 Royal Octavo, 2030 pages. Sheep, $6.50; Full Russia, $10.00 
 
 ^[ The translation of Dr. Freund's great Latin-German 
 Lexicon, edited by the late Dr. E. A. Andrews, and pub- 
 lished in 1850, has been from that time in extensive and 
 satisfactory use throughout England and America. Mean- 
 while great advances have been made in the science on which 
 lexicography depends. The present work embodies the latest 
 advances in philological study and research, and is in every 
 respect the most complete and satisfactory Latin Dictionary 
 published. 
 
 LEWIS'S LATIN DICTIONARY FOR SCHOOLS 
 
 By CHARLTON T. LEWIS, Ph.D. 
 
 Large Octavo, 1200 pages. Cloth, $4.50 ; Half Leather, $5.00 
 
 ^[ This dictionary is not an abridgment, but an entirely new 
 and independent work, designed to include all of the student's 
 needs, after acquiring the elements of grammar, for the inter- 
 pretation of the Latin authors commonly read in school. 
 
 LEWIS'S ELEMENTARY LATIN DICTIONARY 
 
 By CHARLTON T. LEWIS, Ph.D. 
 
 Crown Octavo, 952 pages. Half Leather $2.00 
 
 ^[ This work is sufficiently full to meet the needs of students 
 in secondary or preparatory schools, and also in the first and 
 .second years' work in colleges. 
 
 SMITH'S ENGLISH-LATIN DICTIONARY 
 
 A Complete and Critical English-Latin Dictionary. By 
 WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D., and THEOPHILUS D. HALL, 
 M.A., Fellow of University College, London. With a 
 Dictionary of Proper Names. 
 Royal Octavo, 765 pages. Sheep $4.00 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
 
 DESCRIPTIVE 
 
 CATALOGUE OF HIGH 
 
 SCHOOL AND COLLEGE 
 
 TEXTBOOKS 
 
 Published Complete and in Sections 
 
 WE issue a Catalogue of High School and College Text- 
 books, which we have tried to make as valuable and 
 as useful to teachers as possible. In this catalogue 
 are set forth briefly and clearly the scope and leading charac- 
 teristics of each of our best textbooks. In m.ost cases there 
 are also given testimonials from well-known teachers, which 
 have been selected quite as much for their descriptive qualities 
 as for their value as commendations. 
 
 ^[ For the convenience of teachers this Catalogue is also 
 published in separate sections treating of the various 
 branches of study. These pamphlets are entitled : Eng- 
 lish, Mathematics, History and Political Science, Science, 
 Modern Foreign Languages, Ancient Languages, Com- 
 mercial Subjects, and Philosophy and Education. A 
 single pamphlet is devoted to the Newest Books in all 
 subjects. 
 
 ^j Teachers seeking the newest and best books foi their 
 classes are invited to send for our Complete High School and 
 College Catalogue, or for such sections as may be of greatest 
 interest. 
 
 ^[ Copies of our price lists, or of special circulars, in which 
 these books are described at greater length than the space 
 limitations of the catalogue permit, will be mailed to any 
 address on request. 
 
 ^j All correspondence should be addressed to the nearest 
 of the following offices of the company: New York, Cincin- 
 nati, Chicago, Boston, Atlanta, San Francisco. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 ____^^_^^___ i 
 
 (3**)
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A 000 729 654
 
 Ui